Pneumatic Conveying System PDF

DOCUMENTATION AND OPERATOR MANUAL
PNEUMATIC CONVEYING SYSTEM
Date : March 2017

TBMA Europe B.V. : 161446
Document number Revision Issue date

161446-001 00 14-03-2017
Inhoud
1 - SUPPLIER .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 - GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 - CONTACT PERSONS ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 – REVISION OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................... 3
2 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION .......................................................................................................... 4
3 - PROCESS DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................ 5
3.1 - PURPOSE OF THE INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... 5
3.2 - PNEUCONVEYOR ............................................................................................................................ 5
3.3 - CONVEYING LINE ............................................................................................................................ 5
3.4 - FOR YOU USE THE INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 6
3.5 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 6
4 - SAFETY.............................................................................................................................................. 7
4.1 - SAFETY SYMBOLS .......................................................................................................................... 7
4.2 - EMERGENCY-STOP......................................................................................................................... 7
4.3 - SAFETY GUARDS ............................................................................................................................ 7
5 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................ 8
6 - OPERATOR MANUAL ....................................................................................................................... 9
6.1 - START PAGE .................................................................................................................................. 9
6.2 - EVENT LINE ................................................................................................................................... 9
6.3 - GLOBAL KEYS ARE ....................................................................................................................... 10
6.4 - PASSWORD ................................................................................................................................. 10
6.5 - PNEUCONVEYOR PAGE SYSTEM NOT READY .................................................................................. 11
6.6 - PNEUCONVEYOR AUTO PAGE ........................................................................................................ 12
6.7 - PNEUCONVEYOR MANUAL PAGE .................................................................................................... 13
6.8 - SETPOINT PAGE ........................................................................................................................... 15
6.9 - PASSWORD PAGE......................................................................................................................... 17
6.10 - ALARM PAGE ............................................................................................................................. 18
6.11 - ALARM LIST ............................................................................................................................... 19
APPENDIX 01 – DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................... 22
APPENDIX 02 – INFORMATION FLUIDISATION................................................................................ 23
APPENDIX 03 – INFORMATION BUTTERFLY VALVES .................................................................... 24
APPENDIX 04 – INFORMATION PRESSURE SWITCH ...................................................................... 25
APPENDIX 05 – INFORMATION PINCH VALVES .............................................................................. 26
APPENDIX 06 – INFORMATION PRESSURE TRANSMITTER .......................................................... 27
APPENDIX 07 – INFORMATION LEVEL SWITCH .............................................................................. 28
APPENDIX 08 – INFORMATION PLC / DISPLAY ............................................................................... 29
APPENDIX 09 – INFORMATION PNEUMATIC VALVES .................................................................... 30
APPENDIX 10 – SPARE PARTS LIST ................................................................................................. 31
Page 2 of 31
1 - Supplier
1.1 - General
Supplier: TBMA Europe b.v.

Delfweg 18
2211 VM Noordwijkerhout
Post address: PO box 140

2210 AC Noordwijkerhout
Nederland
Telephone: 0031-(0)252 37 50 68
Fax: 0031-(0)252 37 54 36
Email: info@tbma.com
Website: http://www.tbma.com
1.2 - Contact persons
Sales: Mr. C. Ryan
Mechanical: Mr. Niels Goossens
Electrical: Mr. Gerard Kamerman
1.3 – Revision overview
Document number Revision Remarks Issue date

161446-001 00 - 14-03-2017
Page 3 of 31
2 - Technical specification
Product : Portland cement
Particle size : Powder 50,0 [µm]

3]
Bulk density : 1200 [kg/m
Temperature : 0 / +40 [°C]
Installation : Outside
Process zone : Safe area
Conveying capacity : 10.000 [kg / h]

3]
Batch size : 0.7 [m
3
Compressed air consumption : ± 8 m /minute at transport
3
± 12 m /minute at afterblow.
Compressed air quality : 6 Bar(g) pressure, dew point 20°C lower than the ambient
temperature.
Set to ± 4 bar.
2.1 - Type plate
Not part of the TBMA delivery.
Page 4 of 31
3 - Process description
3.1 - Purpose of the installation
To transport Portland cement flour from one silo to a receiving silo.
3.2 - Pneuconveyor
The pneuconveyor take cares of the pneumatic transport of the product.
The pneuconveyor shall fill itself till the high-level switch is reached.
The transport is a dense phase pneumatic transport.

The amount of product in the line is regulated with a manual butterfly valve on the bottom of the
pneuconveyor. And the pulse and vack valve witch will intermediate supply compressed air in the
conveying line. The manual butterfly valve is adjusted and secured by TBMA.
If you want to adjust the product flow through the manual butterfly valve you can readjust it.
Don’t forget to secure it after the adjustment.
To insure a steady compressed air quantity for a stable transport there are some important matters to
take in account.
There is a duze for the transport and a orifice plate for the afterblow mounted in the conveying line.
With a constant pressure before the duze and orifice plate the air quantity is always the same.
This way you are able to have a stable transport. To regulate the product air ratio in the conveying line
the PLC shall open and close the pulse and vack valve in a programmed sequence.
The compressed air for the transport must be between 3 – 6 Bar.

The air regulator is adjusted by TBMA to the right value.
The instrument air for the valves must be between 5 – 6 Bar.
The instrument air for the pinch valves must be 2 Bar higher than the transport pressure.
The compressed air and instrument air should be dry and clean.
Before you start to work on the pneuconveyor or conveying line check if there is no air pressure.
Close and relieve the instrument air line to the pneuconveyor, to be sure that the valve can not
operate. Otherwise you can hurt your fingers inside a valve.
3.3 - Conveying line
The conveying line is not part of the TBMA delivery.
The following Point are important for a stable pneumatic transport:
1. Pneumatic conveying lines must be mounted horizontal or vertical.

Avoid slope conveying lines.
2. Pneumatic conveying lines must be smooth on the inside.
Avoid sudden changes in diameter of the conveying line.
3. Gaskets between flanges must be of the same dimensions as the inside pipe diameter.
They must be mounted in so that they are smooth on the inside with the conveying line.
4. (abrasive resistant)bends must be with a minimum radius of 10 times the nominal pipe
diameter and have a minimal straight end of 500mm.
5. Before and after a bent or equipment, there must be a minimal 2m of straight conveying
line.
6. Size adjustment pieces must have an angle of 15º or less.
Page 5 of 31
3.4 - For you use the installation
. Check if the product is dry and clean.
. Check if there is enough space in the receiving silo to hold the material.
. Check if the system is empty and clean.
. Check if the mechanical connections are in a good condition.
. Check if the compressed air and instrument air are switched on and of the right pressure.
. Check if the electrical power is switch on.
. Check if there are no alarms active.
If you have checked these points above you are able to start the system.
3.5 - Sequence of operation

When the external start enable is high and you press the start key the pneuconveyor program
sequence shall start.
The filling valve shall be opened.
The external filling signal becomes high.
The bottom valve of the silo shall de opened.
When high level is reached or the stop key is pressed the bottom valve shall be closed.
The external filling signal becomes low.
The vent valve shall be closed.
The outlet valve shall be opened.
The pulse valve shall be opened for the given time.
The pulse valve shall be closed.
The vack valve shall be opened for the given time.
The vack valve shall be closed.
And so on.
Till the low pressure setpoint is reached.
The pneuconveyor is empty.
When the start signal is still high the pulse valve shall be opened.
The outlet valve shall be closed.
The vent valve shall be opened.
The sequence shall start at the beginning again.
When the start signal is low.

The pulse valve, vack valve and afterblowe valve shall be opened for the set time.
To clean the pneuconveyor and transport line.
The outlet valve shall be closed.
The vent valve shall be opened.
The transport is done.
Page 6 of 31
4 - Safety
Before you operate or maintain the installation you must read and understand this manual.
If in doubt contact TBMA service personnel.
In general the user should take care of:
 Avoid all situation witch can cause danger or safety risks to man or machine.
 Before you operate or maintain the installation you must read and understand this manual.
 Meet the local safety rules.
 Only qualified personnel can operated and maintain the installation.
 Make sure that all safety equipment is available on side before you start working.
 This manual should be available on side close to the pneuconveyor.
To enable operators and service personnel to read it.
 Operators and service personnel must use the correct tools for the job.
 Operators and service personnel must ware there protective gear (clothing, shoes, etc.)
witch are subscribed for the area they work in.
 The installation must have a good earth connection.
All individual parts must be connected to this earth point.
4.1 - Safety symbols

IMPORTANT – PAY ATTENTION - SAFETY FIRST
PERSONAL INJURY WHEN YOU DO NOT MEET THIS INSTRUCTION
BEWARE!!
WHEN YOU DO NOT MEET THIS INSTRUCTION YOU CAN DAMAGE THE INSTALLATION
4.2 - Emergency-stop
There is an emergency-stop available on the operator panel.
The customer should provide an emergency-stop on the receiving end of the conveying line.
Connecting terminals are available in the operating panel.
When activated the moving parts are powerless.

(Also the pneumatic transport).
After activation of the emergency-stop you must first resolve the emergency situation before
you reset the alarm.
4.3 - Safety guards

All safety guards are an essential part of the installation.
They should be operational at all times.
Page 7 of 31
5 - General description
Turn the main switch to the ON (1) position.
It will take some time to start the PLC and display program.
When the display unit is started the unit is ready to use.
When the external enable to start is active you can start the pneuconveyor by pressing the
“Start” key.
The program sequence is activated. The pneuconveyor shall be filled till high level. The
pneuconveyor shall be discharged till the low pressure setpoint is reached.
As long as the start signal is active the sequence shall continue.
With the pulse and vack time you can achieve a desired transport pressure
To be able to let the pressure rise in the pneuconveyor there is a minimal transport time.
There are 2 low pressure limits, one during transport and one when the start signal is low.
The low pressure during transport can be higher than the low pressure at stop.
When the start signal is high the pulse valve shall continue transport during filling the
pneuconveyor.
At stop the pneuconveyor and conveying line will be emptied before the system stops.
When the enable to start signal disappears the pneuconveyor shall go to a hold.
When the pneuconveyor is filling the sequence shall stop right away.
When the pneuconveyor is discharging the sequence shall stop when the pneuconveyor is
empty.
If the enable to start signal comes back the pneuconveyor will continue the program sequence.
Page 8 of 31
6 - Operator manual
6.1 - Start page
Alarm line
The top line in the display is the alarm line.
When an alarm is active the text shall show on this line.
6.2 - Event line

The top line is also the event line.
In this line you can read the state where the program sequence is in.
Possible events are:

System wait for start : Press the start key to start the pneuconveyor.
Check pressure pneuconveyor : The pneuconveyor is checking the filling pressure.
Open vent valve : The system opens the vent valve.
Open filling valve : The system opens the filling valve.
Open silo valve : The system opens the silo valve.
Pneuconveyor is filling : The pneuconveyor is filling.
Close silo valve : The system closes the silo valve.
Close filling valve : The system closes the filling valve.
Close vent valve : The system closes the vent valve.
Open outlet valve : The system opens the outlet valve.
Open pulse valve : The system opens the pulse valve.
Open vack valve : The system opens the vack valve.
Check start : The system checks the start conditions.
After-blow transport line : The system cleans the transport line.
Close outlet valve : The system closes the outlet valve.
Check pressure pneuconveyor : The system is checking the pressure.
Open vent valve : The system opens the vent valve.
Page 9 of 31
The possible keys are:
Setpoint page = Go to the setpoint page’s (password needed)
Pneuconveyor page = Go to the pneuconveyor page.
Alarm page = To the alarm page (only visible when an alarm is active).
Reset alarm = Reset an alarm (only visible when an alarm is active).
6.3 - Global keys are

When you touch an input field you get the following pop-up.
When the input field is a setpoint you get the following pop-up.
In the top line you see the minima land maximal value you can give in.
6.4 - Password
When you press a key where a password level is needed you see the above screen.
Fill in a user, press the enter key.
Fill in the password, press the enter key.
Press the OK field.
Press the key again and you will enter the desired page.
To go to the password page you must log on as Chef.
Page 10 of 31
6.5 - Pneuconveyor page system not ready
When you power up the system or the emergency-stop was pressed you see the yellow pop-up,
“Press the start key to start the system”.
Press the start key to place the system to ready to use
Page 11 of 31
6.6 - Pneuconveyor auto page
Visible:
0 in silo = Number of the connected silo.
0 mbar = The pressure in the pneuconveyor.
HLS grey = No level.
HLS green = Level switch reached.
Valve grey/blue = Valve closed
Valve green = Valve open
Valve red = Valve alarm
= Go to the previous page.

Pneuconveyor manual = Go to the manual page’s (password needed)
Start = Start the transport system.
Stop = Stop the transport system.
Tag number visible = Make tag number visible.
Page 12 of 31
6.7 - Pneuconveyor manual page
Visible:
0 in silo = Number of the connected silo.
0 mbar = The pressure in the pneuconveyor.
HLS grey = No level.
HLS green = Level switch reached.
Valve grey/blue = Valve closed
Valve green = Valve open
Valve red = Valve alarm

st
Open = 1 time open the silo valve.
nd
Silo valve 2 time close the silo valve.
XYO82
st
Open = 1 time open the filling valve.
nd
Filling valve 2 time close the filling valve.
XYO70
st
Open = 1 time open the vent-filling valve.
nd
Vent-filling valve 2 time close the vent-filling valve.
XYO77
st
Close = 1 time close the vent valve.
nd
Vent valve 2 time open the vent valve.
XYC73
st
Open = 1 time open the after-blow valve.
nd
After-blow valve 2 time close the after-blow valve.
XYO76
Page 13 of 31
st
Open = 1 time open the fluidisation valve.
nd
Fluidisation valve 2 time close the fluidisation valve.
XYO75
st
Open = 1 time open the vack valve.
nd
Vack valve 2 time close the vack valve.
XYO72
st
Open = 1 time open the pulse valve.
nd
Pulse valve 2 time close the pulse valve.
XYO71
st
Open = 1 time open the outlet valve.
nd
Outlet valve 2 time close the outlet valve.
XYO74

Pneuconveyor AUTO = Go to the auto page.
Start = Start the transport system.
Stop = Stop the transport system.
Tag number visible = Make tag number visible.
Page 14 of 31
6.8 - Setpoint page
Visible:
00 Step = Number of the active sequence step.
Setpoints:
0000 mBar Start filling pressure = When the air pressure is below this setpoint the
pneuconveyor shall start filling.
Adjustable between 0 – 4000 mBar normal 50 mBar.
0000 mBar High pressure = When the air pressure rises above this setpoint the vackvalve
closes and the pulse valve shall open.
In an attempt to remove the block in the conveying line.
When the pressure gets below this setpoint the normal
transport shall continue. When the pressure stays high for
more than 30 seconds there will be an alarm.
0000 mBar Low pressure transport = When the air pressure is below this setpoint during transport
the pneuconveyor is empty, there is some product remaining
in the conveying line.
0000 mBar Low pressure at stop = When the air pressure is below this setpoint when you have
stopped conveying the pneuconveyor and conveying line are
empty.
000 s Maximum filling time = When this time is expired during filling there is an alarm.
Adjustable between 0 – 999 s normal 60s.
Page 15 of 31
00,0 s Pulse time = Time to add compressed air to the conveying line.
Adjustable between 0 – 99,9 s normal 5s.
00,0 s Vack time = Time to add product to the conveying line.

Adjustable between 0 – 99,9 s normal 1,5s.
000 s Minimal discharge time = Time to allow the pressure to rise in the beginning of the
discharge cycle.
000 s Low pressure time = The pressure must be longer than these time below the low
pressure setpoint before the signal pneuconveyor empty is given.
000 s Maximum discharge time = When this time is expired during discharge there is an alarm.
000 s Afterblow time = Time necessary to clean the conveying line after transport.
000 s Fluidisation. pulse time = Time to allow compressed air to enter the pneuconveyor to help
discharge the product.
000 s Fluidisation pause time = Time between the fluidisation pulses.


Reset PLC = Reset the PLC sequence (password protected by level chef).
Password page = Edit the password page (password protected by level chef).
Page 16 of 31
6.9 - Password page
When you have the wrights of chef you can enter the password page.
You have the possibility to check and change passwords.
Select the field you want to change.
Fill in the new password and press the “ENTER” key.
Page 17 of 31
6.10 - Alarm page
When there is more than 1 alarm you can check them on the page.
Check the list below for the possible alarms.
= Acknowledge an alarm.

Reset alarm = Reset an alarm.
Page 18 of 31
6.11 - Alarm list
Alarm Possible cause Possible solusion

Alarm Emergency-stop Emergency stop button pressed. Check why the button is pressed?
Reset emergency stop button.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm High pressure Transport pressure to high. Wet product / wet air?
Conveying line blocked. Remove the block in the conveying line.
Setting air pressure regulator is too Check the setting on the air pressure
high. regulator.
High pressure setpoint value is to low. Check the setpoint on the display unit.
Pressure transmitter connection is Clean the nozzle
blocked.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm Start pressure to The pneuconveyor can’t start filling
high because the pressure is too high.
Vent pipe line is blocked. Remove the block in the vent line.
Vent valve did not open. Check if this alarm is also active.
Setpoint value start filling is to low. Check the setpoint on the display unit.
Pressure transmitter connection is Clean the nozzle.
blocked.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm Filling time Filling the pneuconveyor takes to
expired long. Remove the block in the silo.
Outlet silo is blocked. Remove the block in the filling pipe.
Filling pipe is blocked. Check if this alarm is also active.
Start filling pressure to high. Check if this alarm is also active.
Filling valve did not open. Check if this alarm is also active.
Bottom valve did not open. Check the setpoint on the display unit.
Setpoint value is to short. Reset the alarm.
Alarm Discharge time Discharging the pneuconveyor takes
expired to long.
There is a block on the bottom of the Remove the block in the pneuconveyor.
pneuconveyor.
The conveying line is blocked. Remove the block in the conveying line.
The setting of the manual bottom Check the setting of the manual bottom
valve is changed. valve.
Setting air pressure regulator is to Check the setting on the air pressure
low. regulator.
Check if this alarm is also active.
Filling valve did not close. Check if this alarm is also active.
Vent valve did not close. Check the setpoint on the display unit.
Setpoint value is to short. Reset the alarm.
Alarm filling valve not The limit switch of the valve dose not
closed gives the signal.
Valve blocked. Remove the block of the valve.
No or not enough instrument air Check the setting on the instrument air
pressure available. pressure regulator.
No electrical power to the limit switch. Check the cirquitbreaker.
Manual overwrite on the solenoid is Switch the manual overwrite to the off
switched on. position.
Solenoid valve blocked. Clean the solenoid valve.
Limit switch out of position. Check the position of the limit switch.
Reset the alarm.
Page 19 of 31
Alarm Possible cause Possible solution
Alarm filling valve not The limit switch of the valve dose not
open gives the signal.
No electrical power to the solenoid Check the cirquitbreaker.
valve.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm silo valve The limit switch of the valve dose not
gives the signal.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm vent valve not The pressure switch of the valve dose
closed not gives the signal.
Pressure setting of the pressure Check the setting of the pressure switch.
switch out of reach.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm vent valve not The pressure switch of the valve still
Air silencer in the quick relieve valve Clean or replace the air silencer.
is blocked.
Quick relieve valve not functioning. Check the quick relieve valve.
valve.
switch is lost.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm outlet valve not The pressure switch of the valve dose
closed not gives the signal.
switch out of reach.
Reset the alarm.
Page 20 of 31
Alarm Possible cause Possible solution
Alarm outlet valve not The pressure switch of the valve still
Air silencer in the quick relieve valve Clean or replace the air silencer.
is blocked.
Quick relieve valve not functioning. Check the quick relieve valve.
valve.
switch is lost.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm Vent-filling valve The limit switch of the valve dose not
not closed gives the signal.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm Vent-filling valve The limit switch of the valve dose not
not open gives the signal.
valve.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm No compressed No or not enough instrument air Connect the compressed air hose.
air pressure available. Check the available air pressure.
No electrical power to the pressure
switch. Check the cirquitbreaker.
Reset the alarm.
Alarm No silo connected Connector to the silo not connected. Connect the plug to the socket.
No electrical power to the pressure Check the cirquitbreaker.
switch.
Reset the alarm.
Page 21 of 31
Appendix 01 – Drawings
Page 22 of 31
Number POSITION CONNECTION DESCRIPTION
N1 45° FLANGE DN80 - PN10 VENT CONNECTION
N2 90° FLANGE DN50 - PN10 -
N3 135° ½'' WELDING SOCKET PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
N4 180° 1½'' WELDING SOCKET HIGH LEVEL SWITCH
N1
N5 225° ½'' WELDING SOCKET PRESSURE GAUGE
N6 270° EARTHING LUG -
N6 N2
N3
N5
N4
1300
2'' EXTERNAL THREAD

AIR SUPPLY CONNECTION
3'' EXTERNAL BSP
Description Units
General information
Location - Outside
Operating temperature °C +5 / +35
Height above sea level m 165
Area classification dust / gas - Safe
Enviroment protection rating - IP56
Construction materials - Mild steel
Operational hours (availability) h / yr 24 hours per day 7

2801
1812
days per week
2'' EXTERNAL BSP

Conveying information
2801
2245
1500
Conveying gas - Compressed air

Gas pressure available bar(g) 4
910
4'' EXTERNAL BSP
910
Conveying capacity t/h 10
Horizontal distance m 150
Vertical distance m 25
197
197
Number of conveying bends - 10

1840 1178 Number of diverter valves - 2
Product information
1178,5 1141 1282
Product name - Portland cement
Components of product
Water % 0
114,3 x 6.3
Cement % 100
Others % 0
Specific gravity kg/m3 2500
Tamped bulk density kg/m3 1200
Aerated bulk density kg/m3 1000
Free-flowing
10
Characteristics -
0
1118 Fluidisable
Toxic - No
Moisture content %wt 0
0
10
Particle size µm 70
Angle of repose ° 30
Abrasiveness Mohs 3-4
Kst value bar.m/s Not applicable
1118
Pmax bar Not applicable

Product temperature °C 25
GA PNEUCONVEYOR 700L Customer
Inq. Nr
Member of TBMA Holding BV Projection Order Nr
Date 09-02-2017
method Drawn by NG
TBMA Status TBMA Status
Process, material & mechanical handling equipment
In work D
Appr. by
A1
Delfweg 18 , 2211 VM Noordwijkerhout - Holland
Tel.: +31 (0)252 375068 / Fax: +31 (0)252 375436 File
-
Revision Revision
description - 1:20
All rights strictly reserved. Reproduction or issue to third parties in any A017791 00
form whatever is not permitted without written authority from the proprietors.
Appendix 02 – Information fluidisation
Page 23 of 31
TM
V ibr a-Flow
VIBRATING FLUIDISATION
DEVICE
GUIDE OPERATION
AND INSTALLATION
Manuale n.: AT.VF-I001
Versione del: 31/04/2000
via Ungheri, 3/F - 40012 Lippo di Calderara (BO) - Italy - Tel. (051) 72.51.28/72.50.40 - Fax (051) 72.51.46
E-mail: airtec@air-tec.it - htpp: //www.air-tec.it
Vibrating Fluidisation
Device
2
Index Vibrating Fluidisation
Device
Sect.1 - Operating Principles ............................................................................... 4

HOW VIBRA-FLOW WORKS ..............................................................................................4
Sect.2 - Guide to Installation ................................................................................ 5
GENERAL INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................5
INSTALLATION OF MOD. I .................................................................................................6
INSTALLATION OF MOD. E ................................................................................................7
Sect.3 - Operating Logic ....................................................................................... 8
Sect.4 - Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 9
Sect.5 -Vibra-Flow Air consumption .................................................................. 10
Sect.6 - Vibra-Flow Installation ........................................................................... 11
TANKS from 600mm to1199mm ......................................................................................... 11
TANKSI from 1200mm to 1799mm .....................................................................................12
TANKS from 1800mm to 2399mm ......................................................................................13
TANKSI over 2400mm ........................................................................................................ 14
Sect.7 - Vibra-Flow Installation Diagram ............................................................ 15
Sect.8 - Sequential Timer Diagram ..................................................................... 19
Sect.9 - Vibra-Flow Diagram ............................................................................... 20
MODEL I ............................................................................................................................20
MODEL E ...........................................................................................................................21
3
Sect. 1.1
Device
HOW VIBRA-FLOW WORKS
VIBRA-FLOW
"Air on" phase

Air is introduced into the tank through the Vibra-Flow
conduit, which forces the air to make a circular
sweep over the surface of the tank wall so as to
detach material from the latter.
This flow of air breaks up the material, keeping it
moving during the discharge phase.
Besides keeping the inner tank surface clean, the
air passing through the Vibra-Flow
causes the rubber pad to vibrate, thus keeping it
clean as well.
For best results when discharging materials, you are
recommended to activate a pulse flow of compressed
air rather than a continuous flow.
Flow should be turned on only when the tank
discharge valve is open.
"Air off" phase

When the Vibra-Flow is not active, the pressure of
the material it is immersed in and the elasticity of
the rubber used to manufacture it cause the rubber
pad to press against the tank wall.
This prevents any material from getting into the
compressed air line.
CA UTION:
CAUTION:
WORKING CONDITIONS.
AIR-TEC COMPRESSED AIR EXTRACTION SYSTEMS FOR TANKS ENJOY
AN EXCELLENT REPUTATION FOR THEIR PERFORMANCE AND RELIABILITY EVEN IN
SEVERE CONDITIONS. HOWEVER, THE VIBRA-FLOW HAS BEEN DESIGNED AND BUILT
FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS AND MAY ONLY BE USED IF THE PRESCRIBED CONDITIONS
ARE MET IN TERMS OF PRESSURE AND VOLUME OF THE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY.
THE USER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE MATERIALTREATMENT CONDITIONS,
INSTALLATION AND USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THESE FLUIDISATION SYSTEMS.
THEREFORE, AIR-TEC SYSTEM WILL ACCEPT NO LIABILITY FOR INJURY TO PERSONS
AND/OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THEIR USE.
THE USER WILL THUS BE FULLY LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIMS ARISING DIRECTLY
OR INDIRECTLY IN CONNECTION WITH THE PRODUCT AND/OR ITS USE.
4
Sect. 2.1
Guide to installation Vibrating Fluidisation
Device
GENERAL INSTALLATION
1. Place the Vibra-Flow perpendicular to the wall of the
hopper (fig.1).
2. Do not weld any part of the Vibra-Flow (fig. 2).
3. The user must supply dry, clean compressed air.

See graph in sect. 6.2 for the air supply pressure.
4. Before connecting the air supply line to the Vibra-Flow,

make sure that all supply lines are free of metal fragments
and debris.
Fig. 1
5. Make sure that the Vibra-Flow is connected as shown in
the drawings provided.
6. For information regarding installation see:

- sect. 6.3. for hoppers with diam. from 900 to 1180 mm;
- sect. 6.4.for hoppers with diam. from1200 to1500 mm
- sez. 6.5. for hoppers with diam. from 1800 to 2400mm
- sez. 6.6 for hoppers with diam.over 2400 mm.
7. When the Vibra-Flow has been installed, check whether

there are any air leaks and take action accordingly.
DO NOT WELD
Fig. 2
CA UTION:
CAUTION:
WORKING CONDITIONS
THE MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE OF THE VIBRA-FLOW IS 7 BARS
THE MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF THE VIBRA-FLOW IS120°C.
5
Sect.2.2
Vibrating Fluidisation Guide to installation
Device
INSTALLATION OF THE VIBRA-FLOW mod. I

1. Drill a 14mm hole in the wall of the hopper
2. Fit the Vibra-flow into the hole and tighten the nuts against the outer wall.
Inner wall of hopper 14mm hole
1 4
/ ” gas
ø 45
AIR
45
100
Fig. 3
6
Sect. 2.3
Guide to installation Vibrating Fluidisation
Device
INSTALLA
INSTALLATION OF VIBRA-FL
ALLATION OW mod. E
VIBRA-FLO
1. Fashion a precise hole for a 2" coupling in the wall of the hopper using a crown saw.
2. Cut and weld a 2" threaded pipe so that the coupling can be inserted in the inner part of the
hopper wall. Take care to protect the thread against welding sprays.
3. Install the Vibra-Flow in the coupling
Inner wall of the hopper
1 4
/ ” gas
ø 76
AIR
25
40
Fig.4
7
Vibrating Fluidisation Sect. 3.1
Device
Operating Logic
NOTE: o test the device, turn on the control board power supply and connect the compressed air supply.
1. Activate the fluidisation function
2. The Vibra-Flows will pulse and vibrate for 0.5 seconds
3. The inflow of air will stop and the Vibra-Flows will remain idle for 3 seconds.
4. This sequence will continue until the electric control board is disconnected.
START
SYSTEM NO
END OF SEQUENCE
ON
YES
VIBRA-FLOWS PULSE AND VIBRATE FOR 0.5

SECONDS
NO
SYSTEM
ON
SI
IDLE FOR 3
SECONDS
YES NO
SYSTEM
ON
LEGEND
DECISION DATA HANDLING
ACTION PROCESS CHOSEN

ACCORDINGLY
TERMINAL TO SPECIFY THE START OR END
SYMBOL CONDITION OF THE ALGORITHM.
8
Sez. 4.1 Troubleshooting Vibrating Fluidisation
Device
Symptom Problem Remedy

•The air supply line has leaks • Fix the leaks
VIBRA-FLOW LEAKS AIR
• The Vibra-Flow is not properly • Fasten the Vibra-Flow so that the

fastened to the wall of the hopper cone fits tightly and securely against
the inner wall of the hopper
• Electric fault • Check the electrical work and

replace any defective parts
• Make sure that the compressed
• Air pressure too low air supply to the Vibra-Flow is
VIBRA-FLOW DOES NOT PULSE between 6 and 8 bars
• Leak in the compressed air

• Fix the leak
supply line
• Check the electrical work and

• Electric fault
replace any defective parts.
9
Device Vibra-Flow Air Consumption
Vibra-Flow Air Consumption
2,547
2,264
1,981
AIR CONSUMPTION (normal dm3/1')’
1,698
1,415
1,132
0,849
0,566
0,283
0
0,7 1,7 2,1 2,8 3,5 4,2 4,9 5,6 6,3 7
AIR PRESSURE (bars)
10
Sect. 6.1
Vibra-Flow Installation Vibrating Fluidisation
Device
TANKS W/ DIAMETERS fr om 600mm to 1199mm

from
VIBRA FLOW LINE "A"

280 at 60°, 180°, 300°
11
Device Vibra-Flow Installation

from
VIBRA FLOW LINE

"B"at 60°,180°,300°
560
VIBRA FLOW LINE "A"

280 at 60°,180°,300°
12
Sect. 6.3
Vibra-Flow Installation Vibrating Fluidisation
Device

from
ZONE 3 ZONE 1
ZONE 2
VIBRA FLOW LINE

560 "C" at 60°,180°,300°
VIBRA FLOW LINE "B"

560 at t 60°,180°,300°
VIBRA FLOW LINE

"A" at 60°,180°,300°
280
13
Vibrating Fluidisation Sez. 6.4
Device Vibra-Flow Installation
TANKS W/ DIAMETERS of 2400mm and ABOVE

ABOVE
ZONE 4
ZONE 3 ZONE 1
ZONE 2
VIBRA FLOW LINE "D"

560 at 0°,90°,180°,270°
560 VIBRA FLOW LINE "C"
at 0°,90°,180°,270°
560 VIBRA FLOW LINE "B"
at 0°,90°,180°,270°
VIBRA FLOW LINE "A" at
0°,90°,180°,270°
280
14
Sect. 7.1 Vibrating Fluidisation
Vibra-Flow Installation Diagram Device
ZONE 1
3/4" AIR SUPPLY 6.5 -7 bars x Nm/1'
LEGEND
VIBRA-FLOW
GATE VALVE
FLEXIBLE TUBING
SOLENOID VALVE
15
Sect. 7.2
Device
Vibra-Flow Installation Diagram
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
3/4" AIR SUPPLY 6.5-7 barsxNm/1'
LEGEND
VIBRA-FLOW
GATE VALVE
FLEXIBLE TUBING
SOLENOID VALVE
16
Sect. 7.3
Vibra-Flow Installation Diagram Vibrating Fluidisation
Device
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3
3/4" AIR SUPPLY 6.5-7 barsxNm/1’
LEGEND
VIBRA-FLOW
GATE VALVE
FLEXIBLE TUBING
SOLENOID VALVE
17
Sect. 7.4
Device
Vibra-Flow Installation Diagram
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
3/4" AIR SUPPLY 6.5-7 barsxNm/1'
LEGEND
VIBRA-FLOW
GATE VALVE
FLEXIBLE TUBING
SOLENOID VALVE
18
Sect. 8.1 Vibrating Fluidisation
Sequential Timer Diagram Device
E908T8/4NN - E b01 "SEQUENTIAL TIMER controlling SOLENOID VALVES"
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Standard functions available
B1 Sets the number of available outputs 1 max. 8 SW4
B2 Sets the pulse time 0.1 max 3 sec. SW3
B3 Sets the pause time1 max 60 sec. SW2
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM E 908T8-E b01 SETTING OF OPERATING PARAMETERS
SW1 not in use

SW2 Pause time 1/60 sec.
SW3 Pulse time 0.3/3 sec.
SW4 Selects the number of outputs
NOTE1: with the AC load disconnected, it is normal to see an apparent voltage in the output terminal
board between the shared and individual outputs; this is due to the protective filter placed on every
output pilot component. This voltage will disappear once the load is connected.
NOTE2: when "D1" is not used, apply a jumper on the terminals to cut out thefunction connected to
the fan.
NOTE3: "ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS": L1, L2 (pin 2,3): circuit board power supply
D1 (pin 4,6): not in use
C6 (pin 5,7): not in use
La: Green LED Pulse
Lb: Red LED Pause
Lc: Yellow LED Status D1 C6
Ld: C-8/18 Activation of Outputs.
19
Device Vibra-Flow Diagram
MODEL I: Installation inside the container

Ø54
33.5
86.5
53
1/4 gas (13.1570)
REDUCTION F G1/4 - M G1/2
Legend
1. Vibrating cone
2. Washer (stainless steel)
3. Cap nut (stainless steel)
4. Injector rod
5. Gasket
6. Cup springs
7. Nut and lock nut
8. Threaded hub
9. Gasket
10. Gate valve
20
Sect.9.2
Vibra-Flow Diagram Vibrating Fluidisation
Device
MODEL E: Installation inside the container
Ø69
25.4
WELD
G2 COUPLING
1/4 gas (13.1570)

REDUCTION F G1/4 - M G1/2
21
Device
22
Device
23
Via Ungheri, 3/F - 40012 Lippo di Calderara (BO) - Italy
Tel. 051/725128 - Fax 051/725146
E-mail: airtec@air-tec.it
http://www.air-tec.it
Cod. Fisc. e Part. IVA 04202180370

C.C.I.A.A. 353394 - Iscrizione Tribunale BO 63997
Appendix 03 – Information butterfly valves
Page 24 of 31
SPOOL VALVES 3/2
2 4 2 4 2 4
12 12 12 14
5/2
3 5 3 5 3 5
pilot operated or air operated, spool type 1 1 1

2 4 2 4
5/3
12 10 12 14 2 4
12 14
single/dual solenoid or air (mono/bistable function) 3

1
5 3
1
5 3
Series
1
5
aluminium body, “NAMUR” style, 1/4 - 1/2 551-553

FEATURES
• The monostable spool valves in conformity with IEC 61508 Standard (2010
route 2H version) have TÜV (551 series) and EXIDA (551-553 series) certified
with integrity levels: SIL 2 for HFT = 0 / SIL 3 for HFT = 1
● The spool valves have threaded port connections and "NAMUR" style interface
● The same spool valve can be adapted for 3/2 NC or 5/2 function for controlling
double-acting and single-acting actuators

● All the exhaust ports of this spool valve are connectable, providing better
environmental protection, particularly recommended for sensitive areas such as

clean rooms, and applications in the pharmaceutical and food processing sectors
● The valve offers environmental protection against the ingress of liquids, dusts or
any other foreign matter (environmentally-protected construction)

● Epoxy moulded coil for general service applications
● The solenoid valves satisfy all relevant EU Directives
GENERAL
Differential pressure 2 - 10,4 bar [1 bar = 100 kPa]
Flow (Qv at 6 bar) 1/4 = 700 l/min (ANR)
1/2 = 3000 l/min (5/2, 5/3)
temperature range (TS) 2 4
fluids () seal materials ()
air, inert gas, filtered - 25°C to + 60°C NBR (nitrile) + PUR (polyurethane) 1 5
MATERIALS IN CONTACT WITH FLUID

() Ensure that the compatibility of the fluids in contact with the materials is verified
Body Aluminium, black anodized
3
End covers + interface plates Glass-filled PA
Internal parts Zamak, stainless steel, (POM), aluminium 3/2 NC - 5/2 function
Seals NBR + PUR
Core tube Brass
Core and plugnut Stainless steel
Shading coil Copper
AIR OPERATED SPECIFICATIONS

operating pressure 5 1 3
flow differential (bar)
pipe orifice basic
coefficient prefix
size size max. (PS) catalogue
kv option
min. air () number 5/3 function
() (mm) (m3/h) (l/min) ~ =
3/2 NC - 5/2 - Air pilot operated - spring return (monostable) BP
1/4 6 0,75 12,5 2 10 10 - 551A101 (2)
MP
1/2 13 3,15 52,5 2 10 10 - 553A101 (2)
3/2 NC - 5/2 - Air pilot operated and return (bistable) RP
1/4 6 0,75 12,5 2 10 10 - 551A102 LP
1/2 13 3,15 52,5 2 10 10 - 553A102 Not Not
available 2,5W - 4W available 5W - 6,9W
Low Reduced Medium Basic

power power power power
POWER LEVELS - cold electrical holding values (watt)

PILOT OPERATED SPECIFICATIONS 5/2
operating pressure
flow prefix optional solenoids
pipe orifice differential (bar) power
coefficient
size size max. (PS) level ATEX / IECEx basic catalogue number
kv IP65
min. air () - Ex e mb Ex mb -
() (mm) (m3/h) (l/min) ~ = ~/= - WBLP PV - SC
3/2 NC - 5/2 - Solenoid air pilot operated - spring return (monostable)
1/4 6 0,6 10 2 10 10 RP - l - - l 551A001 (2)
1/4 6 0,6 10 2 10 10 RP - - l - - X551A001 20787 (2)
1/2 13 2,49 41,5 2 10 10 RP-BP - l l - l 553A001 (2)
3/2 NC - 5/2 - Solenoid air pilot operated and return (bistable)
1/4 6 0,6 10 2 10 10 RP - l - - l 551A002
1/4 6 0,6 10 2 10 10 RP - - l - - X551A002 20787
1/2 13 2,49 41,5 2 10 10 RP-BP - l l - l 553A002
80108GB-2016/R01
 Select 8 for NPT ANSI 1.20.3 or select G for ISO G (228/1)

● Available feature - Not available
(2)
Certified IEC 61508 Functional Safety data, use suffix "SL".
All leaflets are available on: www.asco.com

PIC-6-40-GB
SERIES 551-553
PILOT OPERATED SPECIFICATIONS 5/3
operating pressure
flow prefix optional solenoids
pipe orifice differential (bar) power basic
coefficient
size size max. (PS) level ATEX / IECEx catalogue
kv IP65
min. air () - Ex e mb Ex mb - number
() (mm) (m3/h) (l/min) ~ = ~/= - WBLP PV - SC
5/3 - W1 - pressure held, solenoid air pilot operated and return
1/4 6 0,6 10 2 10 10 RP - l - - l 551A065
1/4 6 0,6 10 2 10 10 RP - - l - - X551A065 20787
1/2 13 2,49 41,5 2 10 10 RP-BP - l l - l 553A065
5/3 - W3 - pressure release, solenoid air pilot operated and return
1/4 6 0,6 10 2 10 10 RP - l - - l 551A066
1/4 6 0,6 10 2 10 10 RP - - l - - X551A066 20787
1/2 13 2,49 41,5 2 10 10 RP-BP - l l - l 553A066
 Select 8 for NPT ANSI 1.20.3 or select G for ISO G (228/1)
● Available feature - Not available
PREFIX TABLE
prefix power level
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
description
LP RP MP BP
PRODUCT SELECTION GUIDE
- l - l
STEP 1
P V Encapsulated epoxy moulded (EN/IEC 60079-18)*
Select the fluid temperature range and
W B L P I.S./encapsulation with PBT IP67 enclosure (EN/IEC 60079-7, -18, -31)* - l - -
- l - l seal material from the general table on
S C Solenoid with spade plug connector (EN/IEC 60730)
X Other special constructions - l - l page 1. Select basic catalogue number,
including pipe thread identification letter.
Refer to the specifications table on
SUFFIX TABLE pages 1 and 2.
suffix power level Example : G551A001
description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LP RP MP BP STEP 2
G D Non-electrical, 2 GD c, construction safety, gas/dust (EN 13463-5) - - - - Select prefix (combination). Select
M Exhaust reducer (series 551 only) - l - - the appropriate operator from the
M S Screw type manual operator - l - l specifications table on page 1 and the
S L Certified IEC 61508 Functional Safety data (1) - l - l prefix table on page 2. Select for this
● Available feature operator in the electrical characteristics
- Not available table on page 3: the power level (RP,
* ATEX solenoids are also approved according to EN 13463-1 (non electrical valves) MP, BP), the type of electrical enclosure
(1)
Not to use with MS suffix
protection and the desired temperature
class.The air operated version is without
prefix.
Warning: The ambient temperature
range of your application may not
exceed the temperature range of your
operator.
Do not use prefixes for air operated
versions.
Example : SC
STEP 3
Select suffix (combination) if required.
Suffix GD only applies for the air operated
versions, do not use suffix MS.
Example : MS
STEP 4
Select voltage. Refer to standard
voltages on page 3.
Example : 230V / 50Hz
STEP 5
Final catalogue / ordering number.
Example :
SC G551A001MS 230 V / 50 Hz
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES ORDERING EXAMPLES:

exhaust protector SC G 551 A 001 MS 230V / 50 Hz
pipe (stainless steel) SC G 551 A 001 MMS 230V / 50 Hz
series
size PV X8 551 A 002 20787 115V / 50 Hz
(G) (NPT) (M)
WBLP G 551 A 001 MS 24V / DC
551 1/8 34600418 (3) 34600482 (3) - G 553 A 102
551 (W1/W3) 1/4 34600419 (3) 34600483 (3) - G 551 A 102 GD
553 1/2 34600479 (3) 34600481 (3) - G 551 A 101 GD SL
551/553 M5 - - 34600484 (3) SC G 551 A 001 SL 230V / 50 Hz
80108GB-2016/R01
(3)
Provided with "SL" suffix. prefix
pipe thread voltage
basic number suffix

6-40-2
SERIES 551-553
EXPLANATION OF TEMPERATURE RANGES OF SOLENOID VALVES

Valve temperature range The valve temperature range (TS) is determined by the selected seal material, the temperature
range for proper operation of the valve and sometimes by the ﬂuid (e.g. steam)
Operator ambient temperature range The operator ambient temperature range is determined by the selected power level and the
safety code
Total temperature range The temperature range of the complete solenoid valve is determined by the limitations of both
temperature ranges above
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Coil insulation class F
Electrical safety IEC 335
Standard voltages DC (=) 24V - 48V
AC (~) 24V - 48V - 115V - 230V/50Hz; other voltages and 60Hz are available on request
power ratings operator electrical
hot/ ambient replacement coil
prefix inrush holding temperature enclosure
cold safety code type (1)
option ~ ~ = range (TS) protection ~ =
(VA) (VA) (W) (W) (C°) (EN 60529) 230 V / 50 Hz 24 V DC
Basic power = BP
SC 15 7 5 4/5 -25 to +60 EN 60730 IP65 moulded 400727-117 400727-185 02
PV - - 6,3 - -40 to +65 II2G Ex mb IIC T3,II2D Ex mb IIIC Db IP67 moulded - (4) - (4) 04
PV - - - 6,9 -40 to +40 II2G Ex mb IIC T3,II2D Ex mb IIIC Db IP67 moulded - (4) - (4) 04
Reduced power (RP)
SC 6 3,5 2,5 2,5/3,0 -25 to +60 EN 60730 IP65 moulded 400127-097 400904-542 01
PV - - 4 - -40 to +60/65 II2G Ex mb IIC T4-T3,II2D Ex mb IIIC Db IP67 moulded - (4) - (4) 03
PV - - - 3 -40 to +40/60/60 II2G Ex mb IIC T5-T4-T3,II2D Ex mb IIIC Db IP67 moulded - (4) - (4) 03
WBLP - - 3,5 -/4 -40 to +65 II2G Ex e mb IIC T4, II2D Ex tb IIIC Db IP67 PBT - (4) - (4) 05-06
(1)
Refer to the dimensional drawings on page 4 (Air operated versions, see page 5 for types 7 and 8).
(4)
Multiple coil kits available under ATEX, contact us
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
prefix connection
Spade plug connector with cable gland DIN 43650, 11 mm, industry standard B, for cables with an outer diameter
SC
from 6 to 8 mm (type 01) or EN175301-803A (ISO 4400) for cables with an outer diameter from 6 to 10 mm (type 02).
PV Moulded-in cable, standard length 2 m
M20 cable gland for cables with an outer diameter from 7 to 8,5 mm. With an internal and external facility for an
WBLP earthing or bonding conductor
ADDITIONAL OPTIONS
● Other pipe threads are available on request
● Coil type CM25 with connector size 30 ISO 4400 (Pg 11P) (series 551)
● Polyamide coil
● Ex mb (prefix "PV") solenoid can be supplied with various cable lengths
● Compliance with "UL" standard is available on request (553 ranges)
● Set of stainless steel mounting screws, catalogue number 97802212 (series 551)
● Set of two exhaust reducers, G1/8, catalogue number 88100344 (series 551)
INSTALLATION
Installation/maintenance instructions are included with each valve
●
The valves can be mounted in any position without affecting operation

●

● Do not connect the pressure supply to the exhaust port 3. The “environmentally-protected” construction is not adapted for NO
function. Contact us for function available in specific version
● IEC 61508 Functional Safety (suffix SL). Check temperature range of valve body and solenoid for suitability. For probability of
failure, contact us
● 3/2 NC-5/2 spool valve supplied with one or two interface plates with NAMUR mating surfaces. Depending on function (3/2 NC or
5/2), position the plate (series 551) or one of the two plates (series 553) on the spool valve body before installing on actuator
● It is necessary to connect pipes or fittings to the exhaust ports to protect the internal parts of the spool valve and its
pneumatic operator if used outside or in harsh environments (dusts, liquids etc.)
● Dowel pin (if necessary), bolts and gaskets are standard supplied
● Threaded pipe connection identifier is: 8 = NPT (ANSI 1.20.3); G = G (ISO 228/1)
80108GB-2016/R01

6-40-3
SERIES 551-553
DIMENSIONS (mm), WEIGHT (kg) (PILOT OPERATED VERSION)
TYPE 01: TYPE 02:
Epoxy moulded Epoxy moulded
SC: IEC 335 / ISO 4400 SC: IEC 335 / ISO 4400
551A001/A001MS/A002/A002MS 551A065/A065MS/A066/A066MS 553A001/A001MS/A002/A002MS - 553A065/A065MS/A066/A066MS

(W1 - W3)
F E
F E A2 5
1
S
S 1
N
180°
1
3 180° 3 1 5 0 3 1 5 90°
4
N
G
G
=
O
O
=
= =
=
=
360°
360°
M
2 4 2 4
360°
2 4
L
M
L
L
=
=
=
M5 M5
=
3 A1 E
1 5 5 = =
J H 108 2 7 4
J
H K H 216 H K H
3 - 5 (2 x 1/8) 22 22
3 x 1/4 I
1 (1 x 1/4)
3 5 3 1 5 P Q
1
R
3 1 5
D
2 4 2 4
6
R
6
2 4
D
6 3 x 3/8 (552) - 1/2 (553)
TYPE 03: TYPE 04:

Epoxy encapsulated Epoxy encapsulated
PV: EN/IEC 60079-18 PV: EN/IEC 60079-18
551A001 20787/A001MS 20787 551A065 20787/A065MS 20787 553A001/A001MS/A002/A002MS - 553A065/A065MS/A066/A066MS

551A002 20787/A002MS 20787 551A066 20787/A066MS 20787
F E F E
A2
S
S 1 5 1
N
1
3 3 1 5 0 3 1 5
0 4
N
G
=
G
=
=
=
O
= =
360°
2 4
360°
360°
22 2
32
4 4
O
M
M
L
L
=
=
M5 M5 M5
=
3 A1 1 5 24
5
J 108 = = 2 7 4
J
K 216 K
3 - 5 (2 x 1/8) I
22 22 P Q
1 (1 x 1/4)
3 5 3 1 5 3 1 5
R1
1
R
D
2 4 2 4 R
D
2 4
6
6
6 3 x 3/8 (552) - 1/2 (553)
TYPE 05: TYPE 06:

PBT PBT
WBLP: EN/IEC 60079-7 +18 + 31 WBLP: EN/IEC 60079-7 +18 + 31
551A001/A001MS/A002/A002MS 551A065/A065MS/A066/A066MS 553A001/A001MS/A002/A002MS - 553A065/A065MS/A066/A066MS

(W1 - W3)
F E F E
A2
S
N
S 1 5 1
N
0
1
3 3 1 5 3 1 5
G
G
0 4
O
=
=
=
=
= =
=
2 4
360°
360°
360°
2
O
2
32
4 4
M
L
M
M
L
=
=
=
3 A1 1 5 24
5
J 108 = = J 2 7 4
K 216 K
3 - 5 (2 x 1/8) I
22 22 P Q
80108GB-2016/R01
1 (1 x 1/4)
3 5 3 1 5 3 1 5
=
1
37
=
37
R
37
D
=
R
=
2 4
=
2 4 2 4
6
6
6 3 x 3/8 (552) - 1/2 (553)

6-40-4
SERIES 551-553
DIMENSIONS (mm), WEIGHT (kg) (AIR OPERATED VERSION)
TYPE 07: TYPE 08:
No prefix, IP65 No prefix, IP65
(suffixes, GD: II 2 GD c, SL: SIL (suffixes, GD: II 2 GD c, SL: SIL
or GDSL: SIL, II 2 GD c) or GDSL: SIL, II 2 GD c)
Air operated version Air operated version
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 12 12 10 12 12 14
12 12 10 12 12 14
3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5
3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 1 1 1 1
551A101 / 551A102 1 1 1 1 553A101 / 553A102
A2 F E
F E
1 S
S
3 4 3 1 5
=
=
=
12 2 4 10 12 2 4 10
M
L
M
L
G1/8
=
=
G1/4
=
3 A1 1 5 5
J 2 7 4
J
K
K I
P Q
3 - 5 (2 x 1/8) 1 (1 x 1/4)
3 1 5
3 5
1
R
R
D
2 4
D
2 4
6 6 3 x 3/8 (552) - 1/2 (553)
1 2 mounting holes dia. 5,3; Spotfacing: dia. 9, depth 5 mm

2 2 mounting holes dia. 6.5; Spotfacing: dia. 11, depth 6 mm
3 1 dia. 5 mm hole for dowel pin (series 551)
- in position A1: 3/2 NC function plate
- in position A2: 5/2 function plate
4 2 O-ring seals (supplied)
5 Exhaust reducers G 1/8 (series 551) or protectors adaptable on orifices 3 and 5
6 Interface plates
7 1 dia. 6,5 mm hole for dowel pin (series 553). Same position for interface plate 3/2 NC or 5/2
Connectable pilot exhaust port
prefix power weight (1)

type D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R R1 S
option level (2) (3)
01 (551) SC RP 19 24 83 52 13 - 139 192 32 45 27 72 - - 33 - 12 0,34 0,46

02 (553) SC BP 29,1 40 106,7 59,2 21,8 130,3 197,5 261 45 72,3 20 92,3 31,6 31,8 49,2 - 20 0,90 1,20
03 (551) PV RP 19 24 83 36,5 - - 139 192 32 45 13 58 - - 33 36,5 12 0,38 0,50
04 (553) PV BP 29,1 40 106,7 36,5 - 130,3 197,5 261 45 72,3 0,3 72,6 31,6 31,8 49,2 - 20 0,93 1,23
05 (551) WBLP RP 19 24 83 81,5 - - 139 192 32 45 59 104 - - 33 36,5 12 0,38 0,50
06 (553) WBLP RP 29,1 40 106,7 81,5 - 130,3 197,5 261 45 72,3 45,35 117,65 31,6 31,8 49,2 - 20 0,93 1,23
07 (551) - - 19 24 - - - - 107 128 32 45 - - - - 33 - 12 0,31 0,41
08 (553) - - 29,1 40 70,7 - - 130,3 161,5 189 45 72,3 - - 31,6 31,8 49,2 - 20 0,85 1,11
Types 1 to 4 : Including coil(s) and connector(s)
(1) (2)
monostable (3)
bistable
SECTIONAL DRAWINGS
3 3 2
2
3 2 1 4 1 4
1 4 5
5
5
80108GB-2016/R01
monostable 553 series bistable 551 series bistable 553 series

6-40-5
6-40-6
SERIES 551-553
PIC-06-0040-GB -- Availability, design and specifications are subject to change without notice. All rights reserved.
80108GB-2016/R01
RESILIENT SEATED
Butterfly Valves
INDEX
Butterfly Valves Page

Series 20 wafer 1”-20” (25mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar) 8
Series 21 lug 2”-20” (50mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar) 8
Series 23 lug 2”-24” (50mm-600mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar) 10
2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 175 psi (12 Bar) 12

Series 30 wafer
14”-20” (350mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar) 12
2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 175 psi (12 Bar) 12

Series 31 lug
14”-20” (350mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar) 12
Series 31H lug 2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 250 psi (17.2 Bar) 13
Series 31U lug 2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 285 psi (20 Bar) 14
2”-12” (50mm-300mm) 175 psi (12 Bar) 16

Series 3A
double flanged
14”-20” (350mm-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar) 16
Series 3AH
2”-20” (50mm-500mm) 250 psi (17.2 Bar) 16
double flanged
Series 32 wafer 22”-36” (550mm-900mm) 75 psi (5.2Bar) 18
Series 35
22”-120” (550mm-3000mm) 75 psi (5.2 Bar) 18
double flanged
Series 36
22”-120” (550mm-3000mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar) 18
double flanged
Series 36H
22”-60” (550mm-1500mm) 232 psi (16 Bar) 20
double flanged
Series 35F
32”-60” (800mm-1500mm) 75 psi (5.2 Bar) 21
double flanged
Actuators & Accessories 22
2
INTRODUCTION PRODUCT QUALITY & PRECISION
Through years of field application experience, research Bray manufacturing facilities are certified to ISO 9001
and development, we have designed products that meet quality standards, assuring product quality, precision
the stringent requirements of today’s flow control manufacturing and internal process integrity. The basis
industry. Bray has earned a reputation for excellence by for Bray Control’s high level of quality assurance are
creating products of superior value and quality, providing the quality control guidelines and procedures submitted,
personalized customer service and on-time deliveries. reviewed and approved in accordance with criteria
Our success has always been the direct result of our fully established within ISO 9001:2000 and EU Directives.
integrated range of butterfly valve and control products.
Rugged and reliable, our products are engineered to
“Bray Controls is focused on
provide years of trouble free service.
and committed to meeting the
Bray products are used in a wide range of expectations and needs of our
industries worldwide including:
customers while continually
• Chemical
• Beverage improving the effectiveness of
• Brewing/Wine Making our quality management.”
• Pharmaceutical
• Food Processing • All Bray valves are pressure tested to 110% of
• Petroleum Refining & Oilfield rated pressure to assure bubble-tight shutoff.
• Transportation
• All actuators are calibrated and cycle tested
• Ultrapure Water
before shipment. Pneumatic actuators are also
• Marine pressure tested to assure no leakage.
• Pulp & Paper
• Mining • Material Traceability - Certification is provided
• Power/FGD for all valves upon request for all pressure
• Nuclear Power retaining components.
• Irrigation • Positive Material Identification - All materials
• Water & Wastewater Treatment are subjected to PMI testing to verify material
• Textile traceability certificate.
• Desalination
• Steel Production
• Sugar/Ethanol A complete listing of approvals & certifications
• HVAC can be found at www.bray.com.
3
DESIGN BENEFITS
1 ISOLATION FROM LINE MEDIA
Achieved in two fundamental design concepts:
A. INTERNAL DISC/STEM CONNECTION Bray offers three disc-to-stem connections: Double ‘D’, Splined, and Double
Key. These internal, non-wetted connections eliminate exposed external disc-to-stem connections such as screws or taper pins.
1. Double D: precision machined 2. Spline: male splines in 3. Double Keyed: keyways machined
flats on the stem and in the disc. the stem and female in the disc. into disc matching keys in the stem
Sizes 2”– 20” (50mm–500mm) Standard Sizes 22”– 48” (550mm–1200mm) Selected Sizes 54”– 120” (1400mm–3000mm)
Selected Sizes 54”– 120” (1400mm–3000mm)
Disassembly of Bray’s internal connection is

performed by simply pulling the stem out of the
disc. Bray’s precision machining of the disc and
the stem connection minimizes hysteresis and
produces maximum strength engagements. All
stem designs incorporate a blow-out proof feature.
B. SEAT DESIGN Bray’s seat design provides

complete isolation of flowing media from the body
and stem by a totally encasing design. Designed to
seal with slip-on or weld-neck flanges.
Tongue-and-groove
2 INTERNATIONAL COMPATIBILITY
Valve mounting top flanges meet ISO 5211
standards for direct mounting of manual operators and
3 ACTUATOR MOUNTING
Due to a modular concept of design, all Bray
actuators including handles, gear operators, pneumatic
power actuators. All Bray valves have extended necks and electric actuators mount directly to Bray resilient
which allow for at least 2" piping insulation. seated valves. No brackets are required. This allows
for simple installation in the field, minimizes possible
misalignment and reduces overall height.
4
EXTERNAL COATING OPTIONS
1 POLYESTER BODY COATING

Bray’s standard product offers valve bodies with a polyester
coating, providing excellent corrosion and wear resistance to
3 SEACORR COATING
Proprietary coating for operators – Provides superior product
protection in corrosive conditions, tested to ASTM B-117.
the valve’s surface. The Bray polyester coating is a hard, gloss
red finish.
Chemical Resistant
Resists a broad range of chemicals including dilute acids
and alkalis, petroleum solvents, alcohols, greases and oils.
Also offers outstanding resistance to humidity and water.
Weatherability
Resistant to ultra-violet radiation.
Abrasion Resistant
Excellent resistance to abrasion.
Impact Resistant
Withstands impact without chipping or cracking.
2 NYLON 11 COATING
Nylon 11 also has superior corrosion resistance and has been
used successfully in many applications such as water, cement, food
and seawater.
Weatherability
Bray’s Nylon 11 coating has been salt spray tested in excess
of 2000 hours and used in seawater immersion service
for over 25 years without any deterioration of the coating
resulting in no corrosion to the coated metal components.
Abrasion Resistant
Excellent resistance to abrasion.
Impact Resistant
Excellent - no chipping or cracking.
Other customer specified coating materials are available.

Please consult your local Bray representative
for your specific application.
5
SEAT MATERIALS
Seat Temperature Ranges
EPDM -20°F to 250°F (-29°C to 121°C) FKM 0°F to 400°F (-18°C to 204°C)
BUNA-N 0°F to 212°F (-18°C to 100°C) Polyurethane -20°F to 176°F (-29°C to 80°C)
EPDM (Peroxide Cured)

EPDM is the abbreviated name for Ethylene Propylene Diene
Monomer. In general industry, one may see other abbreviations or
trade names used in lieu of EPDM such as EPT, Nordel, ECD, or
EPR. Typically these are the same materials as EPDM.
EPDM is a standard seat material offered in Bray resilient-seated
butterfly valves. It is the most universal and economical of seat
materials offered by Bray; that is, it may be used in a wider range
of applications than BUNA-N. Of important significance also is
the fact all EPDM seat materials sold by Bray are Food Grade.
Bray’s EPDM Food Grade seats are perfectly suitable for sanitary
applications as well as standard industrial uses. EPDM is also
available as a covering for Series 20 discs.
BUNA-N (Black & White)

BUNA-N is the commonly used name for Nitrile synthetic rubber.
Nitrile is a copolymer of acrylonitrile and butadiene. BUNA-N is
sometimes referred to as NBR, Nitrile, or Hycar. BUNA-N is an
excellent general purpose seat material which is particularly suitable
for hydrocarbon service. BUNA-N is a standard Bray seat material
and is Food Grade; thus suitable for sanitary applications. Note,
BUNA-N is also available as a covering for Series 20 disc stems.
FKM
FKM is the ASTM D1418 designation for Fluorinated Hydrocarbon
Elastomers (Fluoroelastomers) such as Viton® (DuPont). FKM has
some outstanding characteristics such as improved acid, oil, and
temperature resistance over standard seat materials.
POLYURETHANE
Urethane seats are primarily used for their ability to resist abrasive
wear. Urethane can be used on a reasonably broad range of services.
Urethane will withstand severe impact, recover its original shape
after distortion and resist abrasion better than other elastomers such
as EPDM and BUNA-N.
Seat material availability depends on valve size & series.

6
SEAT MATERIALS
Seat Temperature Ranges
PTFE-Lined EPDM (Standard) -20°F to 250°F (-29°C to 121°C) Virgin PTFE & Conductive PTFE 0°F to 392°F (-18°C to 200°C)
PTFE-Lined EPDM (High-Temp.) -20°F to 302°F (-29°C to 150°C) UHMWPE 0°F to 185°F (-18°C to 85°C)
PTFE LINED EPDM (Standard or High-temp)

PTFE lined EPDM seat consists of a PTFE liner which forms the
faces and the flow way of the seat, and is molded on to an EPDM
elastomer backing. Only the inert non-stick PTFE liner surface is
exposed to the line media. The EPDM backing acts as a resilient
support to the relatively rigid PTFE. These seats are generally used
where BUNA-N and EPDM seats are not chemically suitable,
especially in corrosive services.
VIRGIN PTFE
All Bray PTFE seats and encapsulated discs are molded from pure,
virgin PTFE material to the following specifications: thickness 3
mm, specific gravity 2.16, crystallinity 68%. PTFE’s inherent
molecular bonding strength gives an excellent chemical, high
temperature and tear resistance. Sintered processed PTFE offers
lower permeability than melt processed materials such as PFA. These
properties combined with Bray’s stringent material specifications
provide optimum protection against permeation of the line media.
CONDUCTIVE PTFE
Bray Conductive PTFE seats and discs are available for
installation in areas of the plant where explosion protection
is important. This material was designed to prevent harmful
electrostatic discharge. For the ultimate in safety and reliability,
Bray has combined electrostatic discharge protection and the
excellent chemical resistance properties of PTFE. The conductive
PTFE seat and the disc has a minimum thickness of 1/8" (3 mm),
providing optimum protection against permeation of the line media.
UHMWPE
UHMWPE seats and discs feature exceptional chemical resistance
and are the ideal choice for highly abrasive chemical applications.
The natural ability of the UHMWPE’s high molecular weight to
repel solids prevents in-line particles from damaging the valve’s seat
surfaces. An economical and high performance choice for abrasive
chemical services.
Seat material availability depends on valve size & series.

7
SERIES 20/21 1”-20” (25mm-500mm)
PRESSURE RATINGS
BIDIRECTIONAL BUBBLE-TIGHT SHUTOFF Downstream Flanges/Disc in Closed Position
Resilient Metal Disc/Stem 1-20” (25-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar)
Seated Resilient Molded Disc/Stem 2-20” (50-500mm) 100 psi (7 Bar)
PTFE Metal Disc/Stem 2-20” (50-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar)
Seated PTFE Molded Disc/Stem 2-20” (50-500mm) 100 psi (7 Bar)
DEAD-END SERVICE – Lug Bodies No Downstream Flanges/Disc in Closed Position
2-12” (50-300mm) 75 psi (5.2 Bar)
All Valves
14-20” (350-500mm) 50 psi (3.4 Bar)
BODY: 150 psi (10.3 Bar) CWP
VELOCITY LIMITS For On/Off Services:

Fluids 30 ft/sec (9 m/s) Gases 175 ft/sec (54 m/s)
STEM BUSHING: Non-corrosive, heavy duty acetal

bushing absorbs actuator side thrust.
The Series 20/21 valve surpasses the high
standards required in sanitary applications. STEM SEAL: Double “U” cup seal design is self-adjusting and gives
The disc geometry provides superior inherent positive sealing in both directions and prevents external substances
flow characteristics and capabilities. The Bray from entering the stem bore.
Series 20 is our wafer body offering complete DISC / STEM: One-piece design. The disc edge is spherically
with flange locating holes The Series 21 is the machined and hand polished to produce a bubble-tight shutoff, minimum
companion lug body design offering dead-end torque, and longer seat life. The disc/stem design inherently provides
service and multiple flange design compatibility. complete protection from particle entrapment and bacterial decay,
• Sanitary & Chemical applications protection that is required for sanitary performance. For
superior erosion and abrasion resistance, the one-piece
• One-piece disc/stem disc/stem is fully encased in either EPDM or BUNA-N.
• High CV, low pressure drop The thin disc profile provides a much higher Cv (up
to 50% greater than most through-stem designs) and
greater pressure recovery, thus resulting in lower
pressure drops and a more energy-efficient valve.
PRIMARY & SECONDARY SEALS: These
seals prevent line media from coming in contact
with the stem or body. Primary Seal is achieved
by an interference fit of the molded seat flat
with the disc hub. Secondary Seal is created
because the stem diameter is greater than the
diameter of the seat stem hole.
SEAT: Bray’s tongue and groove seat design
lowers torque and provides complete isolation
of flowing media from the body. The seat also
features a molded O-ring which eliminates the
use of flange gaskets.
BODY: Two-piece wafer or lug style allows for
ease of assembly and maintenance. Nylon 11 coating
for excellent corrosion resistance is standard for 1"-
8" valves and available on larger sizes upon request.
Polyester coating is standard for 10"-20" bodies.
8
All Bray valves are pressure tested to 110% of rated pressure to assure bubble-tight shutoff.
STANDARD MATERIALS SELECTION

NAME MATERIAL
Body Cast Iron
Ductile Iron
316 Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Disc/Stem METAL:
1”-12” One Piece Investment Cast
316 Stainless Steel
Hastelloy® C-22
14”-20” Fabricated
316 Stainless Steel disc with 316 Stainless Steel stem
Hastelloy® disc with Hastelloy® stem
RUBBER MOLDED:
EPDM molded over one piece stainless steel disc/stem
BUNA-N molded over one piece stainless steel disc/stem
EPDM molded over stainless steel disc with stainless steel stem
BUNA-N molded over stainless steel disc with stainless steel stem
PTFE MOLDED:
PTFE molded over one piece stainless steel disc/stem
HALAR® COATED:
2”-12” Investment Cast
Halar® coated over one piece stainless steel disc/stem
Halar® coated over stainless steel disc with stainless steel stem
Seat BUNA-N – Food Grade
EPDM – Food Grade
FKM*
White BUNA-N – Food Grade
PTFE-Lined EPDM
Material availability depends on valve size & series. Other materials are available.
Please consult your local Bray representative for your specific application.
*FKM is the ASTM D1418 designation for Fluorinated Hydrocarbon Elastomers (also called Fluoroelastomers).
Halar® is a registered trademark of Solvay Solexis, Inc.
Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
9
SERIES 22/23 2”-24” (50mm-600mm)
PRESSURE RATINGS
All Valves 2-24” (50-600mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar)
DEAD-END SERVICE – Lug Bodies No Downstream Flanges/Disc in Closed Position
2-12” (50-300mm) 75 psi (5.2 Bar)
All Valves
14-24” (350-600mm) 50 psi (3.4 Bar)

TEMPERATURE RATINGS
PTFE: 0ºF(-18ºC) min. – 392ºF(200ºC) max
UMMWPE: 0ºF(-18ºC) min. – 185ºF(85ºC) max
Extensive field research and engineering have TOP STEM BUSHING: A top stem bushing, retained by a
developed this state-of-the-art design which stainless steel ring, is provided to absorb actuator side thrusts and
provides excellent shutoff protection (bubble- is acetal as standard or PTFE as an option.
tight shutoff) and high CV values. The Series 22/23 UPPER STEM SEAL: The upper stem seal serves to keep any
is crafted in a variety of materials such as PTFE, stainless environmental contaminants from entering the stem bore.
steel, UHMWPE and special alloys to fit a wide range
BODY: Bodies are two piece wafer or lug style and are epoxy coated.
of customer requirements. As with all Bray’s products,
All bodies meet full ASME Class 150 and DIN 3840 pressure ratings
precision manufacturing and exceptional quality remain
for hydrostatic requirements.
the keys to a proven record of long service life.
BEARINGS: PTFE impregnated steel bearings provided for
NECK: An extended neck design in all
precision alignment of the upper and lower stem.
valve sizes allows for 2" of piping
insulation and provides easy access PRIMARY SEAL: The primary seal is achieved by an interference
for mounting actuators. fit between the extra wide disc hubs and contoured seat.
FLANGE LOCATING HOLES: SEAT DESIGN: The seat design reduces seating/unseating torque
Locating holes in the wafer version and, at the same time, reduces wear on the contacting parts. Curvatures
provide quick and precise alignment machined into the inner seat area minimize contact forces between
during valve installation eliminating the disc and seat as the disc approaches, or opens from, the closed
disc interference with adjacent position. This unique seat geometry permits lower torques and
pipe I.D. reduces seat wear.
BLOWOUT PROOF SEAT ENERGIZER: A resilient seat energizer extends completely
STEM: A shoulder is around the seat, including the disc hub. This provides uniform force
machined into the upper sufficient for bubble-tight shutoff.
stem. The stem and the disc
are pressed together during
assembly to become one
part, thus the design is
a positive stem-to-disc
drive connection.
DISC: The PTFE disc has 1/8"
(3 mm) minimum thickness of
pure, virgin PTFE encapsulated
over stainless steel.
10
SEAL CAPSULE: (Secondary Seal) This seal STANDARD MATERIALS SELECTION

capsule fully isolates the valve body and stem NAME MATERIAL
from the line media. The Seal Capsule is made of
Body Ductile Iron
a virgin PTFE enclosing the internal energizer. The
capsule fits into grooves machined in the upper and Stainless Steel
lower disc hubs. When compressed between the Carbon Steel
disc and seat during assembly, the capsule becomes
energized, exerting both upward and downward Disc Stainless Steel
pressure on disc and seat surfaces. PTFE molded over stainless steel
UHMWPE molded over stainless steel
Hastelloy®
Titanium
Upper Stem 17-4 PH Stainless Steel
Lower Stem 17-4 PH Stainless Steel
Seat PTFE
Conductive PTFE
UHMWPE
Acetal
Bushing
PTFE
BODY SEALS: (Bidirectional): Reinforced
PTFE gaskets are placed between the body halves. BUNA-N
Upper Stem Seal
These seals eliminate contamination from external FKM*
environmental conditions and potential leak path
Seal Capsule (2) PTFE / FKM
from the line media.
Bearing (2) PTFE / Steel
Silicone
Seat Energizer (2)
FKM*
Body Bolt (2) Stainless Steel
Retainer Stainless Steel
Body Seal (2) Reinforced PTFE
ID Tag Stainless Steel
Material availability
depends on valve size &
series. Other materials
ACCESSORIES are available. Please
• TAPPED PORT can be provided in the body neck consult your local Bray
below the stem seal to connect leak detectors representative for your
or instrumentation. specific application.
• GROUNDING CABLE is offered to protect against *FKM is the ASTM D1418 designation
static charge build-up. The cable mounts to the for Fluorinated Hydrocarbon Elastomers
(also called Fluoroelastomers).
valve body.
Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of
Haynes International, Inc.
11
SERIES 30/31 2”-20” (50mm-500mm)
PRESSURE RATINGS
BIDIRECTIONAL BUBBLE-TIGHT SHUTOFF – Standard Disc*
Downstream Flanges/Disc in Closed Position
S30/31 2-12” (50-300mm) 175 psi (12 Bar)

Standard Disc* 14-20” (350-500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar)
DEAD-END SERVICE – Lug Bodies/Standard Disc*
No Downstream Flanges/Disc in Closed Position
2-12” (50-300mm) 75 psi (5.2 Bar)
S31
14-20” (350-500mm) 50 psi (3.4 Bar)
*For low pressure application, Bray offers a standard reduced disc diameter to
decrease seating torques and extend seat life, thus increasing the valve’s per-
formance and reducing actuator costs.

High strength through-stem design allows easy STEM RETAINING ASSEMBLY: The stem is
disassembly and reduced disc to stem failure. retained in the body by means of a unique stainless steel
Spirolox® retaining ring, a thrust washer and two C-rings,
PRIMARY & SECONDARY SEALS: These seals
manufactured from brass as standard, stainless steel upon
prevent line media from coming in contact with the stem or
request. The retaining ring may be easily removed with a
body. Primary Seal is achieved by an interference fit of the
standard hand tool. The stem retaining assembly
molded seat flat with the disc hub. Secondary Seal is created
prevents unintentional removal of the stem
because the stem diameter is greater than the diameter of
during field service.
the seat stem hole.
STEM BUSHING: Non-corrosive,
STEM: Precision double “D” disc to stem
heavy duty acetal bushing absorbs
connection drives the disc without the need
actuator side thrust.
for screws or pins. The close tolerance,
double “D” connection that drives the STEM SEAL: Double “U” cup seal
valve disc is an exclusive feature of design is self-adjusting and gives
the Bray valve. Disassembly of the positive sealing in both directions.
Bray stem is just a matter of pulling NECK: Extended neck length
the stem out of the disc. allows for 2" of piping insulation
SEAT: Bray’s tongue and groove and is easily accessible for
seat design lowers torque and mounting actuators.
provides complete isolation of DISC: Casting is spherically
flowing media from the body. machined and hand polished to
The seat also features a molded provide a bubble-tight shutoff,
O-ring which eliminates the minimum torque, and longer
use of flange gaskets. seat life.
BODY: One-piece wafer or lug
style. Polyester coating for excellent
corrosion resistance. Nylon 11 coating
is available as an option.
Spirolox® designation is a registered trademark of Kaydon Ring and Seal, Inc.
12
STANDARD MATERIALS SELECTION S30/31

NAME MATERIAL
Body Cast Iron
Ductile Iron
Carbon Steel
Aluminum
Disc Aluminum Bronze
Coated Ductile Iron
Nylon 11 Coated Ductile Iron
Halar® Coated Ductile Iron
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
Duplex Stainless Steel
Super Duplex Stainless Steel
Hastelloy®
Stem 416 Stainless Steel
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
Monel® K500
SERIES 31H
Seat BUNA-N – Food Grade
EPDM – Food Grade
2”-12” (50mm-300mm) FKM*
Series 31H Lug valves are drilled and tapped to White BUNA-N – Food Grade
meet ASME Class 125/150 and PN16 flanges. Bonded EPDM
Series 31H Valves will not be automated.
Bonded BUNA-N
PRESSURE RATINGS Material availability depends on valve size & series.
BIDIRECTIONAL BUBBLE-TIGHT SHUTOFF Other materials are available. Please consult your
& DEAD-END SERVICE local Bray representative for your specific
application.
2-12” (50-300mm) 250 psi (17.2 Bar)
*FKM is the ASTM D1418 designation for Fluorinated
BODY: 250 psi (17.2 Bar) CWP Hydrocarbon Elastomers (also called
Fluoroelastomers).
VELOCITY LIMITS For On/Off Services: Hastelloy® is a registered
trademark of Haynes
Fluids 30 ft/sec (9 m/s) Gases 175 ft/sec (54 m/s) International, Inc.
Halar® is a registered
STANDARD MATERIALS SELECTION 31H trademark of Solvay
Solexis, Inc.
Body Cast Iron
Ductile Iron
316 Stainless Steel
Seat Bonded EPDM
Bonded BUNA-N
Material availability depends on valve size &
series. Other materials are available. Please consult
your local Bray representative for your specific
application.
13
SERIES 31U 2”-12” (50mm-300mm)
PRESSURE RATINGS
BIDIRECTIONAL BUBBLE-TIGHT SHUTOFF & DEAD-END SERVICE
2-12” (50-300mm) 285 psi (20 Bar)
BODY: 285 psi (20 Bar) CWP

Bray Controls offers our high quality, high pressure MODULAR DESIGN: All Bray manual gear
resilient seated butterfly valves to meet the operators, electric and pneumatic actuators mount
requirements of today’s industrial/marine markets. directly to the S31U, with no brackets required.
This valve is specifically designed for onshore and STEM BUSHING: Non-corrosive heavy duty acetal
offshore fire protection where the applicable certification bushing absorbs actuator side thrust.
is D.O.T. 54 (UK Department of Trade). The series 31U is
STEM SEAL: Patented stem retaining ring
designed to withstand high line velocities and pressure
and C-rings prevent unintentional
drops through the valve.
removal of the stem during
NECK: Extended neck length allows for piping field service.
insulation and is easily accessible for mounting
SEAT DESIGN: Bray’s
operators.
bonded tongue and groove
BODY: One-piece lugged style flange resilient seat design offers
configuration, with a choice of Polyester lower torque than many
Coated Ductile Iron/Carbon Steel or valves on the market today
uncoated Nickel Aluminium Bronze. All and provides complete isolation
bodies can be drilled to be compatible of flowing media from all valve
with ASME 125/150, PN10/16 components (excluding the disc) by a
or other international flange totally encasing design. The seat
standards. features a molded tangential
STEM: High strength upper O-ring eliminating any need
and lower stem incorporate for flange gaskets.
a close tolerance double ‘D’ PRIMARY & SECONDARY
disk drive connection. This SEALS: These seals prevent
eliminates stem retention components line media from coming in contact
being exposed to the line media and with the stem or body. Primary Seal is
allows for easy disassembly for achieved by an interference fit of the molded
maintenance purposes, unlike disc seat flat with the disc hub. Secondary Seal is
screws and taper pins. created because the stem diameter is greater than
DISC: Casting is spherically the diameter of the seat stem hole.
machined and hand polished
to provide bubble-tight shut-
off with minimum torque and
an extended seat life.
14

NAME MATERIAL
Body Carbon Steel
Nickel Aluminum Bronze
Ductile Iron
Disc 316 Stainless Steel
Monel® K500
Nickel Aluminum Bronze
Stem 17-4PH Stainless Steel
Monel® K500
Stainless Steel
Seat Bonded BUNA-N
15
SERIES 3A 2”-20” (50mm-500mm)
PRESSURE RATINGS
BIDIRECTIONAL BUBBLE-TIGHT SHUTOFF & DEAD-END SERVICE
Standard Disc 175 psi (12 Bar)
2-12” (50-300mm)
Reduced Disc 50 psi (3.4 Bar)
Standard Disc 150 psi (10.3 Bar)
14-20” (350-500mm)
Reduced Disc 50 psi (3.4 Bar)

STEM: Precision double “D”

disc to stem connection drives
Bray’s Series 3A/3AH valve is a double flanged design which can
the disc without the need of
be used for dead-end service. A major design advantage of Bray
screws or pins.
valve product lines is international compatibility. The same valve is
compatible with most world flange standards – ASME Class 125/150, SEAT: Bray’s bonded seat
BS 10 Tables D and E, BS 4504 NP 10/16, DIN ND 10/16, AS 2129 design lowers torque and
and JIS10. In addition, the valves are designed to comply with provides complete isolation of
ISO 5752 - Table 1 (EN 558 Table 14) face-to-face and ISO flowing media from the body.
5211 actuator mounting flanges. Therefore, one valve The seat also features a
design can be used in many different world markets. molded O-ring which
eliminates the
STEM RETAINING ASSEMBLY: The stem is
use of flange
retained in the body by means of a unique stainless
gaskets.
steel Spirolox® retaining ring, a thrust washer
and two C-rings, manufactured from brass as
standard, stainless steel upon request. The
retaining ring may be easily removed with
a standard hand tool. The stem retaining
assembly prevents unintentional removal
of the stem during field service.
STEM BUSHING: Non-corrosive,
heavy duty acetal bushing absorbs
actuator side thrusts.
STEM SEAL : Double “U” cup
seal design is self-adjusting, gives
positive sealing in both directions, and
prevents external substances from entering
the stem bore.
EXTENDED NECK: Extended neck length
allows for 2" of piping insulation and is easily
accessible for mounting actuators.
PRIMARY & SECONDARY SEALS: These seals prevent line media
from coming in contact with the stem or body. Primary Seal is achieved
by an interference fit of the molded seat flat with the disc hub. Secondary
Seal is created because the stem diameter is greater than the diameter DISC: Spherically machined and hand polished to provide a bubble-tight
of the seat stem hole. shutoff, minimum torque, and longer seat life.
Spirolox® designation is a registered trademark of Kaydon Ring and Seal, Inc.
16
STANDARD MATERIALS SELECTION – Series 3A

NAME MATERIAL
Body Cast Iron
Ductile Iron
Carbon Steel
Coated Ductile Iron
Halar® Coated Ductile Iron
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
Super Duplex Stainless Steel
Hastelloy®
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
Monel® K500
Seat Bonded EPDM
HIGH PRESSURE Bonded BUNA-N

Bonded FKM*
RESILIENT SEATED
Material availability depends on valve size & series. Other
SERIES 3AH materials are available. Please consult your local Bray
representative for your specific application.
Series 3AH double flanged valves are *FKM is the ASTM D1418 designation for Fluorinated
drilled and tapped to meet Hydrocarbon Elastomers (also called Fluoroelastomers).
Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of Haynes
ASME Class 125/150 and PN16 flanges. International, Inc.
Series 3AH valves will not be automated. Halar® is a registered trademark of Solvay Solexis, Inc.
PRESSURE RATINGS
BIDIRECTIONAL BUBBLE-TIGHT SHUTOFF
& DEAD-END SERVICE
2-20” (50-500mm) 250 psi (17.2 Bar)

STANDARD MATERIALS SELECTION 3AH

Body Ductile Iron
316 Stainless Steel
Seat Bonded EPDM
Bonded BUNA-N
Material availability depends on valve size & series.
Other materials are available. Please consult your local
Bray representative for your specific application.
17
SERIES 32/33 & 35/36
PRESSURE RATINGS
Series 32 (Wafer) 22-36” (550-900mm) 75 psi (5.2 Bar)
Series 33 (Wafer) 22-36” (550-900mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar)
Series 35 (Full Flanged) 22-120” (550-3000mm) 75 psi (5.2 Bar)
Series 36 (Full Flanged) 22-120” (550-3000mm) to 150 psi (10.3 Bar)
DEAD-END SERVICE No Downstream Flanges/Disc in Closed Position
BODY : 150 psi (10.3 Bar) CWP

BLOW-OUT PROOF STEM: A retaining ring, installed

between the machined stem groove and gland retainer
step, provides full retention of the stem in the unlikely
This valve series has many of the design features and event of internal stem failure.
benefits of the smaller Bray valves, such as high Cv ratings,
ADJUSTABLE PACKING SYSTEM:
minimum parts exposed to the line media, greater
Design allows for field adjustment of
reliability and a proven record of long service life.
stem packing without removing
BODY: One piece full flanged style. All manual operators or power
bodies are drilled to be compatible actuators. The advanced,
with ASME 125/150, PN 10 or other self-adjusting V-Type stem
international flange standards. Wafer packing prevents external
style bodies are also available. substances from entering
DISC: High strength discs are the upper stem bore.
first cast, the sealing edges are PRIMARY &
spherically machined then either SECONDARY
hand polished or the entire SEALS:
disc is Nylon 11 coated. The These seals prevent
symmetrical disc profile l i n e m e d ia f r om
increases CV values, reduces coming in contact
turbulence and increases wit h t he st em or
pressure recovery. body. Primary Seal
SEAT: The replaceable is ach ieved by a n
tongue and groove interference fit of the
seat to body retention molded seat flat with the
method is the most disc hub. Secondary Seal
advanced design in the is created because the stem
industry. Molded O-ring diameter is greater than the
eliminates the requirement diameter of the seat stem hole.
of flange gaskets. The seat STEM BEARINGS:
isolates the valve body To absorb actuator side thrust and
and stem from line media minimize bearing friction torque,
and has been specifically upper and lower heavy wall sleeve
designed to seal with slip-on or bearings are utilized.
weld-neck flanges.
VERTICAL THRUST BEARING: A bronze
vertical thrust bearing eliminates disc displacement
due to the weight of the stem and disc.
18
22”-120” (550mm-3000mm) All Bray valves are pressure tested to 110% of rated pressure to assure bubble-tight shutoff.

DISC - STEM
CONNECTIONS NAME MATERIAL
Body Cast Iron
Spline: male splines in the stem
Ductile Iron
and female in the disc.
Carbon Steel
Standard Sizes 22”– 48” (550mm–1200mm) 316 Stainless Steel
Disc Nylon 11 Coated Ductile Iron
316 Stainless Steel
304 Stainless Steel
Aluminum Bronze
Monel®
Hastelloy®
Super Austenitic Stainless Steel
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
Double Keyed: keyways machined into 17-4 PH Stainless Steel
disc matching keys in the stem Monel®
Seat EPDM
Valves 54”(1400 mm) BUNA-N
and larger are provided
with bonded seats FKM*
Packing BUNA-N
Bearings Lubricant Impregnated Bronze
PTFE Encapsulated Stainless Steel
Thrust Bearing Bronze
*FKM is the ASTM D1418 designation for Fluorinated Hydrocarbon Elastomers (also called
Fluoroelastomers). Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
Halar® is a registered trademark of Solvay Solexis, Inc.
Monel® is a registered trademark of The International Nickel Company, Inc.
BRAY TONGUE & GROOVE SEATS

Competitor Strip Seats expose the body, stem and disc Bray’s Seat isolates the line media from contacting the
stem hole to the line media, thus causing premature body and stem, thus increasing service life and therefore
failure due to corrosion. Material costs are significantly lowering costs over the life of the valve.
increased for highly corrosive applications.
Bray’s
Seat
Competitor’s
Seat
19
SERIES 36H 22”-60” (550mm-1500mm)
PRESSURE RATINGS
22-60” (550-1500mm) 232 psi (16 Bar)
22-60” (550-1500mm) 150 psi (10.3 Bar)


NAME MATERIAL
Body Ductile Iron
Disc Nylon 11 Coated, Ductile Iron
Aluminum Bronze
316 Stainless Steel
Stem 17-4 PH Stainless Steel
Seat Bonded EPDM
Bonded BUNA-N
Bray Controls is proud to offer a line of superior quality, high Packing BUNA-N
pressure manual butterfly valves that meet many of today’s
requirements in the process industry. Note: Series 36H valves Bearings Lubricant Impregnated Bronze
will not be automated. Series 36H large diameter, double Thrust Bearing Bronze
flanged valves are rated for 232 psi (16 Bar) bidirectional dead
end service. Series 36H double flanged valves are drilled and Material availability depends on valve size & series. Other materials are
tapped to meet ASME Class 125/150 and PN10 flanges. available. Please consult your local Bray representative for your specific
application.
DISC: Disc edge sealing surface is spherically machined and
hand polished to provide a bubble-tight shutoff with minimum
torque and extended seat cycle life.
SEAT: Tongue and groove seat design, bonded to the body, is
designed to seal with slip-on or weld-neck flanges. Seat totally
encases the valve interior to isolate the line media from the body.
Molded seat O-ring provides seal between valve and pipe flanges.
Flange gaskets should not be used with this valve.
PRIMARY & SECONDARY SEALS: These seals prevent
line media from coming in contact with the stem or body. Primary
Seal is achieved by an interference fit of the molded seat flat
with the disc hub. Secondary Seal is created because the stem
diameter is greater than the diameter of the seat stem hole.
STEM: Stem completely isolated from the flowing media.
Note: Disc-stem connection on the Series 36H

is a taper-pin connection.
All Bray valves are pressure tested to 110% of rated

pressure to assure bubble-tight shutoff.
20
32”-60” (800mm-1500mm) SERIES 35F
PRESSURE RATINGS
32-60” (800-1500mm) 75 psi (5.2 Bar)
32-60” (800-1500mm) 30 psi (2.1 Bar)


NAME MATERIAL
Body Cast Iron
Ductile Iron
Disc Hastelloy®
316 Stainless Steel
Seat Bonded EPDM Bray Series 35F large diameter butterfly valves are designed
specifically for high chloride services. Bray has carefully selected
Bonded BUNA-N valve materials and features that optimize performance without
Packing BUNA-N sacrificing system efficiency. Series 35F valves offer rugged
Bearings Bronze reliability in a light weight design.
Thrust Bearing Bronze BODIES: One piece double flanged style. All bodies are drilled
to be compatible with ASME 125, PN 16 and other international
Material availability depends on valve size & series. Other materials are flange standards.
available. Please consult your local Bray representative for your specific
application. BLOW-OUT PROOF STEM: Retention system secures the
Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc. stem in the unlikely event of internal failure.
PRIMARY & SECONDARY SEALS: These seals prevent line
media from coming in contact with the stem or body. Primary
Seal is achieved by an interference fit of the molded seat flat
with the disc hub. Secondary Seal is created because the stem
diameter is greater than the diameter of the seat stem hole.
ADJUSTABLE PACKING SYSTEM: Design allows for field
adjustment of stem packing without removing manual operators
or power actuators. The advanced, self-adjusting V-Type stem
packing prevents external substances from entering the upper
stem bore.
INTERNAL DISC/STEM CONNECTIONS: Protect stem
components by eliminating external disc screws or taper pins.
THIN PROFILE DISC: Provides a higher CV and greater
pressure recovery than typical large diameter valves resulting in
lower pressure drops.
All Bray valves are pressure tested to 110% of rated

pressure to assure bubble-tight shutoff.
21
ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES
SERIES 70 ELECTRIC
Torque 300 to 18,000 lb-ins (34-2030 Nm)
Voltage VAC: 24, 120, 220
VDC: 12, 24
Standard Enclosure NEMA 4, 4X
Explosion Proof NEMA 4, 4x and specifications for USA & Canadian
hazardous locations Class I Div 1&2 Groups C&D; Class II
Div 1&2 Groups E, F&G.
The Series 70 is a low profile, compact and powerful
actuator with customer-friendly features.
• Manual declutchable handwheel
• Local high visibility position indicator
• Digital interface available
• Optional microprocessor based modulating control
SERIES 92/93 PNEUMATIC

Bray pneumatic actuators are rack and pinion,
opposed-piston actuators available in two versions:
double acting and spring return.
• Maximum pressure rating of 140 psi (9.7 bar)
and a temperature range of -20°F (-29°C) to 200°F (95°C)
• Two independently adjustable travel stop screws and a cam on the output shaft to permit
precise bidirectional adjustment of movement in both the open and closed positions for
quarter turn valves (5º to -5º limit adjustment)
• Integral porting
• Standard units have anodized aluminum bodies with polyester coated end caps.
• Special coatings and materials available for corrosive environments
• NAMUR accessory compatible
SS ACTUATOR TRAVEL STOP SPRING RETURN
22
ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES
SERIES 50 - Valve Status Monitors SERIES 52 - Valve Status Monitors SERIES 63 - 3 & 4 Way Solenoids
• 10 amps at 125 or 250 volts AC • ProxSensor provides 2 proximity sensors in • Waterproof (NEMA 4,4X) and explosion
• Internal travel switches that are prewired one fully sealed, compact enclosure proof (NEMA 7,9) housings are standard
to a terminal block • AC, DC, Intrinsically Safe and BUS Network • NPT and IP65 DIN connections are offered
versions are offered with both single and dual coils
SERIES 6A - Electro-Pneumatic Positioners Serial Bus Communication

• Precise, microprocessor driven flow control • Bray offers several products featuring serial
and advanced communication bus communication
• For use with either double or single acting • Multiple protocols available. Consult your
actuators local Bray representative
Manual Operators
SERIES 1 - Handle & Notch Plate SERIES 4 - Gear Operator SERIES 5 - Declutchable Gear Operator
23
BRAY INTERNATIONAL, INC.
USA
Houston, Texas +281.894.5454
BRAY CONTROLS
USA
ARGENTINA
Buenos Aires +54.11.4362.0666
BENELUX
Heerhugowaard +31.72.572.1410
BRAZIL
Paulinia SP-Brazil +55.19.3517.6161
CANADA
Montréal +514.344.2729  WORLD HEADQUARTERS - BRAY INTERNATIONAL , INC. - USA
CHILE
Santiago +56.2739.2966
CHINA
Hangzhou, Zhejiang +86.571.828.52200
GERMANY
Krefeld +49.2151.53360
INDIA Global Manufacturing,
Gujarat +91.2667.664444
MEXICO Service Around the Corner
Zapopan, Jalisco +52.33.3836.4460
PACIFIC To serve you locally, each region maintains a
Melbourne, Australia +613.9580.9755
PERU factory certified sales and service network
Lima +511.251.0251
POLAND for all Bray International products.
Oświȩcim +48.33.842.1968
UNITED KINGDOM
lnchinnan +44.141.812.5199
VIETNAM
Ho Chi Minh City +84.8.3742.3428
FLOW-TEK

BRAY CONTROLS - CHINA - Office & Manufacturing
USA
BRAZIL
Paulinia SP-Brazil +55.19.3874.9195
CHINA
RITEPRO
CANADA
Montreal +514.324.8900
CHINA
All statements, technical information, and recommendations

in this bulletin are for general use only. Consult Bray
representatives or factory for the specific requirements and
material selection for your intended application. The right to
change or modify product design or product without prior
notice is reserved. Patents issued and applied for worldwide.
Division of BRAY INTERNATIONAL, Inc.
Bray® is a registered trademark of
13333 Westland East Blvd., Houston, Texas 77041
BRAY INTERNATIONAL, Inc.
© 2015 Bray International. All rights reserved. 281.894.5454 Fax 281.894.9499 www.bray.com
B-1050_EL_Resilient_10_2015

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Issued in accordance with the
PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE 2014/68/EU (PED)
We hereby declare that in compliance with the above Directive, that the products detailed below have
been manufactured in accordance with conformity assessment procedure:
Module H (Suitable for Category I to III) ‘Full Quality Assurance' as approved by the notifying body
Lloyd's Register Verification Ltd (Notified Body No. 0038), (71 Fenchurch Street, London EC3M 4BS
UK) under EC Certificate of Conformity No: 0038/PED/HOU/ECD 1420021/1
Product Description: a) Resilient Seated Butterfly Valve (RSBV)

b) Bray / McCannalok High Performance Butterfly Valve (HPBV)
Product Reference: a) Series 20/21/22/23

b) Series 30/30H/31/31U/31H/32/33/35/36/36H/35F/3A/3AH
c) Series 40/41/41R/42/43/44/45/4A/4B
Comprising: Body/Disc/Stem/Seat/Seals/Bearings/Bonnet
Latest Applicable
ISO 5211, ISO 9001, ISO 10497
Standards:
API 598, API609
ASME B16.34
MSS-SP-25, MSS-SP-67, MSS-SP-68
2013 ASME BPVC, Section VIII, Division 1, Section UG-27
Harmonized Standards: None

Any other directive (s): None
Signed:
Name: George Crooks
Position: Managing Director, Bray Controls (UK) Limited
Date: 29th August 2016
BCUK-QMF52 R0 29-08-2016
R
CONTROLS
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES

20/21, 22/23, 30/31, 3A/3AH, 31H, 31U, 32/33, 35/36, 36H
The
High
Performance
Company
Table Of Contents:
page
Safety Instructions: Definition Of Terms . .......................................................................1
Introduction .........................................................................................................................1
Shipment & Storage . ...........................................................................................................1
Installation Considerations . ..............................................................................................2
Valves With Spring Return Actuators .............................................................................2
Fail Open Assembly ....................................................................................................2
Fail Closed Assembly ................................................................................................2
Valve Location And Orientation In Piping ........................................................................3
Valve Orientation Diagrams .................................................................................4-6
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................6-9
PTFE Seated Butterfly Valves in Plastic Flanges................................................9
Maintenance & Repair . .......................................................................................................9
Appendix ‘A’ - S20/21 Disassembly/Assembly Instructions ............................................10-11
Appendix ‘B’ - S22/23 Disassembly/Assembly Instructions................................................ 12-13
Appendix ‘C’ - S30/31 Disassembly/Assembly Instructions . ......................................... 14-15
Appendix ‘D’ - S3a/3ah Disassembly/Assembly Instructions ..................................... 16-17
Appendix ‘E’ - S31H Disassembly/Assembly Instructions ............................................. 18-19
Appendix ‘F’ - S31U Disassembly/Assembly Instructions ............................................. 20-21
Appendix ‘G’ - S32/33 Disassembly/Assembly Instructions .......................................... 22-24
Appendix ‘H’ - S35/36 (Taper Pin Disc/Stem Connection)
Disassembly/Assembly Instructions ....................................................... 25-27
Appendix ‘I’ - S35/36 (Internal Spline or Keyed Disc/Stem Connection)
Disassembly/Assembly Instructions ....................................................... 28-33
Appendix ‘J’ - S36H Disassembly/Assembly Instructions .............................................. 34-36
for information on these products and other bray products

please visit us at our web page - www.bray.com
BRAY Resilient Seated BFV
Operation and Maintenance Manual
Safety Instructions - Definition of Terms

READ AND FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

WARNING
! result in death or serious injury.
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

CAUTION
! result in minor or moderate injury.
used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if
NOTICE not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state, including
property damage.
Introduction change in this interference due to improper installation

directly affects the pressure rating and seating/unseating
torques.
Historical Experience
Based on over twenty years experience in the butterfly
Finally, unlike many valve types, the resilient seated
industry, Bray can state without question the majority of all
butterfly valve’s disc actually extends beyond the face of the
field problems for resilient seated butterfly valves are directly
valve body at given angles of opening (say, 30° or more)
related to poor installation procedures. For this reason, it is
when installed between flanges.
very important all distributor salespeople educate their cus-
tomers regarding proper installation of resilient seated butter-
fly valves.
! Caution
Butterfly Valve Seat / Disc Function
It is very important before installation to ensure the criti-
Before reviewing the proper installation, maintenance, and re-
cal chord dimension of the disc at the full open position
pair procedures for resilient seated butterfly valves, let’s dis-
is less than the adjacent pipe flange I.D.
cuss the seat-disc function of a butterfly valve. The seat in a
resilient seated butterfly valve has molded o-rings on its flange
face. As a result, no gaskets are required as these o-rings Shipment & Storage
serve the function of a gasket. The flange face and molded o-
A. The seat, disc, stem and bushing of the resilient seated
rings of the seat extend beyond the body face-to-face to ensure butterfly valve should be coated with silicone lubricant
sealing at the flange faces. The seat material, which extends unless specified otherwise as recommended by Bray
past the face is compressed in installation and flows toward Technical Bulletin 1028.
the center of the valve seat I.D.
B. The disc should be positioned at 10° open.
Note: See page 2 for special considerations for valves
In essence, the elastomer seat acts as a liquid, and the with spring return actuators.
displaced elastomer moves toward the point of least resis-
C. Valves should be stored indoors with a preferred tempera-
tance. The seat I.D. of all resilient seated butterfly valves
ture range from 40° F (4°C) to 85° F (29°C).
is smaller than the disc O.D. This difference, the disc-seat
interference, plus the increased interference due to the elas- D. When valves are stored for a long time, open and close
tomer movement toward the seat center after installation, the valves once every 3 months.
has been engineered so as to be the basis for pressure rat- E. Ship and store valves so that no heavy loads are
ing capability and the related seating/unseating torques. Any applied to the bodies.
1
Installation Considerations – Piping and Valve Orientation and Placement
Piping and Flanged Compatibilities are especially important with non-metallic flanges.
In some cases, non-metallic flanges of low quality
Piping will not mate tightly with butterfly valves regardless
These valves have been engineered so that the of the care taken during installation.
critical disc chord dimension at the full open posi-
tion will clear the adjacent inside diameter of most Valves with Spring Return Actuators
types of piping, including Schedule 40, lined pipe,
heavy wall, etc. 1. Fail Closed Assemblies
If the valve is supplied with an actuator, the butterfly
Metal Flanges valve is shipped in the full closed position (as no
Resilient seated butterfly valves have been designed air pressure is present to compress the springs and
to be suitable for all types of flanges (ASME, DIN, open the disc).
JIS and other international flange standards), whether
flat-faced, raised face, slip-on, weld-neck, etc. Proper
alignment of any butterfly valve between flanges is Caution
critical to good performance of the valve. The flange
!
bolts must also be evenly tightened around the cir- Installing the valve with the disc in the full closed
cumference of the valve, providing consistent flange position may create a compression set on the seat
compression of the molded o-ring in the seat face. causing higher than expected torques or premature
seat failure. It is recommended to:
Since Bray does not recommend the use of gaskets • Remove the actuator. Be sure to scribe the valve and
between flanges on resilient seated butterfly valves, actuator to ensure the re-installed actuator is in the
a uniform flange face is critical to proper valve exact same quadrant as originally configured
sealing. Most weld-neck and slip-on flanges con- • Install the valve per the attached installation tag
forming to ASME specifications have an appropri- instructions
ate flange face. Types A and B butt-weld stub-end • Re-install the actuator ensuring it is in the proper
flanges also provide a suitable mating surface for quadrant
the molded o-ring.
2. Fail Open Assemblies
It should be noted that Type C butt-weld stub-end If the valve is supplied with an actuator, the butterfly
flanges have an “as formed” flange face. The vary- valve disc is shipped in the full open position (as
ing surface of this flange face can create sealing no air pressure is present to compress the springs
problems between any resilient-seated butterfly and close the valve disc.) The sealing surface, or
valve and the flange face. For this reason, Type C disc edge, is therefore exposed. Damage to that
flanges are not recommended for use with resilient- surface will cause premature seat failure.
seating butterfly valves.
Non-Metallic Flanges Caution

When non-metallic flanges, such as plastic or PVC, !
are used with resilient seated butterfly valves, care Use caution installing the valve being careful not to
must be taken not to over-tighten the flange bolts. damage the disc edge. It is recommended to:
The inherent flexibility of these non-metallic flange • Remove the actuator. Be sure to scribe the valve and
materials allow them to be over-tightened relatively actuator to ensure the re-installed actuator is in the
easily. Flexing caused by this over-tightening can exact same quadrant as originally configured
actually reduce the compression of the valve be- • Install the valve per the attached installation tag
tween the flanges, causing leaks between the valve instructions
and the flange face. Proper alignment and firm, • Re-install the actuator ensuring it is in the proper
even, but not excessive tightening of flange bolts quadrant
2
3. Valve Location b. For slurries, sludge, mine tailing, pulp

a. Resilient seated butterfly valves should be stock, dry cement, and any media with
installed if possible a minimum of 6 pipe di- sediment or particles, Bray recommends
ameters from other line elements, i.e., elbows, the resilient seated valve be installed with
pumps, valves, etc. of course, 6 pipe diameters the stem in the horizontal position with
are not always practical, but it is important to the lower disc edge opening in the down-
achieve as much distance as possible. stream direction.
b. Where the resilient seated butterfly valve
is connected to a check valve or pump, use
an expansion joint between them to ensure
the disc does not interfere with the adjacent
equipment.
4. Valve Orientation
a. In general, Bray recommends the resilient
seated valve be installed with the stem in the
vertical position and the actuator mounted
vertically directly above the valve; however,
there are those applications as discussed
below where the stem should be horizontal.
NOTE: Bray does not recommend valves
be installed in an upside-down position.
FLOW
Stem (Vertical)
INCORRECT INSTALLATION
Sludge builds up on disc
FLOW
Stem (Horizontal)
CORRECT INSTALLATION
Sludge passes under disc
3
Valve Orientation (Continued)

c. Resilient seated butterfly valve located at the discharge of a pump should be oriented as follows:
INCORRECT INSTALLATION CORRECT INSTALLATION
i.) For
centrifugal
Pump – Pump Pump Shaft Pump Shaft
shaft horizon- (Horizontal) (Horizontal)
tal and stem
vertical FLOW FLOW
Stem (Horizontal) Stem (Vertical)
ii.) Centrifu-
gal Pump – Pump Shaft
Pump Shaft
Pump shaft (Vertical) (Vertical)
vertical &
stem
horizontal FLOW FLOW
Stem Stem
(Vertical) (Horizontal)
Suction Suction
iii.) Axial
Pump – Pump
Pump Shaft Pump Shaft
shaft vertical
(Vertical) (Vertical)
& stem
vertical
FLOW FLOW
Stem Stem
Suction (Horizontal) Suction (Vertical)
4

d. Butterfly valves located downstream of a bend or pipe reducer should be oriented as follows:
i.) Bend
Stem Stem
(Horizontal) (Vertical)
FLOW FLOW
ii.) Tee
Stem Stem
FLOW FLOW
iii.) Pipe
Reducer
Stem Stem
FLOW FLOW
5

e. Butterfly valves in combination for control/isolation applications should be installed as follows:
FLOW FLOW
Combination with all valve stems in the same Combination with the stem of the control
direction accelerates possible noise, vibration, valve at right angle to those of other valves
& erosion problems. tends to cancel the drift of the fluid, and re-
duces noises, vibration, and erosion.
Installation Procedure 4. Check to see that the valve disc has been
positioned to a partially open position, with
A. General Installation the disc edge about 1/2 inch to 3/8 inch
1. Make sure the pipeline and pipe flange faces are inside the face of the seat, (approxi-
clean. Any foreign material such as pipe scale, mately 10° open) (see figure 1 page 6)
metal chips, welding slag, welding rods, etc., can Note: See page 2 for special consideration
obstruct disc movement or damage the disc or for valves with spring return actuators.
seat. 5. Insert the valve between the flanges as shown
2. The Bray elastomer seat has molded o-rings in figure 1 of page 6, taking care not to damage
on the face of the seat. As a result, no the seat faces. Always pick the valve up by the
gaskets are required as these o-rings serve locating holes or by using a nylon sling on the
the function of a gasket. neck of the body.
3. Align the piping and then spread the pipe flang-
WARNING
es a distance apart so as to permit the valve !
body to be easily dropped between the flanges
without contacting the pipe flanges (see figure Never pick up the valve by the actuator or opera-
1 page 6). tor mounted on top of the valve.
6
Figure 1 – Insert Resilient Seated Butterfly Valve Between Flanges

Pipe spread and aligned, disc rotated;
CAUTION
! Results; no undesirable beginning seating/
unseating torque, disc edge protected.
Pipe not spread, disc opened beyond valve
body face; Results; Disc edge damaged when
it hits pipe flange.
6. Place the valve between the flanges, center it, below. Very slowly close the valve disc to ensure
and then span the valve body with all flange bolts, disc edge clearance from the adjacent pipe flange
but do not tighten the bolts. Carefully open the disc I.D. Now open the disc to full open and tighten all
to the full open position, making sure the disc does flange bolts per specification as shown in Figure
not hit the adjacent pipe I.D. Now systematically 2. Finally, repeat a full close to full open rotation
remove jack bolts or other flange spreaders, and of the disc to ensure proper clearances (See figures
hand-tighten the flange bolts as shown in Figure 2 3 & 4 page 7).
Figure 2 – Flange Bolt Tightening Pattern
5 1
3 7
8 4
2 6
7
Figure 3 – Initial Centering & Flanging of Valve
Gasket

Disc in closed position; gaskets used; Results Bolts snugged, not torqued tight, disc edge
– Seat distorted and over-compressed causing within body face-to-face but not fully closed,
high initial unseating torque problems. no flange gaskets; Results: No disc edge
damage, proper sealing allowed.
Figure 4 – Final Aligning & Tightening of Flange Bolts

Piping misaligned; Results Disc O.D. strikes Piping aligned properly when bolts tightened,
pipe I.D. causing disc edge damage, increased disc in full open position; Results – disc clears
torque & leakage. Seat face o-rings will not adjacent pipe I.D., seat face seals properly, no
seal properly with incorrectly aligned piping. excessive initial torque.
8
When resilient seated butterfly valves are to be 2. The plastic flange can be either one piece
installed between ASME welding type flanges, care construction, or two piece construction comprised
should be taken to abide by the following procedure to of a stub end and a backup ring.
ensure no damage will occur to the seat: 3. The plastic flange style can be butt-weld, socket
1. Place the valve between the flanges with the or slip-on, but butt-weld and socket are preferred.
flange bores and valve body aligned properly.
The disc should be in the 10° open position. 4. The plastic flange face must be flat. Concave
and convex flange faces are not acceptable. This
2. Span the body with the bolts. includes flange faces that were originally flat
3. Take this assembly of flange-body-flange and but later distorted into a concave shape by over
align it properly to the pipe. tightening the flange bolts.
4. Tack weld the flanges to the pipe. 5. The plastic flange face surface may have grooves
5. When tack welding is complete, remove the or serrations, provided the grooves do not exceed
bolts and the valve from the pipe flanges .100” (2.54 mm) in width or .020” (.508 mm) in
and complete the welding of the flang- depth. If the grooves are less than .100” (2.54 mm)
es. Be sure to let the pipe and flanges cool in width, the groove depth must not exceed the
before installing the valve. width. However, fine conentric or “phonograph
record” grooves are acceptable regardless of the
groove depth.
! CAUTION 6. Flange gaskets must not be used with PTFE seats,
since they create an uncontrolled over compression
Never complete the welding process (after tacking) that can buckle the PTFE and damage the seat.
with the valve between pipe flanges. This causes If a damaged face, a flange gasket can appear to
severe seat damage due to heat transfer. cure the leak to atmosphere, while simultaneously
damaging the PTFE seat and creating a second leak
across the disc or up the stem hole. Leaks across
Installation of Bray PTFE Seated Butterfly Valves the plastic flange must be cured without the use of
in Plastic Flanges. gaskets, by proper selection and installation of the
flange.
Bray recommends the following guidelines when PTFE
Seated Valves are installed between plastic flanges: 7. The bolts holding plastic flanges should be
installed in strict conformance to the recommended
1. The valve body should be coated with epoxy, not practices of the plastic flange manufacturer. This
nylon. The extra thickness of the nylon coating usually involves aligning the flanges accurately,
slightly reduces the seat compression, and every using lubricated bolts, and tightening the bolts in
advantage to maximize seat compression should the proper sequence and to the specified torque.
be taken with plastic flanges. Uniform stress across the flange prevents leakage.
Maintenance and Repair
The many Bray features minimize wear and maintenance requirements. No routine lubrication is re-
quired. All components – stem, disc, seat, bushing, stem seal, etc., are field replaceable, no
adjustment is required. If components require replacement, the valve may be removed from the line by placing the
disc in the near closed position, then supporting the valve and removing the flange bolts.
No valve maintenance, including removal of manual or power actuators, should be

! WARNING
performed until the piping system is completely depressurized.
9
Appendix A
Disassembly/Assembly Instructions
Series 20/21 Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves
Disassembly
1. Remove handle, gear operator or power actuator from actuator mounting flange.
2. Remove the body bolts and pull the lower body half away from the seat.
3. Pull the seat and disc stem from the upper body half.
4. Remove bushing and seal from the upper body.
5. Push the seat into an oval shape and remove the disc stem by withdrawing the short stem end first.
Assembly
1. Push the long stem end of the disc into the seat.
2. Then push the seat over the disc’s short stem.
3. Place the disc stem and seat into the upper body half.
4. Align the lower body with the upper body and position lower body in the seat.
The body halves have a matching casting node on one side only to ensure
NOTICE
correct assembly of body halves.
5. Replace the body bolts and tighten.

6. Install the stem seal, then the stem bushing.
Note: It is recommended that the stem bushing be coated with a light amount of silicone grease
before installation in the valve body. This coating of silicone grease will assist in keeping the
stem bushing in the valve body until an actuator is mounted on the valve.
7. Replace handle, manual gear operator or power actuator on the actuator mounting flange.
10
Appendix A
11
Appendix B
Disassembly –
1. Remove the handle, gear operator, or power actuator from actuator mounting flange.
2. Remove the “Spirolox”® retaining ring and the two C-ring stem retainers from the stem hole.
3. Then remove the stem, bushing and seal.
4. Remove the disc from the seat, protecting the disc edge at all times.
5. Remove the seat energizer from the stems and seat.
6. Remove the lower and upper stems from the disc or remove the lower stem if the upper stem is con-
nected to the disc
7. Compress the seat just enough to allow the disc to be removed along with the seal capsules.
8. Remove the retainer bushing and upper stem seal.
Assembly –
1. Install the stem bearings in upper and lower body halves.

2. Place the body seal strip on the lower body half, overlapping the body width by approximately 0.19”
on both sides.
3. Press the seat to make the I.D. elliptical, then insert the shaft seals and place the disc into the seat.
Rotate the disc hubs into alignment with the seat.
4. Insert the upper and lower stems.
5. Slip one seat energizer strip onto the lower portion of the upper shaft.
6. Insert the upper shaft with the pre-installed seat energizer strip into the disc/seat sub assembly.
7. Drive the upper shaft into the disc and slip one seat energizer strip onto the lower shaft.
8. Rotate the disc into the open position and insert the disc/seat/stems/energizer sub assembly into the
upper body half.
9. Place the lower body half over the seat, and ensure that both body halves are properly aligned (iden-
tified by cast-on markings.
10. Attach and tighten the body fasteners.
12
SERIES 22/23 12
6
RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES 7
1. BODY
2. DISC
3. SEAT
14
4. UPPER STEM
5. LOWER STEM
6. BUSHING
7. UPPER STEM SEAL 9 1
8. SEAL CAPSULE
9. BEARING
10. SEAT ENERGIZER
11. CAP SCREW 4
12. RETAINER
13. BODY SEAL
14. ID TAG
10
2
3
8
13
5
13
9
11
11
13
Appendix C
Disassembly –
5. Push the seat into an oval shape, and then remove the seat from the body.
Assembly –

1. Push the valve seat into an oval and push it into the body with seat stem holes aligned to body stem
holes.
When installing the seat the larger hole should be on top and the smaller hole
NOTICE
should be on bottom.
2. Insert stem seal and bushing.

3. Push stem into the stem hole of the body until the bottom of the stem is flush with the inner top edge
of the seat.
4. Install a light coating of silicone or grease on the I.D. of seat. Insert the disc into the seat by
lining up the disc holes with the stem holes of the seat.
Note: The broached double “D” flats in the disc must be toward the bottom of the valve body.
5. With a downward pressure and rotating the stem back and forth, push the stem until the stem touches
the bottom of the body stem hole.
6. Make certain that when pushing the stem through the disc bottom, the broached flats of stem and
disc are aligned.
7. Replace the stem bushing and two stem retainers, then replace the “Spirolox”® retaining ring back
into position.
14
15
Appendix D
Series 3A/3AH Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves
Disassembly –
Note: The seat is bonded to the body and is not easily field replaceable. Please contact your local Bray
representative for seat replacement.
Assembly –

of the seat.
3. Install a light coating of silicone or grease on the I.D. of seat. Insert the disc into the seat by lining up
the disc holes with the stem holes of the seat.
disc are aligned.
into position.
16
SERIES 3A/3AH 9
7
1. BODY 6
2. SEAT
3. DISC 5
4. STEM
5. STEM SEAL
6. STEM BUSHING
7. STEM RETAINER
8. THRUST WASHER
9. RETAINING RING
4
17
Appendix E
Series 31H Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves
Disassembly –
Note: Valve is provided with the seat bonded to the body and therefore is not easily field re-
placeable. Please contact your local Bray representative for seat replacement.
Assembly –

of the seat.
3. Install a light coating of silicone or grease on the I.D. of seat. Insert the disc into the seat by lining up
the disc holes with the stem holes of the seat.
disc are aligned.
into position.
18
SERIES 31H
1. BODY (S30 WAFER STYLE SHOWN)
2. SEAT
3. DISC
4. STEM
5. STEM SEAL
6. STEM BUSHING
7. STEM RETAINER
8. THRUST WASHER
9. RETAINING RING
19
Appendix F
Series 31U Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves
Disassembly –
3. Then remove the top stem bushing and seal, upper stem and retaining rod.
5. The upper and lower stem bearings will remain in the valve behind the seat.
Note: The seat is bonded to the body and is not easily field replaceable.
Please contact your local Bray representative for seat replacement.
Assembly –
1. Install a light coating of silicone or grease on the I.D. of seat.

2. Insert the lower stem inside the disc before inserting the disc into the seat.
3. Insert the disc into the seat by lining up the disc holes with the stem holes of the seat.
4. Line up the disc using a T-Bar (Allan key style)
5. With a downward pressure and rotating the T-Bar back and forth, push the lower stem until the
lower stem touches the bottom of the body stem hole recess.
disc are aligned.
7. Insert the spacer bar and upper stem into the disc and valve.
8. Replace the top stem bushing and seal and two stem retainers.
9. Then replace the two “C” ring stem retainers and the “Spirolox”® retaining ring back into position
in the top stem hole.
Note: It is recommended that a torque and seat test be done to confirm all is in order with the
maintenance of the valve.
10. Replace the handle, manual gear operator or power actuator on the actuator mounting flange.
20
SERIES 31U 11
10
8
1. BODY 9. STEM RETAINER 7
2. DISC C WASHERS
3. UPPER STEM 10. UPPER THRUST
4. LOWER STEM WASHER
5. SEAT 11. RETAINING RING
6. BEARING 12. LOWER THRUST WASHER
7. STEM SEAL 13. SPACER 3
8. STEM BUSHING 14. SEAL PLUG
13
6
5
4
2
12
14
21
Appendix G
Disassembly –
1. Remove the gear operator or power actuator from the actuator mounting flange.
2. Secure the valve in a horizontal position with the taper-pin nuts facing upward.
Prior to removal of the valve stem the valve disc must be secured and sup-
ported to insure it does not drop out of the valve body once the stem is
CAUTION removed. Lay the valve down with two wood blocks located under the disc
! at the 6 o’clock and 12 o’clock positions making sure the blocks are in close
contact with the disc but not supporting the valve.
3. Remove the packing gland by removing the retaining screws and sliding the gland off the top of the
stem.
4. Remove bottom plate and thrust bearing to expose bottom of stem.
5. Remove nuts and washers from ends of taper pins and drive taper pins out of the disc. Avoid damag-
ing the disc coating or surface when removing taper-pins.
6. Once taper-pins are removed, drive the stem, bushing, and packing out of the valve body through the
top.
7. Remove the disc from the seat, protecting disc edge at all times.
22
Appendix G (Cont’d)
Assembly –
1. Replace bottom thrust bearing and plate.

2. Push the seat into an oval and push it into the body with seat stem holes aligned to body stem holes.
3. De-bur taper-pin grooves in the stem.
4. Push stem into stem hole of body until the bottom of the stem is flush with the inner top edge of the
seat.
Note: The end of the stem containing the keyway must be toward the top of the valve body.
5. Install a light coating of silicone or grease on the I.D. of the seat.
6. Insert the disc into the seat by lining up the disc hole with the upper stem hole of the seat.
Note: Make certain that when pushing the stem to the bottom of the body, the taper-pin
grooves in the stem line up with the holes in the disc face.
8. Tap the taper-pins into their holes from the large side of the hole, making sure the pins fit tightly in
the hole and allow no movement of the stem in the disc.
Note: Ensure that the taper-pin o-rings are in place before completing valve assembly.
9. Replace the washers and nuts on the ends of the taper-pins.
10. Replace bushing, packing, and packing gland, and then tighten the retaining screws snugly.
11. Replace manual gear operator or power actuator on the actuator mounting flange.
23
24
Appendix H
(Taper Pin Disc/Stem Connection)
Disassembly –
Prior to removal of the valve stem the valve disc must be secured and sup-
ported to insure it does not drop out of the valve body once the stem is re-
! CAUTION moved. Lay the valve down with two wood blocks located under the disc at
the 6 o’clock and 12 o’clock positions making sure the blocks are in close
stem.
top.
Note: Valves 54” and larger are provided with the seat bonded to the body and therefore is not eas-
ily field replaceable. Please contact your local Bray representative for seat replacement.
25
Appendix H (Cont’d)
Assembly –

2. Push the seat into an oval and push it into the body with seat stem holes aligned to body stem holes.
Note: Valves 54” and larger are provided with the seat bonded to the body and therefore is not
easily field replaceable. Please contact your local Bray representative for seat replacement.
seat.
26
SERIES 35/36
1. BODY 11. THRUST BEARING

2. DISC 12. BOTTOM PLATE
3. STEM 13. BOTTOM PLATE GASKET
4. SEAT 14. BOLT-HEX HEAD
5. STEM PACKING 15. KEY
6. STEM BEARING 16. STEM RETAINER
7. TAPER PIN 17. CAP SCREW
8. WASHER 18. PACKING GLAND
9. NUT 19. BOLT-HEX HEAD
10. O-RING 20. ID TAG
21. POP RIVET
27
Appendix I
(Internal Spline or Keyed Disc/Stem Connection)
Disassembly –
2. Secure the valve in a horizontal position.
Prior to removal of the valve stems the valve disc must be secured and sup-
ported to insure it does not drop out of the valve body once the stems are
! CAUTION removed. Lay the valve down with two wood blocks located under the disc
at the 6 o’clock and 12 o’clock positions making sure the blocks are in close
3. Removal of the lower valve stem:

a. Remove the bottom plate screws, bottom plate, bottom plate gasket and thrust bearing.
b. Remove the locking nut from the tie bolt.
c. Remove the stem retainer.
d. Secure a hoist to the lower stem (end is imperial threaded).
e. Then use the hoist to remove the lower stem from the valve body.
f. Remove the stem bearing.
4. Removal of the upper valve stem:
a. Remove the packing gland by removing the retaining screws and sliding the gland off the top
of the stem.
b. Secure a hoist to the upper stem (end is imperial threaded).
c. Then use the hoist to remove the upper stem including the tie bolt from the valve body.
5. Removal of the valve disc:
a. Remove the wood blocks noted above from below the disc.
b. Using a rubber hammer, pound one area of the disc (ex. 12 o’clock position) repeatedly until
the disc clears the face of the valve body.
28
Appendix I (Cont’d)
Disassembly –
6. Removal of packing and bearings:

a. Remove the stem packing.
b. Use a slotted screwdriver to carefully remove the upper and lower stem bearings.
7. Removal of the valve seat:
a. Set the valve body in an upright position and secure it in a floor vice ca-
! WARNING
pable of handling the weight of the valve body and seat.
Note: Be sure to not clamp the seat in the vice.

b. Insert a slotted screwdriver into the space between the body and the seat on the face of the
valve at the 12 o’clock position.
c. Carefully leverage the seat away from the body.
d. Push the seat into an oval shape and remove the seat from the body.
Assembly –
1. Installation of the valve seat:

a. Set the valve body in an upright position and secure it in a floor vice ca-
! WARNING
pable of handling the weight of the valve body and seat.
Note: Be sure to not clamp the seat in the vice.

b. Check to assure the interior surface of the valve body is clean.
c. Install a light coating of silicone lubricant on the interior surface of the valve body.
d. Push the seat into an oval and push it into the body with seat stem holes aligned to the body
stem holes.
29
Assembly –
2. Installation of the valve disc:

Note: Before installing the disc, check to assure the upper and lower stems are matched to the
upper and lower stem holes in the disc.
a. With the valve still in the vice in a vertical position, hoist the upper stem with the splined end
or the double keyed end pointing upward.
b. Push the upper stem into the stem hole of the upper body until the bottom of the stem
exceeds the upper stem hole of the seat by 20-50 mm.
c. Apply a light coating of silicone or grease on the I.D. of the seat.
d. Insert the disc into the seat with the splined end or the double keyed end up.
e. Push the disc into the seat while inserting the upper stem into the upper stem hole in the disc.
f. Adjust the disc to assure the lower stem hole of the disc is properly aligned with the lower
body stem hole.
3. Installation of the lower stem:
a. Close the valve so that the disc is inside the edge of the seat.
b. Carefully place the valve in a horizontal position assuring that there is no damage to the body
and disc coatings and disc edge.
c. Insert the stem bearing into the bottom stem hole of the body.
d. Insert the lower stem into the body and disc.
Note: The cone-shaped end of the lower stem should be toward the center of the disc.
30
Assembly –
4. Installation of the upper stem:
a. Hoist the valve to an angle and secure it (be careful not to go to high so
! CAUTION
the lower stem does not drop out).
b. Remove the upper stem from the valve.

c. Screw the tie bolt with lock nut to the splined or the double keyed end of the upper stem,
tighten the lock nut and insert the upper stem into the valve with the tie bolt end first.
Note: The tie bolt will go through the disc and reach to the bottom of the valve
Note: During this step, the keyway of the upper stem should be vertical to the front face
of the valve.
5. Installation of packing and bearings (upper valve stem):
a. Insert the stem bearing into the top hole of the body followed by the stem packing and pack-
ing gland follower.
b. Use two hexagon bolts to fasten the packing gland.
6. Installation of packing and bearings (lower valve stem):
a. Insert the stem retainer into the bottom hole of the body using a nut to fasten it.
b. Install the locking nut on the tie bolt.
c. Install the thrust bearing, bottom plate gasket and bottom plate follower.
d. Use four hexagon bolts to fasten the bottom plate tightly.
31
SERIES 35/36 5

3
(Internal Spline Valve)
1. BODY 11. BOLT-HEX HD
2. DISC 12. LOWER STEM
3. UPPER STEM 13. STEM RETAINER 6
4. SEAT 14. HEX NUT
5. KEY 15. THRUST BEARING 11
6. TIE BOLT 16. BOTTOM PLATE GASKET 10
9
7. STEM BEARING 17. BOTTOM PLATE
8. STEM PACKING 18. BOLT-HEX HD 8
9. PACKING GLAND 19. ID TAG 7
FOLLOWER 20. POP RIVET 1
10. PACKING GLAND
19
4
20
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
32
SERIES 35/36 5

3
(Internal Keyed Valve)
1. BODY 11. BOLT-HEX HEAD
2. DISC 12. LOWER STEM 5
3. UPPER STEM 13. STEM RETAINER 6
4. SEAT 14. HEX NUT
5. KEY 15. THRUST BEARING 11
6. TIE BOLT 16. BOTTOM PLATE GASKET 10
9
7. STEM BEARING 17. BOTTOM PLATE
8. STEM PACKING 18. BOLT-HEX HEAD 8
9. PACKING GLAND 19. ID TAG 7
FOLLOWER 20. POP RIVET 1
10. PACKING GLAND
19
4
20
5 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
33
Appendix J
Disassembly –
Prior to removal of the valve stem the valve disc must be secured and
supported to insure it does not drop out of the valve body once the stem is
CAUTION removed. Lay the valve down with two wood blocks located under the disc
! at the 6 o’clock and 12 o’clock positions making sure the blocks are in close
stem.
top.
Note: Valve is provided with the seat bonded to the body and therefore is not easily field re-
placeable. Please contact your local Bray representative for seat replacement.
34
Appendix J (Cont’d)
Assembly –

seat.
35
SERIES 36H
1. BODY 11. THRUST BEARING
2. DISC 12. BOTTOM PLATE
3. STEM 13. BOTTOM PLATE GASKET
4. SEAT 14. BOLT-HEX HEAD
5. STEM PACKING 15. KEY
6. STEM BEARING 16. STEM RETAINER
7. TAPER PIN 17. CAP SCREW
8. WASHER 18. PACKING GLAND
9. NUT 19. BOLT-HEX HEAD
10. O-RING 20. ID TAG
21. POP RIVET
36
CONTROLS Bray® is a registered trademark of
R
A Division of BRAY INTERNATIONAL, Inc. Bray International, Inc.
13333 Westland East Blvd. Houston, Texas 77041 © 2012 Bray International. All rights reserved.
281/894-5454 FAX 281/894-9499 www.bray.com OM-RSBFV-001 08-2012
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves
Technical Manual
TM1050-02/2015
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves
Technical Manual Table of Contents
Introduction to Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Reduced Disc Diameter Bray Series 30/31/3A Valves . . . . . . . . . . 6
Seating & Unseating Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Series 20/21 and 30/31/3A Torques Imperial (Lb-Ins) . . . . . . . . . 8
Series 20/21 and 30/31/3A Torques Metric (N-m) . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Series 32/33, 35/36 Torques Imperial (Lb-Ins) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Series 32/33, 35/36 Torques Metric (N-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Series 22/23 Torques Imperial (Lb-In) and Metric (N-m) . . . . . . . 11
Dynamic Torque Factors (Imperial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dynamic Torque Factors (Metric) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Valve Sizing Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Series 20/21 - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Cv) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Series 22/23 - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Cv) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Series 30/31/31H/3A/3AH/31U - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Cv) . . . . 16
Series 32/33/35/36/35F/36H - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Cv) . . . . . 16
Series 20/21 - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Kv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Series 22/23 - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Kv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Series 30/31/31H/3A/3AH/31U - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Kv) . . . . 18
Series 32/33/35/36/35F/36H - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Kv) . . . . . 18
Examples of Typical Flange to Valve Bolting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Flange Bolt Tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Series 20/21 - Standard Metal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Series 22/23 - Standard Metal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Series 30/31, 31H, 3A/3AH, 31U - Standard Metal Specifications . . 24
Series 32/33, 35/36, 35F, 36H - Standard Metal Specifications . . . 25
All statements, technical information, and recommendations in this bulletin are for general use
only. Consult Bray representatives or factory for the specific requirements and material selection
for your intended application. The right to change or modify product design or product without
prior notice is reserved.
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves – Torques
Torques
INTRODUCTION TO TORQUES CASE I (Angle = 0° , Disc in Closed Position)
There are a number of torques which butterfly valves may TT = Th + Tbf + Tss+ Tsu
experience such as: Analyzed
Tsu - Seating and Unseating Torque Total Torque for Case I using a symmetrical disc butterfly valve is
Td - Dynamic Torque Resulting from fluid flow the sum of hydrostatic torque, bearing friction torque, stem seal,
friction torque, and seating/unseating torque.
Tbf – Bearing Friction Torque
A. Hydrostatic Torque (Th)
Tss – Stem Seal Friction Torque
We will ignore discussion of the hydrostatic torque values as they
Te – Eccentricity Torque resulting from
are generally insignificant compared to the seating/unseating,
disc offset from centerline of stem (either single,
bearing friction and stem seal torque values (the safety factor
double or triple offset)
applied to seating/unseating, stem seal friction and bearing
Th – Hydrostatic Torque friction torque values more than compensates for the hydrostatic
torque which is usually less than 2% of these total torques).
Factors which influence the butterfly valve torque values
shown above are: B. Bearing Friction Torque (Tbf)
Type of Seat and Seat Material Bearing friction torque occurs because pressure forces against
Interference of Seat I.D. and Disc O.D. the disc are transmitted to the stem. As the stem is forced against
Shaft Diameter the bearing supports, bearing friction torque is created between
the stem material and the support material as the stem is turned.
Valve Diameter Bearing friction torques are normally included in the seating/
Bearing Coefficient of Friction unseating torque values.
Angle of Opening Bearing friction torques can be determined by using
Shut-off Pressure the following equation:
Fluid Velocity Tbf = .785 Cf Dv2 (d/2) ∆P
Disc Shape and Configuration Where:
Piping System and Location/Orientation of Valve in Pipe Line Tbf = Bearing Friction Torque
System Head Characteristics
Cf = Coefficient of Friction (approximately .25 for non-
Physical Size of Disc/Shaft Obstructing Flow corroded stem to cast iron body) (dimensionless).
Disc Edge Finish Dv = Valve Diameter (Inches)
With respect to Butterfly Valves, the two major conditions for Diameter of Shaft (Inches)
d =
determining total valve operating torque (TT) exists as follows:
∆P = Pressure Differential (psi)
C. Stem Seal Friction Torque (Tss)

For all practical purposes stem seal friction torque values are
insignificant when compared to seating/unseating and bearing
friction torques. Stem seal friction torques are normally included
in the seating/unseating torque values.
All information herein is proprietary and confidential and may not be copied or reproduced without the expressed written consent of BRAY INTERNATIONAL, Inc.
Introduction : 3 The technical data herein is for general information only. Product suitability should be based solely upon customer’s detailed knowledge and experience with their application.
D. Seating/Unseating Torques (Tsu) A. Bearing Friction Torque (Tbf)

The seating/unseating torque value (Tsu) is a function of the See Case I discussion. This torque value is normally included in
pressure differential, the seat material’s coefficient of friction, the Dynamic Torque Value.
the finished surface of the disc edge, the amount of interference
B. Stem Seal Friction Torque (Tss)
between the seat I.D. and disc O.D. when flanged in piping, the
seat thickness, and the type of service (media) for which the valve See Case I discussion. This torque value is normally included in
is being used. In determining the Tsu values for Bray resilient the Dynamic torque value.
seated butterfly valves, Bray has developed Seating/Unseating
Torque Charts incorporating all bearing friction and stem seal C. Dynamic Torque (Td)
friction torques for three classes of services for both the valves In a symmetrical disc design, dynamic torque occurs between the
with standard discs (rated to full pressure) and for valves with closed position, 0° and the full open position, 90°. With the disc in
reduced diameter discs (rated for 50 psi [3.5 bar]). The three the partially open position, velocity of the fluid passing the leading
service classes are: disc edge is less than the velocity passing the trailing edge. This
Class I – Non-Corrosive, Lubricating Service variance in velocity past the leading disc edge and trailing disc
edge results in an unbalanced distribution of pressure forces on
Class II – General Service the upstream side of the face of the disc. The total pressure forces
acting perpendicular to the disc face on the leading edge half of
Class III – Severe Service
the disc are greater than the total pressure acting perpendicular on
Please review the guidelines for each class in the technical the trailing half of the disc. This uneven distribution of pressure on
manual when determining which Seating/Unseating Torque Class the disc face (exists on both sides of the disc) results in a torsional
should be used. Most butterfly valves are used in Class II, General force which tries to turn the disc to the closed position (Figure 1).
Service applications. This torsional closing force can become greater than the seating/
unseating torque value depending on the valve angle of opening
E. Total Torque (TT)
and differential pressure.
The total torque values for Bray symmetrical disc valves for Case To determine dynamic torque, the following equation is applied:
I applications are shown in the Seating/Unseating Torque Charts
within this manual. Td = Cdt d3 ∆P
Where:
CASE II (Disc in Partial To Full Opening Position)
Td = Dynamic Torque (lbs- in).
TT = Tbf + Tss+ Td
Cdt = Coefficient of Dynamic Torque (based on disc shape
The total Torque for Case II using a symmetrical disc butterfly valve and angle of opening) (dimensionless)
is the summation of bearing friction torque, stem seal friction torque d = Diameter of Disc (Inches)
and dynamic torque.
∆P = Pressure Differential Across Valve (psi)
Figure 1 - Pressure Distribution
Cl
os
Pre
ing
FLOW
ssu
Torque
re
MORE
F
orc
TURBULENCE
es
HERE
As shown in Figure 2, dynamic torque for Bray’s symmetrical disc CONCLUSION

valves is at 0° angle of opening and increases until the angle of
opening reaches 75°-80°, where it then decreases to a zero value In most applications for butterfly valves, especially 20˝ (508mm)
at full open (90°) (no internal friction factors considered, just or smaller, the maximum torque required to operate the valve will
dynamic torque only). be seating/unseating torque. However, dynamic torque should be
considered particularly in:
One final comment about dynamic torque is that one may minimize
the dynamic torque by the orientation of the valve (stem horizontal • Control applications using larger valves (24˝ [610mm] and
or vertical) in the pipeline as well as by the location (distance) in above) where the disc is maintained in the open position
the pipeline from elbows, other valves, etc. (See Bray Resilient • Applications using larger valves (24˝ [610mm] and above)
Seated BFV Operations and Maintenance Manual). where the velocity is high (16 ft./sec [5.3m/sec]).
D. Total Torque (TT)
The total torque required for operating a Bray symmetrical disc
butterfly valve at an angle opening between 0°and 90° is shown in
the Dynamic Torque section of this manual. Note that the dynamic
torque includes all internal friction torque values.
Figure 2 - Angle of Opening

The Cdt value for Bray symmetrical disc valves are approximately:
Angle of
Opening 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 75° 80° 90°
Cdt 0 0.0126 0.0140 0.0251 0.0505 0.0809 0.1394 0.2384 0.3419 0.401 0
REDUCED DISC DIAMETER BRAY

SERIES 30/31/3A VALVES
Bray offers a reduced disc diameter for 4”-20” for Series 30, 31 Bray does the following to differentiate reduced diameter discs
and 3A valves. The purpose of reducing the disc diameter is to from full diameter discs:
decrease the seating/unseating torques and extend the seat life on
low pressure applications. Metal Discs: An “ R ” is stamped above the part number
By reducing the disc diameter, the interference between the disc Nylon 11 Coated Discs: Discs are differentiated by the color of
O.D. and seat I.D. is decreased and the valve pressure rating, the Nylon 11:
which is a function of this interference, is reduced to 50 PSI. Less
interference between the disc and seat results in reduced seating/ Grey – Full Disc Diameter
unseating torques. Lower seating/unseating torque may allow for
the use of a smaller actuator on the valve. In other applications White – Reduced Disc Diameter
where abrasive dry bulk materials such as cement, sugar, plastic,
pellets, flour, etc., are generally pneumatically conveyed at 50
PSI or less, the reduced disc diameter not only reduces the seat-
ing/unseating torque but, very importantly, usually significantly
increases the service life of the seat.
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves – Seating & Unseating Torques
SEATING & UNSEATING TORQUES

Bray has developed Seating/Unseating Torque Charts for three The guidelines for selecting a Class to be used for determining
Classes of Service for its valves with standard discs (rated for a valve’s seating/unseating torque are given below. Each valve
full pressure) and for valves with reduced diameter discs (rated application should comply with all five Class characteristics in
for 50 PSI / 3.5 bar.). order to be qualified for that Class.
Characteristics of Class A Class B Class C

Application Non-Corrosive, Lubricating Service General Service Severe Service
Lubricating hydrocarbons; Water; aqueous processes; all Dry, non-lubricating such as air,
Media Type Aqueous processes and Water other aqueous liquids including dry gas, cement, pneumatic
(See Note 1) salt water; Lubricating gases conveying mediums
Can incur significant

Corrosion No major corrosion or deposits
Insignificant if any corrosion such as Ductile Iron
by Media from media
disc in water
Chemical
Only minor or insignificant in Reactions causing swelling and
Reactions of Media Insignificant if any
nature hardness occur
with Seat
Media 45º to 160ºF Within seat temperature limits, Near or at seat temperature
Temperature (7º to 71ºC) not near limits limits
Frequency of Minimum once every 3-6 weeks, Infrequently, sometimes not

Once weekly or more frequently
Valve Cycling or more frequently cycled for long periods
NOTE:
1. For aqueous processes and water, Class A torques may be 4. With the exception of dry, non-lubricating medias, one
used only if a Nylon 11 coated disc is selected and all other is usually safe electing to use Class B torques for sizing
Class A characteristics apply. Otherwise, Class B torques actuators for all other valve service applications. Seating/
should be used. Unseating Torque values shown include friction bearing
torques for stated differential pressure.
2. All the material trims may be classified into Class A, B, or
C except Series 20/21 valves with a PTFE Lined Elastomer 5. Dynamic Torque values are not considered.
seat, PTFE molded disc/stem, or rubber molded disc/stem. See the Dynamic Torque chart in this manual for
These trims must always use Class C Seating/Unseating determination of Dynamic Torque.
Torque Values unless they are used only in a throttling
application. Valves with bonded seats must always be
6. Do not apply a safety factor to torque values when
determining actuator output torque requirement.
classified as Class C.
3. If a valve is used strictly in a throttling application, that is, 7. For 3-way assemblies where one valve is opening and
another is closing, multiply torque by a 1.5 factor.
it is never put in the closed position but throttled between
20° and 80°, then Class A torques may be used provided
you have checked to see that dynamic torques do not
exceed the Class A torque values.
Torque : 7 The technical data herein is for general information only. Product suitability should be based solely upon customer’s detailed knowledge and experience with their application.
Series 20/21 and 30/31/3A Torques Imperial (Lb-Ins)

Valve Differential Pressure (PSIG)
Valve Full Disc Reduced Disc
Size
Inches 0 psi 50 psi 100 psi 150 psi 175 psi 0 psi 50 psi
1 54 59 65 70 73 54 59
1.5 81 86 91 97 100 81 86
2 109 114 119 123 128 109 114
2.5 169 178 187 196 200 169 178
3 220 236 250 264 273 220 236
4 341 364 387 410 423 225 248
Class A 5 510 560 610 660 687 324 374
Non-Corrosive, 6 632 712 792 872 912 344 488
Lubricating 8 1,182 1,341 1,500 1,660 1,741 735 894
Service 10 1,764 2,018 2,272 2,526 2,653 1,204 1,358
12 2,701 3,110 3,519 3,928 4,132 1,665 2,074
14 3,818 4,500 5,182 5,864 –– 2,318 3,000
16 4,638 5,819 7,000 8,182 –– 2,699 3,880
18 5,265 7,065 8,865 10,665 –– 2,970 4,788
20 7,000 9,364 11,728 14,091 –– 3,356 6,243
1 59 65 71 77 80 59 65
1.5 89 95 100 106 110 89 95
2 120 125 130 135 140 120 125
2.5 185 195 205 215 220 185 195
3 245 260 275 290 297 245 260
4 375 400 425 450 462 252 267
5 560 615 670 725 755 355 410
Class B 6 695 783 871 953 1,003 427 537
General Service 8 1,300 1,475 1,650 1,825 1,915 808 983
10 1,960 2,240 2,520 2,800 2,940 1,213 1,493
12 2,970 3,420 3,870 4,320 4,545 1,830 2,280
14 4,200 4,950 5,700 6,450 –– 2,550 3,300
16 5,100 6,400 7,700 9,000 –– 2,967 4,267
18 5,850 7,850 9,850 11,850 –– 3,267 5,267
20 7,700 10,300 12,900 15,500 –– 4,267 6,867
1 74 82 89 97 100 74 82
1.5 111 119 125 133 137 111 119
2 151 157 163 169 175 151 157
2.5 231 244 257 269 275 231 244
3 306 325 344 363 375 306 325
4 468 500 532 563 582 316 348
5 700 769 838 907 944 444 513
Class C 6 870 980 1,090 1,200 1,255 525 672
Severe Service 8 1,625 1,844 2,063 2,282 2,394 1,011 1,230
10 2,450 2,800 3,150 3,500 3,675 1,517 1,867
12 3,712 4,275 4,838 5,400 5,682 2,287 2,850
14 5,251 6,188 7,125 8,063 –– 3,189 4,126
16 6,375 8,000 9,625 11,250 –– 3,709 5,334
18 7,315 9,815 12,315 14,815 –– 4,084 6,584
20 9,625 12,875 16,125 19,375 –– 5,334 8,584
Series 20/21 and 30/31/3A Torques Metric (N-m)

Valve Differential Pressure (Bar)
Valve Full Disc Reduced Disc
Size
mm 0 bar 3.4 bar 7 bar 10.3 bar 12 bar 0 bar 3.4 bar
25 6 7 7 8 8 6 7
40 9 10 10 11 11 9 10
50 12 13 13 14 14 12 13
65 19 20 21 22 23 19 20
80 25 27 28 30 31 25 27
100 39 41 44 46 48 25 28
Class A 125 58 63 69 75 78 37 42
Non-Corrosive, 150 71 80 89 99 103 39 55
Lubricating 200 134 152 169 188 197 83 101
Service 250 199 228 257 285 300 136 153
300 305 351 398 444 467 188 234
350 431 508 585 663 –– 262 339
400 524 657 791 924 –– 305 438
450 595 798 1,002 1,205 –– 336 541
500 791 1,058 1,325 1,592 –– 379 705
25 7 7 8 9 9 7 7
40 10 11 11 12 12 10 11
50 14 14 15 15 16 14 14
65 21 22 23 24 25 21 22
80 28 29 31 33 34 28 29
100 42 45 48 51 52 28 30
125 63 69 76 82 85 40 46
Class B 150 79 88 98 108 113 48 61
General Service 200 147 167 186 206 216 91 111
250 221 253 285 316 332 137 169
300 336 386 437 488 514 207 258
350 475 559 644 729 –– 288 373
400 576 723 870 1,017 –– 335 482
450 661 887 1,113 1,339 –– 369 595
500 870 1,164 1,458 1,751 –– 482 776
25 8 9 10 11 11 8 9
40 13 13 14 15 15 13 13
50 17 18 18 19 20 17 18
65 26 28 29 30 31 26 28
80 35 37 39 41 42 35 37
100 53 56 60 64 66 36 39
125 79 87 95 102 107 50 58
Class C 150 98 111 123 136 142 59 76
Severe Service 200 184 208 233 258 270 114 139
250 277 316 356 395 415 171 211
300 419 483 547 610 642 258 322
350 593 699 805 911 –– 360 466
400 720 904 1,087 1,271 –– 419 603
450 826 1,109 1,391 1,674 –– 461 744
500 1,087 1,455 1,822 2,189 –– 603 970
Series 32/33, 35/36 Torques Imperial (Lb-Ins)

Valve 32, 35 - Max P = 75 psi 33, 36 - Max P = 150 psi
Size
inches 0 psi 25 psi 50 psi 75 psi 0 psi 50 psi 100 psi 150 psi
24 6,700 8,100 9,500 10,900 10,500 15,000 19,500 24,000
26 7,900 9,800 11,700 13,600 12,400 18,400 24,400 30,400
28 9,200 11,600 14,000 16,400 14,200 21,700 29,200 36,700
30 10,400 13,300 16,200 19,100 16,100 25,100 34,100 43,100
Class B 32 11,700 15,600 19,400 23,300 18,400 29,700 41,100 52,400
General Service 34 13,500 18,500 23,500 28,500 20,950 34,750 48,600 62,400
36 14,300 20,100 25,900 31,700 23,000 39,000 55,000 71,000
(Imperial)
40 18,200 26,200 34,100 42,000 24,300 46,300 68,300 90,300
42 20,200 29,200 38,200 47,200 25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000
44 20,800 32,500 44,200 55,800 26,700 56,700 86,700 118,300
48 22,000 39,000 56,000 73,000 30,000 70,000 110,000 150,000
54 41,500 73,500 105,500 138,000 56,300 131,000 173,000 282,000
60 55,500 98,200 141,000 184,800 75,100 174,500 208,000 376,000
66 115,700 159,400 203,200 247,000 161,500 277,500 393,400 509,400
72 Consult Factory
Class C 78 Consult Factory
84 Consult Factory
90 Consult Factory
96 Consult Factory
Series 32/33, 35/36 Torques Metric (N-m)

Valve 32, 35, - Max P = 5 bar 33, 36 - Max P = 10.3 bar
Size
mm 0 bar 1.7 bar 3.4 bar 5.2 bar 0 bar 3.4 bar 7 bar 10.3 bar
600 757 915 1,074 1,232 1,187 1,695 2,204 2,712
650 893 1,107 1,322 1,537 1,401 2,079 2,757 3,435
700 1,040 1,311 1,582 1,853 1,605 2,452 3,300 4,147
750 1,175 1,503 1,831 2,158 1,819 2,836 3,853 4,870
Class B 800 1,322 1,763 2,192 2,633 2,079 3,356 4,644 5,921
General Service 850 1,526 2,091 2,656 3,221 2,367 3,927 5,492 7,051
900 1,616 2,271 2,927 3,582 2,599 4,407 6,215 8,023
(Metric)
1,000 2,057 2,961 3,853 4,746 2,746 5,232 7,718 10,204
1,050 2,283 3,300 4,317 5,334 2,825 5,650 8,475 11,300
1,100 2,350 3,673 4,995 6,305 3,017 6,407 9,797 13,368
1,200 2,486 4,407 6,328 8,249 3,390 7,910 12,430 16,950
1,400 4,689 8,304 11,920 15,592 6,361 14,801 19,546 31,862
1,500 6,271 11,095 15,931 20,880 8,485 19,716 23,501 42,482
1,650 13,072 18,010 22,959 27,907 18,247 31,353 44,448 57,555
1,800 Consult Factory
Class C 2,000 Consult Factory
Series 22/23 Torques Imperial (Lb-In) and Metric (N-m)
∆P = 0-150 psi ∆P = 0-10.3 bar

In. mm
Lb-In N-m
2 50 288 33
2.5 65 350 40
3 80 560 63
4 100 720 81
5 125 960 108
Valve 6 150 1,300 147
Size 8 200 2,402 271
10 250 3,840 434
12 300 5,812 657
14 350 8,000 904
16 400 11,000 1,243
18 450 15,500 1,751
20 500 19,300 2,181
24 600 30,500 3,446
1) Torques listed are for PTFE and UHMWPE trims.
2) All information based on full rated pressure differential.
DYNAMIC TORQUE FACTORS (IMPERIAL)
To Use the Torque Chart, note the following:

1. Dynamic Torque values include all bearing friction and 3. Bray recommends sizing control valves between 20° and
stem-seal friction torques. 70°, with 60° the preferred angle.
2. Dynamic Torque values are per 1 PSI ∆P. To determine 4. Dynamic Torque will tend to close all Bray valves whose
dynamic torque (lb-in) at a desired angle of opening, multiply disc are symmetrical to the stem.
the pressure drop ∆P at this angle by the appropriate dynamic
torque factor in the charts below.
Series 20/21 and 30/31/3A (Dynamic Torque Factor - lb-in./psi)

Angle of Opening 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 75° 80° 90°
2 0.113 0.126 0.225 0.453 0.726 1.251 2.139 3.068 3.052 0.000
2.5 0.216 0.240 0.430 0.865 1.386 2.388 4.085 5.858 5.827 0.000
3 0.367 0.408 0.732 1.473 2.359 4.065 6.952 9.970 9.918 0.000
4 0.855 0.949 1.702 3.425 5.486 9.454 16.168 23.187 23.065 0.000
5 1.650 1.833 3.287 6.613 10.593 18.253 31.217 44.769 44.533 0.000
6 2.494 2.771 4.969 9.997 16.014 27.594 47.192 67.680 67.323 0.000
Valve
Size 8 6.603 6.736 12.077 24.298 38.925 67.073 114.707 164.506 163.64 0.000
inches
10 11.990 13.322 23.885 48.056 76.985 132.653 226.862 325.353 323.640 0.000
12 20.892 23.214 41.619 83.735 134.142 231.141 395.295 566.910 563.925 0.000
14 30.039 33.377 59.841 120.396 192.873 332.342 568.366 815.119 810.828 0.000
16 45.652 50.724 90.942 182.970’ 293.115 505.070 863.764 1,238.762 1,232.240 0.000
18 65.909 73.232 131.295 264.159 423.178 729.184 1,247.040 1,788.435 1,779.020 0.000
20 91.415 101.573 182.105 366.387 586.945 1,011.373 1,729.637 2,480.549 2,467.498 0.000
Example: 4” Valve; 60° Open with a 10 PSI pressure drop: [Td = (9.454)(10) = 94.54 lb-in]
Series 32/33, 35/36 (Dynamic Torque Factor - lb-in./psi)

Angle of Opening 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 75° 80° 90°
24 158.358 175.953 315.459 634.688 1,016.758 1,751.990 2,996.230 4,297.026 4,274.403 0.000
Valve 30 315.318 350.353 628.133 1,263.773 2,024.539 3,488.513 5,966.008 8,556.117 8,511.072 0.000
Size
inches 36 551.884 613.205 1,099.388 2,211.917 3,543.447 6,105.766 10,441.998 14,975.332 14,896.492 0.000
Larger Size Valves - Consult Factory
Example: 24” Valve; 60° Open with a 10 PSI pressure drop: [Td = (1,751.990)(10) = 17,519.90 lb-in]
DYNAMIC TORQUE FACTORS (METRIC)
To Use the Torque Chart, note the following:

1. Dynamic Torque values include all bearing friction and 3. Bray recommends sizing control valves between 20° and
stem-seal friction torques. 70°, with 60° the preferred angle.
2. Dynamic Torque values are per 1 Bar ∆P. To determine 4. Dynamic Torque will tend to close all Bray valves whose
dynamic torque (N-m) at a desired angle of opening, multiply disc are symmetrical to the stem.
the pressure drop ∆P at this angle by the appropriate dynamic
torque factor in the charts below.
Series 20/21 and 30/31(Dynamic Torque Factor - N-m/bar)

Angle of Opening 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 75° 80° 90°
50 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.004 0.006 0.010 0.017 0.024 0.024 0.000
65 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.007 0.011 0.019 0.032 0.046 0.045 0.000
80 0.003 0.003 0.006 0.011 0.018 0.032 0.054 0.078 0.077 0.000
100 0.007 0.007 0.013 0.027 0.043 0.074 0.126 0.181 0.180 0.000
125 0.013 0.014 0.026 0.052 0.083 0.142 0.243 0.349 0.347 0.000
150 0.019 0.022 0.039 0.078 0.125 0.215 0.368 0.528 0.525 0.000
Valve
Size 200 0.052 0.053 0.094 0.190 0.304 0.523 0.895 1.283 1.276 0.000
mm
250 0.094 0.104 0.186 0.375 0.600 1.035 1.770 2.538 2.524 0.000
300 0.163 0.181 0.325 0.653 1.046 1.803 3.083 4.422 4.399 0.000
350 0.234 0.260 0.467 0.939 1.504 2.592 4.433 6.358 6.324 0.000
400 0.356 0.396 0.709 1.427 2.286 3.940 6.737 9.662 9.611 0.000
450 0.514 0.571 1.024 2.060 3.301 5.688 9.727 13.950 13.876 0.000
500 0.713 0.792 1.420 2.858 4.578 7.889 13.491 19.340 19.246 0.000
Example: 100 mm Valve; 60° Open with a 10 Bar pressure drop: [Td = (.074)(10) = .74 N-m]
Series 32/33, 35/36 (Dynamic Torque Factor - N-m/bar)

Angle of Opening 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 75° 80° 90°
600 1.235 1.372 2.461 4.951 7.931 13.666 23.371 33.517 33.340 0.000
Valve 750 2.459 2.733 4.899 9.857 15.791 27.210 46.535 66.738 66.386 0.000
Size
mm 900 4.305 4.783 8.575 17.253 27.639 47.625 81.448 116.808 116.193 0.000
Larger Size Valves - Consult Factory
Example: 600 mm Valve; 60° Open with a 10 Bar pressure drop: [Td = (13.666)(10) = 136.66 N-m]
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves – Valve Sizing Coefficients
VALVE SIZING COEFFICIENTS

1. Valve Sizing Coefficients (Cv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 14-15
1. Cv stands for Valve Sizing Coefficient, sometimes called the Flow Rate Coefficient.
2. Cv varies with the valve size, angle of opening and the manufacturer’s valve style.
3. Cv is defined as the volume of water in USGPM that will flow through a given restriction or valve
opening with a pressure drop of one (1) psi at room temperature.
2. Valve Sizing Coefficients (Kv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 16-17

1. Kv stands for Valve Sizing Coefficient, sometimes called the Flow Rate Coefficient.
2. Kv varies with the valve size, angle of opening and the manufacturer’s valve style.
3. Kv is defined as the volume of water in Cubic Meters/Hour (m3/hr) that will flow through a given
restriction or valve opening with a pressure drop of one (1) bar at room temperature.
Coefficients : 14 The technical data herein is for general information only. Product suitability should be based solely upon customer’s detailed knowledge and experience with their application.
Series 20/21 - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Cv)

Valve Disc Position (Degrees)
Size
inches 10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º 90º
1 0.1 1 3 6 11 21 36 56 61
1.5 0.2 2 6 11 26 50 87 129 147
2 0.9 7 16 27 45 73 123 172 244
2.5 1 11 25 43 71 115 201 310 439
3 2 16 35 62 102 165 290 488 691
4 4 28 63 110 182 294 515 906 1,282
5 6 44 98 172 284 459 805 1,416 2,070
6 7 59 130 227 376 607 1,065 1,873 2,786
8 13 106 244 427 714 1,147 1,935 3,402 5,191
10 21 168 387 675 1,130 1,815 3,062 5,385 8,238
12 31 245 562 981 1,642 2,636 4,448 7,820 12,102
14 40 307 706 1,234 2,064 3,313 5,590 9,829 15,210
16 52 403 925 1,617 2,706 4,343 7,328 12,885 19,940
18 68 528 1,213 2,121 3,549 5,695 9,610 16,898 26,150
20 85 660 1,517 2,651 4,436 7,120 12,014 21,124 32,690
Series 22/23 - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Cv)

Size
inches 10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º 90º
2 1 7 16 27 44 62 85 115 146
2.5 1 11 24 43 69 110 176 235 300
3 2 15 35 61 98 158 286 413 586
4 3 27 62 109 177 285 503 812 1,051
5 5 43 98 171 276 440 798 1,297 1,814
6 6 57 129 226 364 580 1,048 1,737 2,576
8 12 104 242 424 698 1,111 1,908 3,142 4,354
10 20 165 385 672 1,105 1,761 3,004 4,976 6,834
12 29 241 559 975 1,604 2,591 4,420 7,392 10,090
14 35 300 720 1,280 2,100 3,300 5,700 9,350 12,880
16 45 350 850 1,650 2,750 4,400 7,500 12,320 16,900
18 55 510 1,200 2,100 3,600 5,700 9,830 15,600 21,600
20 80 650 1,550 2,700 4,480 7,100 12,200 19,900 27,500
24 180 1,000 2,450 4,600 7,000 11,300 18,900 28,500 34,800
Series 30/31/31H/3A/3AH/31U - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Cv)

Size
Inches 10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º 90º
2 0.8 7 16 27 43 61 84 114 144
2.5 1 11 24 43 67 107 163 223 282
3 2 15 35 61 96 154 267 364 461
4 3 27 62 109 171 274 496 701 841
5 5 43 98 170 268 428 775 1,146 1,376
6 6 56 129 225 354 567 1,025 1,542 1,850
8 12 102 241 421 680 1,081 1,862 2,842 3,316
10 19 162 382 667 1,076 1,710 2,948 4,525 5,430
12 27 235 555 1,005 1,594 2,563 4,393 6,731 8,077
14 34 299 756 1,320 2,149 3,384 5,939 8,874 10,538
16 45 397 1,001 1,749 2,847 4,483 7,867 11,761 13,966
18 58 507 1,281 2,237 3,643 5,736 10,065 14,496 17,214
20 72 632 1,595 2,786 4,536 7,144 12,535 18,812 22,339
Series 32/33/35/36/35F/36H - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Cv)

Size
Inches 10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º 90º
22 103 916 2,070 3,510 5,640 9,036 14,562 22,028 27,168
24 259 1,028 2,387 4,244 6,962 11,040 18,235 27,186 33,154
26 289 1,141 2,752 4,890 7,824 12,496 19,921 29,700 36,220
28 295 1,324 3,133 5,399 8,636 13,838 22,578 34,683 41,619
30 420 1,652 3,986 7,080 11,328 18,090 28,844 43,003 52,443
32 550 2,026 4,636 7,983 12,743 20,410 32,591 48,558 60,658
34 533 2,304 5,210 8,834 14,194 22,741 36,648 55,438 68,374
36 740 2,775 5,936 9,790 15,572 25,053 40,086 59,667 77,089
40 757 2,971 6,925 11,862 19,307 30,636 50,406 73,990 90,175
42 783 3,502 7,879 12,997 21,010 35,016 54,584 83,421 102,989
44 904 4,066 8,698 14,346 22,818 36,712 58,740 87,430 112,960
48 1,023 4,651 10,365 17,010 27,242 43,853 70,431 108,968 132,888
52 Consult Factory
54 1,299 5,904 13,158 21,594 34,583 55,671 89,411 138,334 168,700
60 1,480 6,400 14,500 24,500 39,400 63,200 102,000 154,000 190,000
66 1,650 7,110 16,100 27,300 43,800 70,200 113,000 171,000 211,000
72 1,900 8,220 18,600 31,500 50,700 81,200 131,000 198,000 244,000
78 2,290 9,910 22,400 38,000 61,000 97,800 158,000 238,000 294,000
84 2,290 11,390 25,800 43,700 70,200 112,400 181,000 274,000 338,000
90 Consult Factory
96 Consult Factory
Series 20/21 - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Kv)

Size
mm 10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º 90º
25 0.087 0.865 2.595 5.190 9.515 18.165 31.140 48.440 52.765
40 0.173 1.730 5.190 9.515 22.490 43.250 75.255 111.585 127.155
50 0.779 6.055 13.840 23.355 38.925 63.145 106.395 148.780 211.060
65 0.865 9.515 21.625 37.195 61.415 99.475 173.865 268.150 379.735
80 1.730 13.840 30.275 53.630 88.230 142.725 250.850 422.120 597.715
100 3.460 24.220 54.495 95.150 157.430 254.310 445.475 783.690 1,108.930
125 5.190 38.060 84.770 148.780 245.660 397.035 696.325 1,224.840 1,790.550
150 6.055 51.035 112.450 196.355 325.240 525.055 921.225 1,620.145 2,409.890
200 11.245 91.690 211.060 369.355 617.610 992.155 1,673.775 2,942.730 4,490.215
250 18.165 145.320 334.755 583.875 977.450 1,569.975 2,648.630 4,658.025 7,125.870
300 26.815 211.925 486.130 848.565 1,420.330 2,280.140 3,847.520 6,764.300 10,468.230
350 34.600 265.555 610.690 1,067.410 1,785.360 2,865.745 4,835.350 8,502.085 13,156.650
400 44.980 348.595 800.125 1,398.705 2,340.690 3,756.695 6,338.720 11,145.525 17,248.100
450 58.820 456.720 1,049.245 1,834.665 3,069.885 4,926.175 8,312.650 14,616.770 22,619.750
500 73.525 570.900 1,312.205 2,293.115 3,837.140 6,158.800 10,392.110 18,272.260 28,276.850
Series 22/23 - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Kv)

Size
mm 10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º 90º
50 0.865 6.055 13.840 23.355 38.060 53.630 73.525 99.475 126.290
65 0.865 9.515 20.760 37.195 59.685 95.150 152.240 203.275 259.500
80 1.730 12.975 30.275 52.765 84.770 136.670 247.390 357.245 506.890
100 2.595 23.355 53.630 94.285 153.105 246.525 435.095 702.380 909.115
125 4.325 37.195 84.770 147.915 238.740 380.600 690.270 1,121.905 1,569.110
150 5.190 49.305 111.585 195.490 314.860 501.700 906.520 1,502.505 2,228.240
200 10.380 89.960 209.330 366.760 603.770 961.015 1,650.420 2,717.830 3,766.210
250 17.300 142.725 333.025 581.280 955.825 1,523.265 2,598.460 4,304.240 5,911.410
300 25.085 208.465 483.535 843.375 1,387.460 2,241.215 3,823.300 6,394.080 8,727.850
350 30.275 259.500 622.800 1,107.200 1,816.500 2,854.500 4,930.500 8,087.750 11,141.200
400 38.925 302.750 735.250 1,427.250 2,378.750 3,806.000 6,487.500 10,656.800 14,618.500
450 47.575 441.150 1,038.000 1,816.500 3,114.000 4,930.500 8,502.950 13,494.000 18,684.000
500 69.200 562.250 1,340.750 2,335.500 3,875.200 6,141.500 10,553.000 17,213.500 23,787.500
600 155.700 865.000 2,119.250 3,979.000 6,055.000 9,774.500 16,348.500 24,652.500 30,102.000
Series 30/31/31H/3A/3AH/31U - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Kv)

Size
mm 10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º 90º
50 0.692 6.055 13.840 23.355 37.195 52.765 72.660 98.610 124.560
65 0.865 9.515 20.760 37.195 57.955 92.555 140.995 192.895 243.930
80 1.730 12.975 30.275 52.765 83.040 133.210 230.955 314.860 398.765
100 2.595 23.355 53.630 94.285 147.915 237.010 429.040 606.365 727.465
125 4.325 37.195 84.770 147.050 231.820 370.220 670.375 991.290 1,190.240
150 5.190 48.440 111.585 194.625 306.210 490.455 886.625 1,333.830 1,600.250
200 10.380 88.230 208.465 364.165 588.200 935.065 1,610.630 2,458.330 2,868.340
250 16.435 140.130 330.430 576.955 930.740 1,479.150 2,550.020 3,914.125 4,696.950
300 23.355 203.275 480.075 869.325 1,378.810 2,216.995 3,799.945 5,822.315 6,986.605
350 29.410 258.635 653.940 1,141.800 1,858.885 2,927.160 5,137.235 7,676.010 9,115.370
400 38.925 343.405 865.865 1,512.885 2,462.655 3,877.795 6,804.955 10,173.265 12,080.590
450 50.170 438.555 1,108.065 1,935.005 3,151.195 4,961.640 8,706.225 12,539.040 14,890.110
500 62.280 546.680 1,379.675 2,409.890 3,923.640 6,179.560 10,842.775 16,272.380 19,323.235
Series 32/33/35/36/35F/36H - Valve Sizing Coefficient (Kv)

Size
mm 10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º 90º
550 89.095 792.340 1,790.550 3,036.150 4,878.600 37,887.000 12,596.130 19,054.220 23,500.320
600 224.035 889.220 2,064.755 3,671.060 6,022.130 43,855.500 15,773.275 23,515.890 28,678.210
650 249.985 986.965 2,380.480 4,229.850 6,767.760 52,765.000 17,231.665 25,690.500 31,330.300
700 255.175 1,145.260 2,710.045 4,670.135 7,470.140 60,723.000 19,529.970 30,000.795 36,000.435
750 363.300 1,428.980 3,447.890 6,124.200 9,798.720 37,887.000 24,950.060 37,197.595 45,363.195
800 475.750 1,752.490 4,010.140 6,905.295 11,022.695 43,855.500 28,191.215 42,002.670 52,469.170
850 461.045 1,992.960 4,506.650 7,641.410 12,277.810 52,765.000 31,700.520 47,953.870 59,143.510
900 640.100 2,400.375 5,134.640 8,468.350 13,469.780 60,723.000 34,674.390 51,611.955 66,681.985
1,000 654.805 2,569.915 5,990.125 10,260.630 16,700.555 37,887.000 43,601.190 64,001.350 78,001.375
1,050 677.295 3,029.230 6,815.335 11,242.405 18,173.650 43,855.500 47,215.160 72,159.165 89,085.485
1,100 781.960 3,517.090 7,523.770 12,409.290 19,737.570 52,765.000 50,810.100 75,626.950 97,710.400
1,200 884.895 4,023.115 8,965.725 14,713.650 23,564.330 60,723.000 60,922.815 94,257.320 114,948.120
1,400 1,123.635 5,106.960 11,381.670 18,678.810 29,914.295 48,155.415 77,340.515 119,658.910 145,925.500
1,500 1,280.200 5,536.000 12,542.500 21,192.500 34,081.000 54,668.000 88,230.000 133,210.000 164,350.000
1,650 1,427.250 6,150.150 13,926.500 23,614.500 37,887.000 60,723.000 97,745.000 147,915.000 182,515.000
1,800 1,643.500 7,110.300 16,089.000 27,247.500 43,855.500 70,238.000 113,315.000 171,270.000 211,060.000
2,000 1,980.850 8,572.150 19,376.000 32,870.000 52,765.000 84,597.000 136,670.000 205,870.000 254,310.000
2,200 1,980.850 9,852.350 22,317.000 37,800.500 60,723.000 97,226.000 156,565.000 237,010.000 292,370.000
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves – Flange to Valve Bolting Guide
EXAMPLES OFof
Examples TYPICAL
Typical FLANGE
Flange toTO VALVE
Valve BOLTING*
Bolting*
** Lug Style Bolting
Valve Body
Raised Valve Body Raised
Face Face
Flange Flange
Washer Washer
**Minimum Bolt
Engagement
Must Be Equal to
Diameter of Bolt
Minimum Bolt
Bolt
Flange Width
Including Raise Face
IfIf Applicable
Necessary
+ Washer
Width + Engagement
Equal to
Bolt Diameter
= Length
** Wafer Style Bolting
Flat Face Flat Face

Flange Flange
Washer Washer
Valve Face to Face
Flange
= Overall
Width
+ + + +
Washer
Width x2 Valve Width of Nut 4 Threads
Including Raise Face
If Applicable
Face to Face x2 x2 (2 Per Side) Length
Note: Please refer to Appropriate Bray Technical

** Note:
Drawings forPlease refer
Dimensions andto Appropriate
Bolting information
for the highlighted holes.
Bray Dimensional Drawings for
ASME Class
specific valve150 =drilling
26” Valves information
and larger
on ASME
WaferClass
and300Lug
= 14”Valves
Valves and
20”larger
and larger.
ASME Class 650 = 10” Valves and larger
Please refer to ASME B-16.5 or B-16.47 for Flange and Bolt Dimension Information
* Double flange style bolting not shown.
** Lug threads may be tapped from both sides and therefore tap may not be continuous.
Mounting : 19 The technical data herein is for general information only. Product suitability should be based solely upon customer’s detailed knowledge and experience with their application.
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves – Flange Bolt Tensioning Data
FLANGE BOLT TENSIONING

Bray Butterfly Valves with Metal Mating Flanges
A question frequently asked at Bray is “What torque do Note: The elastomer valve seat manufactured by Bray
I apply to the flange bolts to insure the valve is properly also acts as the flange gasket. No additional gaskets are
installed?”. Initially this seems to be a simple request required or recommended. Other valve styles which do
until all of the factors are analyzed. The installation of not have integral gaskets will need to have this component
a valve requires several components: the valve, mating supplied. The characteristics of this component will also
flanges, nuts, bolts and studs. Each is supplied by different need to be considered.
manufacturers and each has different characteristics. The
proper torque for one combination may be too much or Complete knowledge of all relevant conditions is almost
too little for a second combination. The following is a list impossible to obtain. As a result, the computation of the
of information which needs to be known in order to start exact torque requirement is not practical. No reputable
calculating the torque requirements. manufacturer can provide accurate information when so
many outside factors are present.
Valve
• Type The International Fasteners Institute covers some of the
• Size details required to “compute” a torque value. Even with this
• Materials of construction (Body) information the use of a torque wrench is only considered
• Surface finishes / Surface conditions to be 25% accurate. Based on the difficulty and inaccuracy
of using this method, Bray recommends the use of the
Flange “Turn of the nut” method.
• Type
• Size “Turn of the Nut” Tightening
• Finish / both sides (For ANSI Standard Iron and Steel Flanges)
• Condition of flange / surface contamination **For Non-Metallic or non-standard flanges, follow the manufacturers installation
procedures.
Bolt (or Stud)

• Type 1. The valve and flange faces must be aligned parallel to
• Materials of Construction each other.
• Surface Conditions
Note: For rubber seated butterfly valves manufactured
Nut by Bray, it is required that the valve be fully opened
• Type prior to the tightening of the flange bolts.
• Materials of Construction
• Surface Conditions 2. After aligning the holes in a joint, sufficient bolts shall
be placed and brought to a ‘snug-tight’ condition to
Lubrication ensure that the parts of the joint are brought into full
• Type contact with each other. ‘Snug-Tight’ is the tightness
• Coverage attained by the full effort of a man using a spud wrench.
3. Following the initial snugging operation, bolts shall

General Factors
be placed in any remaining holes and brought to snug-
• Temperature and relative humidity at the time of
tightness. Re-snugging may be necessary in large
installation
joints.
• Speed at which bolts are turned
4. Tighten opposite bolts in sequence to insure even
pressure around the entire flange.
5. When all bolts are snug-tight, each bolt in the joint then Disclaimer:
shall be tightened additionally by the applicable amount Bray Controls is issuing these recommendations only
of nut rotation given in Note 1. During tightening there as a guide to installation. This recommendation is
shall be no rotation of the valve or flange. based on the full compliance of all materials supplied
to their appropriate specifications. Since many of the
Note 1 components are not manufactured by Bray we can
For bolt lengths not exceeding 8 diameters take no responsibility for any damage caused during
or 8 inches (203.2 mm) = 1/4 turn installation.
For bolt lengths exceeding 8 diameters
or 8 inches (203.2 mm) = 1/2 turn
Series 20/21 and 30/31 - Flange Bolt Torque Chart

Valve Size Normal Torque Range Normal Torque Range
In mm Ft-lbs N-m
2 50 30 40
2.5 65 30 40
3 80 35 50
4 100 35 - 40 50 - 55
5 125 35 - 45 50 - 60
6 150 35 - 50 50 - 65
8 200 45 - 55 60 - 75
10 250 55 - 75 75 - 100
12 300 65 - 110 90 - 150
14 350 75 - 120 100 - 165
16 400 75 - 120 100 - 165
18 450 85 - 130 115 - 175
20 500 85 - 130 115 - 175
Please note that the N-m and Ft-lbs values are based The torque values are based on using new, coarse-
on bolt size in respective metric and ANSI flanges, i.e. threaded, lubricated fasteners. Up to 25% may be
these values are not a direct conversion between N-m added to the Normal Torque Range values when using
and Ft-lbs. non-lubricated fasteners.
The values represent average torques needed to ensure Torque Values specified by flange manufacturers must
full compression of the resilient valves’ seats into the not be exceeded.
valves’ bodies when installed in pipeline flanges. The
face of both flanges must come into full contact with
the valves’ metal bodies.
No additional torque is required for proper functioning

of the Bray resilient seated valves.
Series 22/23 Installation - Flange Bolt Torque Chart, 150 lb Flanges

Valve Size Normal Torque Range Max Torque Range
In mm Ft-lbs N-m Ft-lbs N-m
2 50 30 40 35 50
2.5 65 30 40 35 50
3 80 35 50 40 55
4 100 35 - 40 50 - 55 40 55
5 125 35 - 45 50 - 60 50 65
6 150 35 - 50 50 - 65 65 90
8 200 45 - 55 60 - 75 80 110
10 250 55 - 75 75 - 100 100 135
12 300 65 - 110 90 - 150 120 165
14 350 75 - 120 100 - 165 140 190
16 400 75 - 120 100 - 165 140 190
18 450 85 - 130 115 - 175 170 230
20 500 85 - 130 115 - 175 180 245
24 600 100 - 150 135 - 205 220 300
The torque values are based on using new, coarse- Torque values specified by manufacturers of certain
threaded, lubricated fasteners. Up to 15% may be flanges, for example plastic flanges, could be lower than
added to the Normal Torque Range values when using the values specified above. In such cases, the flange
non-lubricated fasteners. However, the maximum manufacturers’ torque values must not be exceeded.
torque should not be exceeded. Use flange gaskets if necessary to secure flange seal.
Flange gaskets are normally not used for installation

of S22/23 valves. Flange leakage may be caused by
combination of out-of-parallel and/or misaligned
flanges, and surface damage on the flange face and/or
the face of the valve seat. In such cases, suitable flange
gaskets may be used to control flange leakage.
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves – Standard Metal Specifications
Series 20/21 - Standard Metal Specifications

Part Material ASTM No. UNS No.
Cast Iron A126 Class B
Ductile Iron A395 Gr. 60-40-18 F32800
Body
316 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M J92900
Aluminum B26 Class B
Disc/Stem Hastelloy® C22 * B494 CX2MW N26022
1-12”(25-300mm) One Piece
17-4 ph Stainless Steel A747 CB7Cu1 Heat Treated J92180
316 Stainless Steel A240 S31600
Disc/Stem Disc Hastelloy® C276 * B575 N10276
14-20” 17-4 ph Stainless Steel A564 630 Heat Treated S17400
(350-500mm) 316 Stainless Steel A276 S31600
Fabricated Stem Hastelloy® C276 * B575 N10276
17-4 ph Stainless Steel A564 630 Heat Treated S17400
Series 22/23 - Standard Metal Specifications

Part Material ASTM No. UNS No.
Ductile Iron A395 Gr. 60-40-18 F32800
Body 316 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M J92900
Carbon Steel A216 WCB J030002
PTFE/316 SS (2”-12”) A351 CF8M J92900
PTFE/17-4 ph SS (14”-24”) A547 CB7Cu1 J92180
Disc UHMWPE/316 SS (2”-6”) A351 CF8M J92900
UHMWPE/DI (8”-12”) A536 Gr 65-45-12 F33100
Hastelloy C22 *
®
B494 CX2MW N26022
Titanium
Stem 17-4 ph Stainless Steel A564 630 Heat Treated S17400
* Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
®
Metal Specs : 23 The technical data herein is for general information only. Product suitability should be based solely upon customer’s detailed knowledge and experience with their application.
Series 30/31, 31H, 3A/3AH, 31U - Standard Metal Specifications

UNS
Part Material ASTM No. 30/31 31H 3A/3AH 31U
No.
Cast Iron A126 Class B • • •
Ductile Iron A536 Gr. 65-45-12 F33100 • • •
Ductile Iron A395 F32800 •
Body
Carbon Steel A216 WCB J030002 • • •
Nickel Aluminum Bronze B148 C95800 •
Aluminum B26 Class B •
Aluminum Bronze B148 C95400 • • •
Nickel Aluminum Bronze B148 C95800 •
Nylon Coated Ductile Iron A536 Gr. 65-45-12 F33100 • • •
316 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M J92900 • • • •
Disc 304 Stainless Steel A351 CF8 J92600 • •
Duplex Stainless Steel A995 Gr 4A J92205 • •
Super Duplex Stainless Steel A995 Gr 5A J93404 • •
(254 SMO™)*
A351 Grade CK3MCuN S31254 • •
Hastelloy® C-276 * B575 N10276 • •
304 Stainless Steel A276 S30400 • •
Stem 416 Stainless Steel A582 S41600 • • • •
17-4 ph Stainless Steel A564 630 Heat Treated S17400 •
Monel® * B865 N05500 • • •
* Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
Monel® is a registered trademark of International Nickel Company, Inc.
254 SMO™ is a registered trademark of Avesta AB.
AL-6XN® is a registered trademark of ATI Properties, Inc.
Series 32/33, 35/36, 35F, 36H - Standard Metal Specifications

UNS
Part Material ASTM No. 32-36 36H 35F
No.
Cast Iron A126 Class B • •
Ductile Iron A536 Gr. 65-45-12 F33100 • • •
Body
Carbon Steel A216 Gr. WCB J030002 •
316 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M J92900 •
Nickel Aluminum Bronze B148 C95800 • •
Nylon Coated Ductile Iron A536 Gr. 65-45-12 F33100 • •
316 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M J92900 •
304 Stainless Steel A351 CF8 J92600 •
Disc Hastelloy® C-276 * B575 N10276 CF •
Hastelloy C-22 *
®
B494 CX2MW N26022 CF
Duplex Stainless Steel A995 Gr 5A J93404 • • •
(254 SMO ™) *
A351 Grade CK3MCuN S31254 • • •
Monel® * A494 Grade M-35-1 N24135 •
416 Stainless Steel A582 S41600 •
Stem 17-4 ph Stainless Steel A564 630 Heat Treated S17400 • •
Austenitic Stainless Steel A479 S31651 •
Super Austenitic Stainless Steel (AL-6XN ) * ®
A276 N08367 • •
Monel® * B865 N05500 •
* Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
Monel® is a registered trademark of International Nickel Company, Inc.
254 SMO™ is a registered trademark of Avesta AB.
AL-6XN® is a registered trademark of ATI Properties, Inc.
All statements, technical information, and recommendations in this
bulletin are for general use only. Consult Bray representatives or Bray Controls
factory for the specific requirements and material selection for your
A Division of Bray International, Inc.
intended application. The right to change or modify product design
or product without prior notice is reserved. Patents issued and applied 13333 Westland East Blvd.
for worldwide. Houston, Texas 77041
Bray® is a registered trademark of
Tel: 281.894.5454 • www.bray.com
Bray International, Inc.
© 2015 Bray International, Inc. All rights reserved.
TM-1050_Resilient_02_2015
AHF Valves (Australia) Pty.Ltd
20 Ernest Clark Road
Canning Vale WA 6155
Tel: (618) 9256 3588 Fax: (618) 9256 3622
INSTALLATION, OPERATION,
AND MAINTENANCE
PREFACE
This manual contains information concerning the installation,

operation, and maintenance of Butterfly Valves. To ensure
efficient and safe operation of Butterfly Valves, the instructions in
BFVIOM1009
this manual should be thoroughly read and understood. This
manual is general in nature and is not meant to take the place of
an on-site, process engineer or pipe fitter. As such it is
recommended that only experienced, skilled personnel be allowed
to install and maintain Butterfly Valves. Please retain this manual
in a location where it is readily available for reference.
GENERAL INFORMATION:
Butterfly Valves are quarter-turn valves that are installed between

flanges to regulate flow in a pipeline. The disc, positioned in the
center of the pipe, rotates so that the valve can be opened, closed,
or partially opened.
Specific engineering design data, not contained in this manual, may

be located within the BFV Specification Sheets or on certified
Engineering drawings available upon request.
Prior to selection of a Butterfly Valve the following factors

must be determined:
• Material construction requirements of the Butterfly Valve.

• Design and working pressure/temperature requirements.
• Operating conditions (throttling, pressure drop, condensation,
flow reversal, operation frequency, etc.).
• Service media type (liquid, gas, abrasive, corrosive, dirty, etc).
• Pipeline Media Flow-rate and Viscosity.
• Clean Start-up Pressure of the Pipeline.
• Space availability for installation.
CAUTION:
For large or heavy Butterfly Valves, the appropriate material
handling equipment must be used to prevent injury and
possible damage to the Butterfly Valve.
Canning Vale WA 6155 AND MAINTENANCE
Tel: (618) 9256 3588 Fax: (618) 9256 3622
INSTALLATION:
Pre-Installation Checklist Installation Procedure
BFVIOM1009
• Ensure Working conditions (pressure and temperature) are Step 1:
within the specified capacity of the product being installed. Butterfly Valves are bi-directional and can be
Please refer to the certified Engineering drawings to assist installed in a vertical or horizontal position. Check that
in determining these values. the existing pipe sizes match the inlet and outlet sizes of
the unit being installed. If pipeline strain is a concern with
• Make sure that the construction material of the Butterfly Valve larger Butterfly Valves and accessories, additional
is chemically compatible with the media flowing in the pipeline. support may be necessary.
• Inspect the Butterfly Valve’s flange ends and the pipeline’s Step 2:
mating flanges to ensure the surfaces are clean and free Special flange gaskets are not required because the
of defects. The pipeline should also be checked for proper extruded portion of the seat functions as a gasket.
alignment.
Step 3:
• The distance between pipe flanges should be Make sure the Butterfly Valve is in a closed position.
checked to assure sufficient clearance for valve
installation. Step 4:
Place the Butterfly Valve into position. For wafer valves,
the alien holes should be aligned to the flange bolt holes
• The appropriate material handling equipment (joist and slings)
ensuring that the valve is centered; the bolt holes on the
should be available to lift larger units into position
lug valves should be aligned with the flange bolting.
CAUTION: Step 5:
Wafer valves are placed between flanges and installed with fully
threaded studs. Tapped lug valves are installed between the
Butterfly Valves are designed only for installation between flanges with small cap screws on the inlet and the outlet of the
ASME/ANSI 125 Cast Iron or 150 Ductile Iron Flanges. valve.
Although the pressure ratings are different, the bolting (See Figure 3)
patterns are identical.
TITAN
Tel: (618) 9256 3588 Fax: (618) 9256 3622 INSTALLATION, OPERATION,
AND MAINTENANCE
Installation Procedure continued...
CAUTION:
Excessive bolt torque may damage flanges. Please refer
to established flange bolt torques for guidelines.
BUTTERFLY VALVE
OPERATION:
Lug Body
Wafer Body
Once proper installation has been successfully completed,
start the system gradually, at start up as well as after shut
down. This eliminates sudden shock to the butterfly valve
Studs & Nuts Cap Screws and other equipment in the line.
Start-up Procedure:
Step 1:
Gradually increase system pressure until working pressure
B
is reached.
A
Step 2:
Threaded Studs Cap Screw Inspect flange connections for leaks. If leaking occurs,
check for piping misalignment, that the flange bolts
Figure 3: Installation of Wafer and Lug Butterfly Valves are properly tightened, and that the cover is properly
3
seated.
Step 6: Step 3:
Install lubricated flange bolts and hand tighten. Adjusting flow from 0° (closed) to 90° (full flow) can
BFVIOM1009
be done manually or automatically depending on the
Step 7: type of butterfly valve installed. Manual operators are
Open valve slowly to make sure that the disc does not make contact available in a 10 position handle, an infinite handle, and
with the piping or the flanges. Close the valve. a gear operator. Automatic operation can be achieved
with a pneumatic or electric operator.
Step 8:
Flange bolts should then be tightened, using a star or crisscross CAUTION:
pattern to evenly load the bolts, in accordance with established
piping standards. This is illustrated in Figure 4. To assist in opening and closing Butterfly Valves, gear
operators are typically recommended for valves 8”
and larger.
1 5
8 3
MAINTENANCE:
4 7
Butterfly Valves require minimal
regular maintenance. Below is a preventive checklist with
6 2 recommended monthly practices:
• Adjust the valve from closed to full flow periodically

Figure 4: Bolting Sequence Pattern
TAN
MAINTENANCE: Continued... AND MAINTENANCE
PARTS LIST:
For the bill of materials and parts listing of each Butterfly Valve
model, please refer to the corresponding Engineering Specification
Sheet. For special or fabricated units, please refer to the certified Tel: (618) 9256 3588 Fax: (618) 9256 3622
engineering drawing for that unit.
Side View Front View

�
� ��
�
�
�
�
�
�
� ��
�
4
�
�
�
BFVIOM1009
�
�
� �
�
Figure 4: Illustrations of Butterfly Valve
PARTS LIST
No. Butterfly Valve
1 Stem
2 Bushing
3 Body
4 O-Ring
5 Seat
6 Pin
7 Disc
8 End Cap
9 Bolt
10 Key
11 Set Screw
I-TORK PDS PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
Installation & Operation Manual

(I-TORK PDS Series Pneumatic Actuator)
PDS-M0108/1010
74-6, Chun Ui-Dong, Won Mi-Gu, Bucheon, Kyoung Ki-Do, Korea
Tel : 82-2-855-1365, 66 Fax : 82-2-855-1367 E-mail : roy75@i-tork.com
Website: www.i-tork.com
I-Tork PDS Pneumatic Actuator

Installation and operating manual (PDS-M0108/1010)
1
Table of Contents
1. GENERAL
2. SCOTCH-YOKE PRINCIPLE & ADJUSTMENT
3. IMPORTANT SAFETY PROCEDURES

4. OPERATION
5. LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS
6. APPLICATION
7. INSTALLATION & PIPING
8. DISMANTLE & ASSEMBLY

9. PDS50~200 PART LIST
10. TROUBLE SHOOTING

2
Many thanks for purchasing our I-Tork PDS Pneumatic Actuator!

For safe and proper operation, please read this manual carefully before using it and save it for reference.
Important Notice: The contents in this manual are subject to change

without notice due to quality improvement.
1. General
I-Tork PDS series actuators are designed for rotary quarter turn valves and there are
PD (Double Acting) and PS (Single Acting-with Spring Pack).
I-Tork PDS series actuators can be used with a 4~8Kg/㎠ range of air supply pressure.
Standard air pressure is 5.5Kg/㎠.
PD : Pmax 8 bar (116 psi)
PS : Pmax 7 bar (110 psi)
ISO Mounting Design:

ISO 5211 for valve flange or mounting bracket.
VDE 3845 (Namur) for solenoid valve.
Operating Medium:
Filtered inert gas or air must be used, and exhaust air must be passed through silencer
before being vented into the atmosphere. The dew point shall be equal to -20 °C or at
least, 10 °C below the ambient temperature (ISO8573 Part1, Class 3). The maximum
particle size shall not exceed 40 μm (ISO8573 Part1, Class 5). Max Pressure shall be
0.8 Mpa (8 bar) and the minimum design pressure for pressurized parts shall be 1.5
times the maximum operating pressure.

3
2. Scotch Yoke Principle & Adjustment;
I-Tork Actuators uses a Scotch Yoke assembly with angled slots.

This allows for a more compact design when compared to Rack & Pinion actuators.
Scotch-Yoke technology is known as the most suitable actuator mechanism for valve
and damper applications, as it produces higher torque at both ends (open and close)
positions compare to Rack and Pinion, which has a constant output torque. The
standard operation ambient temperature range is -20 ~ + 80 ℃.
Single Acting actuators have the pistons rotated 180° for a fail close position; this
means any adjustment will take place in the open position. If the SR actuator is set to
the ‘Fail Open’ position, then the adjustment will take place in the closed position. The
adjustment angle for both is ±3° by Adjusting Screws.
The adjustment is done by loosening the Adjusting Screws, and I-Tork PDS have 2
Adjusting Screws for open and close positions.

4
3. Important Safety Procedures
Caution: Always disconnect the Air and Electrical supplies before carrying out
any form of maintenance on an Actuator.
Caution: When removing any ball valve or plug valve assemblies from a pipe
system, isolate the piping system on which the Actuator is installed and relieve
any media pressure that may be trapped in the valve cavities before removing
the Actuator for maintenance.
Never use ‘Blow Out’ the Pistons or the End Caps from the Actuator Body.
Never turn the adjusting screws completely out when the actuator is under
pressure.

5
4. Operation
Figure 1 : PD (Double Acting)
Close Open
When air is supplied to the left port, the actuator will move to the Close position.
When air is supplied to the right port, the actuator will move to the Open Position.
Figure 2 : PS (Single Acting) Fail Close Position
Open Close (fail Position)

When air is supplied to the left port, the actuator will move to the Open Position.
When the air supply fails, the actuator will move to the fail position (Close).
Figure 2 : PS (Single Acting) Fail Open Position
Close Open (fail position)

When air is supplied to the left port, the actuator will move to the Close position.
When the air supply fails, the actuator will move to the fail position (Open).

6
5. Lubrication Requirements:
I-Tork PDS generally do not require lubrication, however, oil mist lubrication is
recommended for actuator which has performed more than 100,000 operation cycles.
Recommended Lubrication Grease:
Parts Actuator Version Grease

Cylinder Bore, Shaft Standard & High Dark Brown Grease
Sealings Temperature ALVANIA RL2/DC111
Cylinder Bore, Shaft Low Temperature White Grease DC 111
Sealings (DOWCORNING)
6. Application
All quarter turn type valves and equipment as follows

1) Ball Valve(2 way, 3 way, 4 way), Screw end and flanged
2) Butterfly Valve
3) Plug Valve
4) Damper
5) etc

7
7. Installation and Piping
1) Selection of actuator
Determine the appropriate torques and strokes taking into consideration the
following parameters and questions.
- Valve Question
- Valve: type, size, function and operation characteristics
Operating Conditions: Media, Temperature, Pressure, Flow rate, Frequency of
operation and required stroking time.
Valve Torque Characteristics (seating/unseating, dynamic torque <when
applicable>)
Maximum Allowable Stem Torque Limitation
- Actuator Question
Air Supply Pressure : Minimum and Maximum
Operation: On/off or Control
Acting: Double or Single (Fail Position open or close)
Frequency of operation
- Ancillary Question
Limit Switches: Type, Voltage, etc.
Positioners: Pneumatic or Electro-Pneumatic
Position Transmitters: Local Electrical Regulations
Solenoid Valve: Type, Voltage, etc.
- Environmental Conditions
Indoor, outdoor, saline, corrosive chemicals, etc.
Enclosure Protection type
Hazardous or non-Hazardous areas
Ambient Temperature

8
2) Installation and Mounting on the Valve
I-Tork PDS can be mounted in any position, ie: Vertical or Horizontal.

It is very important that the actuator shaft and the valve stem are centered and
must have a 0.5 ~ 1 mm gap between the actuator shaft and the valve shaft (or
driving bush) depending on the actuator size. If the valve stem is too high, it may
force the actuator shaft upward thus displacing the shaft seal. This would cause air
leakage at the shaft seal.
Please note that the actuator has a hexagonal drive shaft.
Do not mount the actuator at a 45˚ angle.
All the mounting dimensions of PDS series follows international standard and as
follows.
Top mounting hole : VDI/VDE3845
Top end of shaft : NAMUR for installation of Limit Switch Box or Positioner.
Bottom Mounting Hole: ISO5211
Bottom End of Shaft: Double Square for Easy Mounting (ISO5211)
3) Piping (Air Tubing)
All I-Tork PDS actuators can be piped with solid or flexible tubing with the solenoid
valve mounted remotely from the actuator or by mounting a NAMUR designed solenoid
valve directly onto the NAMUR mounting pad on the side of the actuator.
- Precaution
Please check the environmental conditions (Temperature, Pressure,
Characteristics of fluid, Piping standard) before piping.
If air tubing connection is not properly fitted, it may cause lower torque,
shorten the life cycle of actuator. Connection of actuator is PT 1/4” for PDS
40~200.
- Solenoid valve
Be sure that the solenoid valve’s connection type is compatible to the
actuator’s.

9
- Operating
To operate the actuator, supply a clean and dry air through a filter regulator
(this is strongly recommended)
Power up the solenoid valve.
The actuator should operate.
4) Storage
I-Tork PDS actuator’s body is made of Hard-Anodized aluminum both inside and
outside for protection against corrosion.
Store in a dry area and care to be taken when stacking the actuators.
Do not remove the air holes plugs until the actuator is ready for installation.
5) Manual Operation:
When operating the actuator manually, be sure that all compressed air is fully
vented before carrying out the manual operation.
6) Adjusting Screw Adjustment
For Open Position

1. Operate Valve/Actuator assembly to the open position.
2. Remove Air supply
3. Loosen the lock nut on the adjusting screw
4. Turn the “Close” adjusting screw clockwise to reduce or counter clockwise to
increase the travel.
5. Tighten the lock nut.
6. Connect air and check if the position is correct. (If not, repeat from 2)
For Close Position
7. Operate Valve/Actuator assembly to the close position.
8. Remove Air supply
9. Loosen the lock nut on the adjusting screw
10. Turn the “Open” adjusting screw clockwise to reduce or counter clockwise to
increase the travel.
11. Tighten the lock nut.
12. Connect air supply and check if the position is correct. (If not, repeat from 8)

10
8. Dismantle and Assembly

(For Replacing O-ring and other parts.)
PD series (Double Acting)
Dismantling
Caution: Vent all compressed air from the actuator and disconnect all electric
power before dismantling.
1) Loosen the adjusting screws (23).

2) Loosen both end cover bolts (26) using Hexagonal Wrench and dismantle.
3) Using the spanner, rotate the stem more than 90° until pistons are released
automatically and pull out the pistons (3).
4) Loosen the Set Screw (27) of Scotch - Yoke (5).
5) Take the Snap Ring (21)/Washer (12)/Thrust Washer (11) out from the top of
shaft.
6) Separate the shaft (4) from the body.
7) Replace the part.
8) For Assembly: Do the Reverse.
PS series (Single Acting)
Dismantling
Caution: Vent all compressed air from the actuator and disconnect all electric
power before dismantling.
1) Loosen the adjusting screws (23).

2) Using hexagonal wrench, loosen 2 bolts (26) in a diagonal position on both end
covers.
Then loosen the other 2 bolts in a diagonal position on both end covers slowly.
(Ensure spring pack pressure is released before removing bolts fully, if unsure,
then remove 2 diagonal bolts only and insert longer bolts until spring pressure is
released)
3) Take out the cover (28) and spring pack (22/29/30/31/32/33).
4) Using the spanner, rotate the stem more than 90° until pistons are released

11
automatically and pull out the pistons (3).

5) Loosen the Set Screw (27) of Scotch - Yoke (5).
6) Take the Snap Ring (21)/Washer (12)/Thrust Washer (11) out from the top of
shaft.
7) Separate the shaft (4) from the body.
8) Replace the part.
9) For Assembly: Do the Reverse.
Converting PD to PS Actuators:
All I-Tork PD (Double Acting) actuators can be converted to PS (Single Acting)

actuators by adding a spring pack as follows.
Caution: Vent all compressed air from the actuator and disconnect all
electrical power before dismantling.
If ‘Fail Open’ position is required:
All parts are the same except for the addition of the spring pack; just the PD cover
needs to be replaced with the appropriate PS spring pack.
If ‘Fail Closed’ position is required:
1. Loosen the Adjusting Screws (23) from the body.

2. Disassemble the End Covers (2).
3. Disassemble the Pistons (3) according to PD disassembly.
4. Rotate the Pistons (3) and Yoke (5) 180°; then assemble the pistons to the body.
5. Mount Spring Pack to the body when the pistons (3) are in their inner most
position.

12
Disassembling of Spring Pack:

For safe disassembling of the spring packs, the following procedure must be carried
out.
1. Disconnect all air and electrical supplies.

2. Springs must not be in the compress position (that is, the springs must be at
fully extended position).
3. Loosen the bolts (26) of the end cover separate Spring Pack from the body.
Spring Packs
Pretension Bolt(33)/Spring Washer(32)/Plain Washer(31)/Spring Retainer(30)
Spring(29)/O-Ring(22)/Spring Cover(28)/Bolt(26)
From PS 40 to PS100 (Single Spring per pack)
There are 2 Spring Options:

One is for 4.2 bar pressure;
The other is for 5.5 bar pressure.
From PS 125 to PS200 (Double Springs per pack)
There are 2 Spring Options:

One is for 4.2 bar pressure.
The other is for 5.5 bar pressure.
<Remark> When placing order PS Single Acting type Pneumatic Actuator,

please specify the Spring Option (4.2 bar or 5.5 bar).

13
9. PDS50~200 PART LIST

Part List No Material Part List No Material Part List No Material
1. Cylinder Aluminum 12.Washer-Shaft Steel 23. Adjust screw Steel
2. Cover Aluminum 13. Roller Pin Steel 24. NUT Stainless Steel
3. Piston Aluminum 14. Roller Steel 25. Washer-Stopper Stainless Steel
4. Shaft Steel 15. Piston Guide – POM 26. HEX. Head Stainless Steel
Shaft Pad Socket Bolt
5. Scotch yoke Steel 16. Support Band PTFE 27. Set Screw Stainless Steel
6. Stopper Steel 17. O-Ring - NBR 28. Spring Aluminum
Piston Return Cover
7. Shaft Wearing POM 18. O-Ring – NBR 29. Spring Spring Steel
Shaft, lower
8. Support Ring POM 19. O-Ring – NBR 30. Spring Steel
- Lower Shaft - upper Retainer
9. Support Ring POM 20. O-Ring - NBR 31. Plane Steel
- Middle Stopper Washer
10. Support Ring POM 21. Snap Ring Stainless Steel 32. Spring Steel
- Upper Washer
11. Thrust Washer POM 22. O-Ring- Cover Stainless Steel 33. Pretension bolt Steel

14
10. TROUBLE SHOOTING
Status Possible Reason Recommended action

Check the incoming voltage
Electric power line fails
or power line
Check voltage of solenoid Coil
Actuator doesn’t If coil is OK, check operation
Trouble in solenoid valve
work at all of spool valve by using
manual button
Blockage or leak in air
Check air supply line
supply line
Air pressure is too low Increase supply air pressure
Blockage in air inlet/outlet Take out foreign material in

lines by foreign material the line
Speed controller is locked Open speed controller

Actuator is working,
but not smoothly Air leakage through piston
Replace the piston ring
ring
1) Increase air supply
Actual valve torque is too pressure
high 2) Replace with a larger
actuator
Stopper setting is wrong Set stopper again
Valve doesn’t open Actual valve torque is too

Replace with a larger actuator
or close fully higher than specification.
Piston or cover bushing o-

Air leakage Replace O-rings
ring worn out

15
ITS position monitoring switch
Installation and operating manual
(ITS-M0101/0903)
3F, 371-36, Gasan-dong, Geumchun-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel : 82-2-855-1365, 66 Fax : 82-2-855-1367 E-mail : we123@unitel.co.kr
Position monitoring switch ITS100 series

Installation and operating manual (ITS-M0101/0903)
ITS position monitoring switch
Note : These instruction are divided by several sectors, and please make sure to carefully read all the matter and follow the procedure
Description
ITS position monitoring switch is used for the valve and actuators which rotates 90degree quarter turn.
The first function of ITS is to provide visual indication of current position of valve and actuator. Dome
indicator unit shows current position by color indication. If there is full red color indication, current
position of valve or actuator is fully closed position, and yellow is on fully open position. Different Color
indication combination can be provided by customer’s specific requirement
Secondly ITS provide electrical signal at the fully open or closed position by activating mechanical
switches (SPDT , SPST), Proximity sensors and other magnetic sensors which independently makes
function. Switches vary in a wide range and construction to meet customer’s requirement.
Standard ITS100
ITS has function direction tree installation on valve different, and generally no need to adjust position of the internal cams to activate the switches as long as 0 at
close and 90 at open because of adjustable cam. If it is required, customer can adjust it easily with finger or hand watching it’s movement. Red is for close position
and Yellow is for open position..
Enclosure is designed to protect inside as IP67 and no restriction to install for any place except for the hazardous area.
Installation
Please check the switch type and rating on the name plate on ITS enclosure, and be careful not to electrically exceed the switch rating.
All installation and maintenance should be done by authorized personnel only
Caution : In order to avoid unexpected accident, serious injury and property damage, make sure to cut all power supply to the actuator and valve before inspection,
maintenance and repair , Ambient temperature : -30oC ~~+80oC
Direction and positioning of installation: No limitation excluding hazardous area
Mounting
Proper size of Mounting bracket is required for mounting ITS on valve or actuator. Standard Mounting
bracket is provided together with ITS, but in case of special making by customer for special
application, please refer to the drawing in right hand-side. The most important thing in mounting is to
align the shaft of valve (or actuator) and ITS’ shaft. ITS’s shaft is done according to NAMUR
standard, so that it may suitable for various application without further modification.
Below drawings are the standard mounting bracket to be provided together with ITS100 as free of
charge
100 100
80 80
45 45
4-6
20x30 H=20 20x30 H=30

R2
10 10
R2
0 0
Ø3 Ø3
R2
R2
60 60
4-6.5 4 -Ø6.5
65 65

Electrical wiring
Electrical wring must be done in according to the specification of international standard or local specific regulation.
ITS100 provides two 1/2” NPT conduit for the wiring and by using proper Coupling, secure the tight sealing.
Wiring of mechanical switch

After loosing 4 screws, open upper cover. MECHANICAL SWITCHES
Standard ITS100 has 8 terminal strips. OPEN
SOLENOID
SWITCH VALVE
NO
Strip no 1~6 are for wiring of mechanical switch contacts for position
C
NO NC
detecting and, 7, 8 are for power for solenoid valve when required.
C
Recommended thickness of wire is up to 15mmfor signal, NC
CLOSE
SWITCH GROUND
By loosing screw in terminal by screw driver, and insert the wire inside of
MECHANICAL SWITCHS
terminal strip and tight the screw again. NO
OPEN
SWITCH C
Please refer to right hand-side wiring. NO NC
OPEN
Caution: Make sure to use electricity within the rating of SWITCH

NC
C
NO
CLOSE
mechanical switch. SWITCH
NC
C
NO
CLOSE
SWITCH C
NC
GROUND
Wiring for proximity sensors

Wiring is just same with that of mechanical switches, but PROXIMITY SENSORS (PNP)
OPEN SOLENOID
since operating type can be different depending on sensors SWITCH
VALVE
BN
BK +
type, so must follow the provided wiring method. BU LOAD
-
BN +
(Right hand-side wiring is the sample of 3 wire type BK LOAD
BU -
Proximity sensors) CLOSE
SWITCH GROUND
Indicator setting
By operating actuator or valve, check if indicator shows correct position of actuator
or valve or not.
Generally indicator is set at 0O and 90o in the factory before delivery, but it would be
better set the indicator after installation ITS on actuator or valve before operating.
If indicator is not well aligned, loosing 4 bolts on cover, and adjust the position of
transparent cover by hand, and tight the 4 bolts again(Refer to right hand-side
picture)

Setting cams and switches
Setting switch and cam can be simply done by using resistance of Multi-meter, Buzzer, or lamps.
Taking off the upper cover from lower body and putting the valve or actuator on correct position,
and adjust the cam by finger checking the resistance or lamp.
Locate the cam on the position which resistance is detected or lamp is on.
If to set another switches, repeat above procedure.
Before wiring, must cut off all power coming to the switch box.
Maintenance and repair

Regular operating of actuator or valve is required to check ITS makes function properly. make sure not to give any harmful action to other equipment or machine
Checking proper work
1. Check power connecting line coming into ITS
2. Check power rating(voltage, ampere or etc) is proper.
3. Check Indicator shows correct position or not(refer to setting indicator)
4. Check Electrical position indication is correct or not.(refer to setting switch and cam )

ITS 100 PART LIST
SZM-V16
23 LIMITS SWITCH 2 -2FA-61
22 O-RING 1 G55
LMTS102-2
21 TURMINA L BLOC K 1 05A12H6mm
20 O-RING 1 S95
19 O-RING 1 P06
18 E-RING 2 #8
17 SPRING PIN 2 ?x14

16 BOLT 2 M3x30
15 BOLT 4 M6x8
14 BOLT 4 M4x5
13 CAPTIVE COVER BO LT 4 M5x20
12 BRACKET SUS304 1
11 SUPPO RT ABS 1
13
10 CAM INNER P.C. 1
9 CAM OUTER P.C. 2
8 SPACE ABS 1
7 SPRING SWP-A 2
14
6 SHAFT SUS304 1
5 COVER INDIC ATOR P.C. 1
4 INDIC ATOR ABS 1 5
3 COVER AL20 1
2 BUSH BC20 1
1 BODY AL20 1 4
NO. NAME OF PARTS MATERIAL S Q'TY REMARKS
22
8 3
7 16
9
11
10
23
6 21
17 20
2
18
19 12
15

Appendix 04 – Information pressure switch
Page 25 of 31
Pressure and vacuum switches PEV/VPEV
Product range overview
Function Design Type Operating pressure Pneumatic Electrical Max. switching è Page/
connection connection output voltage Internet
[bar] [V DC] [V AC]
Mechanical Mounting via screws
pressure switches PEV 1 … 12 G¼ Plug, type A1) 125 250 3
PEV 1 … 12 G¼ Plug, type A 125 250 3
PEV 1 … 12 G¼ Plug, type A 125 250 3

Visual scale
for pressure
adjustment
PEV 1 … 12 G¼ Plug M12x1, 4-pin 48 48 3
H-rail mounting
PEV-W 0…8 M5 Plug M8x1, 4-pin 30 – 10
PEV-W 0…8 M5 Screw terminal, 30 – 10

4-pin
Mounting via screw-in thread
PEV-SW27 1 … 10 G¼ For plug socket 250 250 14
PEV-¼-A-WD
PEV-SW27 1 … 10 G¼ For plug socket 250 250 14

PEV-¼-WD-LED-…
Mechanical Mounting via screws

vacuum switches VPEV –1 … +1.6 Gx Plug, type A1) 125 250 3
VPEV –1 … +1.6 Gx Plug M12x1, 4-pin 48 48 3
H-rail mounting
VPEV-W –1 … 0 M5 Plug M8x1, 4-pin 30 – 10
VPEV-W –1 … 0 M5 Screw terminal, 30 – 10

4-pin
1) Plug socket included in scope of delivery
2 è Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2016/05

Pressure and vacuum switches PEV/VPEV, with through-holes
Peripherals overview
PEV VPEV
1 -H- Note
The vacuum switch VPEV is used as
a pressure switch by repositioning
the blanking screw supplied from
2 the pressure supply port to the
vacuum port.
3
3
7
5
Mounting attachments and accessories è Page/Internet Mounting attachments and accessories è Page/Internet
1 Angled plug socket with switching status display 17 4 Mounting frame 20
PEV NRRQ
Plug socket without switching status display 21 5 Push-in fitting qs
MSSD QS
2 Connecting cable 21 6 Quick connector ck
NEBU-M12 CK-x, LCK-x
3 Mounting plate 19 7 Blanking screw –
APL VPEV-x (included in scope of delivery of VPEV)
2016/05 – Subject to change è Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 3

Type codes
PEV — ¼ — B — — — OD
Type
PEV Pressure switch
VPEV Vacuum switch
Pneumatic connection
x Gx
¼ G¼
Generation
B B series
Electrical connection
– Plug, type A, rectangular design,
to EN 175301-803
M12 Plug M12x1, 4-pin, round design,
to EN 60947-5-2
Setting options
SC Scale for pressure adjustment
Plug socket
– Included in the scope of delivery
OD Not included in the scope of delivery

Technical data
Function
PEV/VPEV
PEV/VPEV-…-M12
General technical data

Type PEV-¼-B(-OD) PEV-¼-SC-OD PEV-¼-B-M12 VPEV-x VPEV-x-M12
General
Conforms to standard EN 60947-5-1
Approval – – cULus recognized – cULus recognized
(OL) (OL)
CCC
CE marking (see declaration of conformity) To EU Low Voltage Directive
Note on materials RoHS-compliant
Input signal/measuring element

Measured variable Relative pressure
Method of measurement Pneumatic/electric pressure transducer
– With setting scale – – –
Pressure measuring range [bar] – –1 … +1.6
Operating pressure [bar] 1 … 12 –1 … +1.6
Operating medium Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:–:–] Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:4:4]
Water –
Note about the operating/pilot medium Lubricated operation possible (required during subsequent operation)
Temperature of medium [°C] –20 … +80
Ambient temperature [°C] –20 … +80

Technical data
Electrical data
Switching output
Switching element function Changeover switch
Max. switching frequency [Hz] 3
Max. switching output voltage [V AC] 250 48 250 48
[V DC] 125 48 125 48
Max. output current [mA] 5,000 4,000 5,000 4,000
Minimum load current [mA] 1 (at 24 V)
[mA] 10 (at 10 V)
[mA] 100 (at 5 V)
Electronic components
Utilisation category for inductive load AC-14
DC-13
Utilisation category for ohmic load AC-12
DC-12
Electromechanical components
Electrical connection Plug, type A, rectangular design, Plug M12x1, 4-pin, Plug, type A, Plug M12x1, 4-pin,
to EN 175301-803 round design, rectangular design, round design,
to EN 60947-5-2 to EN 175301-803 to EN 60947-5-2
Pin allocation
Plug, type A Pin Meaning Plug M12x1, 4-pin Pin Meaning
1 Operating voltage 1 Operating voltage
2 N/C contact 2 N/C contact
3 N/O contact 3 Unused
4 Earthing 4 N/O contact
Mechanical components
Type of mounting Via through-hole
Mounting position Any
Pneumatic connection G¼ Gx
Product weight [g] 194 144 194 240 194
Housing material information Die-cast aluminium
Switch contact material information Silver
Display/operation
Switching output
Threshold value setting range [bar] 1 … 12 –0.95 … –0.2
Threshold value setting range after [bar] – 0.16 … 1.6
conversion
Immissions/emissions
Storage temperature [°C] –20 … +80
Protection IP65
Corrosion resistance class CRC1) 2
1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070

Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo
sphere typical for industrial applications.

Technical data
Dimensions – Pressure switches Download CAD data è www.festo.com

PEV-¼-B PEV-¼-B-OD
1 Switching point adjusting PEV-¼-B: PEV-¼-B-OD:

screw 4 Push-in connector M16x1.5 to 4 Push-in connector suitable for
2 Hex nut for adjustment of hys EN 175301-803-A, choice of plug socket M16x1.5 to
teresis (under protective cover) cable outlet by turning socket EN 175301-803-A
3 Protective cover inset 4x90°
Type B1 B2 D1 D2 D3 H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 ß1
_0.2 _0.1  _0.6 _0.5 _0.2
_0.2
PEV-¼-B 56 78
30 20 G¼ 5.2 min. 5 77.3 18.5 1 11
PEV-¼-B-OD 40 56
Dimensions – Pressure switch Download CAD data è www.festo.com

PEV-¼-SC-OD
1 Switching point adjusting

screw
2 Hex nut for adjustment of hys
teresis (under protective cover)
3 Protective cover
4 Push-in connector suitable for
plug socket M16x1.5 to
EN 175301-803-A
5 Scale for reading off the set
switching pressure
Type B1 B2 D1 D2 D3 H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 ß1
_0.2 _0.1  _0.6 _0.5 _0.2
_0.2
PEV-¼-SC-OD 30 20 G¼ 5.2 min. 5 77.3 40 18.5 56 1 11

Technical data
Dimensions – Pressure switch Download CAD data è www.festo.com

PEV-¼-B-M12
1 Switching point adjusting

screw
2 Hex nut for adjustment of hys
teresis (under protective cover)
3 Protective cover
4 Connection arrangement for
plug connector M12x1 to
EN 60947-5-2
Type B1 B2 B3 D1 D2 D3 H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 ß1
_0.2 _0.1  _0.6 _0.5 _0.2
_0.2
PEV-¼-B-M12 30 20 12.5 G¼ 5.2 min. 5 77.3 40 18.5 55.4 1 11
Dimensions – Vacuum switch Download CAD data è www.festo.com

VPEV-x VPEV-x-M12
1 Switching point adjusting 4 Vacuum port VPEV-x: VPEV-x-M12:

screw 5 Supply port with blanking 6 Push-in connector M16x1.5 to 6 Connection arrangement for
2 Hex nut for adjustment of hys screw EN 175301-803-A, choice of plug connectors to
teresis (under protective cover) cable outlet by turning socket EN 60947-5-2
3 Protective cover inset 4x90°
Type B1 B2 B3 D1 D2 D3 D4 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 L1 L2 L3 ß1
_0.2 _0.1 –0.1  _0.1 _0.2
_0.2
VPEV-x – – 98 48 91 78 –
30 20 Gx 5.2 min. 5 32 5.5 18.5 1 11
VPEV-x-M12 12.5 M12x1 91 – – 55.4 10

Technical data
Ordering data
Pneumatic connection Electrical connection Part No. Type
Pressure switch
G¼ Plug, type A, rectangular design, 10773 PEV-¼-B
to EN 175301-803
Plug socket included in scope of delivery
G¼ Plug, type A, rectangular 175250 PEV-¼-B-OD

design, to EN 175301-803
G¼ Plug, type A, rectangular design, 161760 PEV-¼-SC-OD

to EN 175301-803
G¼ Plug M12x1, 4-pin, round design, 192488 PEV-¼-B-M12

to EN 60947-5-2
Vacuum switch
Gx Plug, type A, rectangular design, 150261 VPEV-x
to EN 175301-803
Plug socket included in scope of delivery
Gx Plug M12x1, 4-pin, round design, 192489 VPEV-x-M12

to EN 60947-5-2

Pressure and vacuum switches PEV-W/VPEV-W, H-rail mounting
Peripherals overview and type codes
Mounting attachments and accessories è Page/Internet
1 Connecting cable 21
NEBU-M8
1
3 2 Push-in fitting qsm
QSM-M5
3 Mounting latch 21
4
PENV
4 Mounting rail 21
NRH, to EN 60715
5 Mounting rail 21
NRC, to EN 50035
Type codes
PEV-W — KL — LED — GH
Type
PEV-W Pressure switch
VPEV-W Vacuum switch
S Plug M8x1, 4-pin
KL Screw terminal, 4-pin
Switching status display

LED Yellow LED
Type of mounting
GH Via H-rail or through-hole

Technical data
Function

Type PEV-W VPEV-W
General
Approval RCM Mark
CE marking (see declaration of conformity) To EU EMC Directive1)
Note on materials Contains PWIS (paint-wetting impairment substances)
RoHS-compliant

Pressure measuring range [bar] 2…8 –0.8 … –0.2
Operating pressure [bar] 0…8 –1 … 0
Operating medium Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:–:–]
Temperature of medium [°C] 0 … +60
Ambient temperature [°C] 0 … +60
1) For information about the applicability of the component see the manufacturer’s EC declaration of conformity at: www.festo.com/sp è Certificates.
If the component is subject to restrictions on usage in residential, office or commercial environments or small businesses, further measures to reduce the emitted interference may be necessary.
The condition for this is a length of the signal cable  30 m.
Electrical data
Type PEV-W-S PEV-W-KL VPEV-W-S VPEV-W-KL
Switching output
Max. output current [mA] 2,500
Operating voltage range [V DC] 10 … 30
Electrical connection Plug M8x1, 4-pin Screw terminal, 4-pin Plug M8x1, 4-pin Screw terminal, 4-pin
Pin allocation
Plug M8x1, 4-pin Pin Meaning Screw terminal, 4-pin Pin Meaning
1 + (–) 1 + (–)
3 – (+) 3 – (+)
4 N/O contact 4 N/O contact

Technical data
Via H-rail
Pneumatic connection M5
Product weight [g] 56
Housing material information PA, PET, POM
Display/operation
Type PEV-W VPEV-W
Switching output
Switching status display Yellow LED
Threshold value setting range [bar] 1.5 … 8 –0.8 … –0.2
Hysteresis setting range [bar] 0.5 … 2 0.08 … 0.2
Type PEV-W-S PEV-W-KL VPEV-W-S VPEV-W-KL
Storage temperature [°C] –20 … +80
Protection IP65 IP20 IP65 IP20
Corrosion resistance class CRC1) 2
1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070

Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo
sphere typical for industrial applications.
Dimensions Download CAD data è www.festo.com

PEV-W-S/VPEV-W-S PEV-W-KL/VPEV-W-KL
1 Slot for inscription label 3 Clamping foot for G/H rail 5 Switching point adjusting 7 Integral plug, fits plug sockets
2 Foot mounting (included in 4 Switching status display, screw to NEBU
scope of delivery) yellow 6 Manual override 8 Cable terminals
Type B1 B2 B3 D1 D2 D3 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7

PEV-W-S/VPEV-W-S 73.4 7.4 9.3
18 8.8 3 M5 3.2 3.4 66 60 54 2.6 42 34.7 18.4 12 15.8 7.9
PEV-W-KL/VPEV-W-KL 72 – –

Technical data
Ordering data
Pressure switch
M5 Plug M8x1, 4-pin 152616 PEV-W-S-LED-GH
Screw terminal, 4-pin 152618 PEV-W-KL-LED-GH
Vacuum switch
M5 Plug M8x1, 4-pin 152617 VPEV-W-S-LED-GH
Screw terminal, 4-pin 152619 VPEV-W-KL-LED-GH

Pressure switches PEV-SW27, screw-in
Peripherals overview and type codes
Accessories è Page/Internet
1 2
1 Angled socket 18
PEV-¼-A-WD
2 Angled socket 17
PEV-¼-WD-LED-…
Type codes
PEV — ¼ — A — SW27 —
Type
PEV Pressure switch
Pneumatic connection
¼ G¼
Generation
A A series
Width across flats

SW27 27 mm
– For angled plug socket PEV-¼-A-WD
B-OD For angled plug socket PEV-¼-WD-LED-…

Technical data
Function

General
CE marking (see declaration of conformity) To EU Low Voltage Directive

Pressure measuring range [bar] 1 … 10
Operating pressure [bar] 1 … 10
Operating medium Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:–:–]
Temperature of medium [°C] –20 … +80
Electrical data
Switching output
Max. switching output voltage [V AC] 250
[V DC] 250
Max. output current [mA] 4,000
Operating voltage range [V DC] 12 … 250
Electrical connection Plug, 4-pin
Pin allocation
PEV-¼-A-SW27 Pin Meaning PEV-¼-A-SW27-B-OD Pin Meaning
1 Switchable voltage 1 Switchable voltage
4 N/O contact 4 N/O contact
Type of mounting Screw-in
Pneumatic connection G¼
Product weight [g] 90
Housing material information Galvanised steel

Technical data
Display/operation
Switching output
Threshold value setting range [bar] 1 … 10
Protection IP65

PEV-¼-A-SW27 PEV-¼-A-SW27-B-OD
1 Max. tightening torque 50 Nm

1 Max. tightening torque 50 Nm 2 Integral plug connector to
2 Integral plug connector to EN 175201-803
DIN 46244 3 Switching-point adjustment
Type B1 D1 D2 D3 H1 H2 H3 H4 ß1
  –0.2
PEV-¼-A-SW27 – 30 26 58 2 1.3
G¼ 8 27
PEV-¼-A-SW27-B-OD 30 34 – 74 – –
Ordering data
Pressure switch
G¼ For angled plug socket PEV-¼-A-WD 159259 PEV-¼-A-SW27
G¼ For angled plug socket PEV-¼-WD-LED-… 175252 PEV-¼-A-SW27-B-OD

Accessories
Angled socket PEV-¼-WD-LED-…

for pressure switch PEV-¼-B-OD,
PEV-¼-SC-OD and
PEV-¼-A-SW27-B-OD
With integrated LED for switching

status indication

Type PEV-¼-WD-LED-24 PEV-¼-WD-LED-230
CE marking (see declaration of conformity) To EU EMC Directive
– To EU Low Voltage Directive
Certification RCM trademark
Electronic components
Type PEV-¼-WD-LED-24 PEV-¼-WD-LED-230
Operating voltage range [V AC] – 0 … 230
[V DC] 15 … 30 0 … 180
Electrical connection Angled socket, 4-pin
Acceptable current load [A] 8
Housing material information PA
Display/operation
Ready status display Green LED
Switching status display Yellow LED
Protection IP65
1 Inserts can be rotated 90°
Dimensions and ordering data

Type B1 B2 D1 D2 D3 H1 H2 L1 L2 L3 Weight Part No. Type
 [g]
PEV-…-24 34 164274 PEV-¼-WD-LED-24
30 27.5 M3 22.5 Pg11 53 43 34.2 5.5 1.5
PEV-…-230 34 164275 PEV-¼-WD-LED-230

Accessories
Angled plug socket PEV-¼-A-WD

for pressure switch PEV-¼-A-SW27

Electrical connection Angled socket, 4-pin
Housing material information PA
Protection IP65

D1 D2 D3 H1 L1 Weight Part No. Type
  [g]
34 30 Pg9 44 51 55 161209 PEV-¼-A-WD

Accessories
Mounting plate APL

for pressure switch PEV and vacuum
switch VPEV

for pressure switch PEV for vacuum switch VPEV

B1 B2 B3 D1 D2 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 L1
For PEV 87.3

27 16 4.4 4.4 M4 10 7.7 5 2 88.5
For VPEV 101
L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 Weight Part No. Type

[g]
For PEV 82 – 18 9349 APL-2N-PEV
80.8 74 75 24 2.3
For VPEV 81 22 18 150218 APL-2N-VPEV

Accessories
Mounting frame NRRQ Scope of delivery:

Mounting frame NRW 2 x Connecting piece NRV-2N
2 x Profile rail NRQ-8-480
4 x Mounting bracket NRW-12/3
4 x Bolt NRB-12/60
4 x Socket head screw
DIN 84-M6X18-4.8
DIN 84-M6X12-4.8
4 x Mounting bracket NRW-9/1,5-B
DIN 84-M4X10-4.8
Dimensions – Mounting frame NRRQ Download CAD data è www.festo.com
1 Connecting piece NRV-2N

2 Profile rail NRQ-8-480
3 Mounting bracket NRW-12/3
4 Bolt NRB-12/60
5 Socket head screw
DIN 84-M6X12-4.8
6 Socket head screw
DIN 84-M6X18-4.8
B1 B2 D1 D2 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6

480 12 12 M6 60 15.5 14 8 2.4 1.2 6.2 97 88.6 88.2 44.5 16 8

Part No. Type
Mounting frame complete for 16 elements 9365 NRRQ-2N
Mounting bracket for mounting sub-bases to the frame 11571 NRW-9/1,5-B

Accessories
Ordering data – Plug socket MSSD Technical data è Internet: mssd

Electrical connection Cable connector Part No. Type
Angled socket, 3-pin, type A Pg9 171157 MSSD-C-4P
Ordering data – Connecting cable NEBU-M8 Technical data è Internet: nebu

Electrical connection Number of wires Cable length Part No. Type
[m]
M8x1, straight socket 4 2.5 541342 NEBU-M8G4-K-2.5-LE4
5 541343 NEBU-M8G4-K-5-LE4
M8x1, angled socket 4 2.5 541344 NEBU-M8W4-K-2.5-LE4
5 541345 NEBU-M8W4-K-5-LE4
Ordering data – Connecting cable NEBU-M12 Technical data è Internet: nebu

Electrical connection Number of wires Cable length Part No. Type
[m]
M12x1, straight socket 4 2.5 550326 NEBU-M12G5-K-2.5-LE4
5 541328 NEBU-M12G5-K-5-LE4
M12x1, angled socket 4 2.5 550325 NEBU-M12W5-K-2.5-LE4
5 541329 NEBU-M12W5-K-5-LE4
Ordering data – Mounting rail NRC Technical data è Internet: nrc

Description Length Part No. Type
G-rail to EN 50035 2m 6756 NRC-32-2000
Ordering data – Mounting rail NRH Technical data è Internet: nrh

Description Length Part No. Type
H-rail to EN 60715 2m 35430 NRH-35-2000
Ordering data – Mounting latch PENV Technical data è Internet: penv

Description Part No. Type
For mounting on mounting rail 164597 PENV-BGH

Appendix 05 – Information pinch valves
Page 26 of 31
Assembly instruction for AKO pinch valve (flange type)
Series V+VF DN 100 to 250 mm
Control air Removing the old sleeve
*Flange (B) Body (A)
Loose bolts (C), take off flanges (B).
Pull out old sleeve (D) by using a pipe wrench.
If helpful, spread AKO mounting paste (MP200) between rubber and
internal body surface.
Clean all valve parts and inspect for wear.
Installation of the new sleeve

Screws (C) *Sleeve (D)
Picture 1
Spread following parts. with AKO mounting paste (MP200):
- inside and outside surfaces of sleeve (D), cones of flanges (B) and
inside surface of body (neck area).
Caution: Do not use any grease or oily paste!
Picture 2
Push sleeve (D) into body (A) until it is centred.
Picture 3
Assemble flange (B) onto body and fix it with 2 or 4 mounting bolts
(C), washer and nuts. Tighten them counter clockwise until flange
cone touches the sleeve.
Picture 4
Put opposite side of flange (B) into sleeve (D) and tighten second
bolt (C), washer and nut until it touches the sleeve.
Picture 5
Push mounting pipe into the valve (5/6 length of the sleeve).
Put 4 bar air through the air inlet to pressurize the sleeve.
Picture 6+7
Use a spanner and push the sleeve behind the cone from the flange
Picture 1 Picture 2 (B). Tighten mounting bolts from second flange (B) and assemble
completely with the remaining bolts (C). Bolts have to be tightened.
Release control air. Assemble counter flange as described in picture
5, 6+7. Again, release control air and remove mounting pipe. Make
sure that all mounting bolts have been replaced by assembling bolts
(C). Verify bolts are tight.
Picture 8
Put mounting wood into valve assembly, with the small part facing
to the air inlet.
Pressurise valve with 4 bar and keep the wood in stable position.
Sleeve must close in “lip-shape” position viewing to air inlet.
Alternatively assembly: Valve can be assembled under a mechanical
press.
Caution: Do not use any sharp tools during assembly, it may damaged
valve parts!
*Replacement-/ Maintenance parts: Sleeve (D) and flanges (B).
Assembly tool: AKO mounting set (i.e. W125) consists of mounting

Picture 3 paste, mounting pipe,mounting wood, assembling screws, nuts and
Picture 4
bolts. MAV003e - 01/2002
Picture 5 Picture 6 Picture 7 Picture 8
AKO Armaturen & Separations GmbH

D-65468 Trebur-Astheim • Adam-Opel-Str.5 • Telefon: +49(0)6147-9159-0 • Telefax: +49(0)6147-9159-59
e-Mail: ako@ako-armaturen.de • Internet: www.ako-armaturen.de
Pneumatische Quetschventile Serie VF
Air operated Pinch Valves of VF series
Quetschventile als Absperrarmatur Pinch Valves as shut-off Valves
Das pneumatische Quetschventil von AKO stellt Due to its simple structure, AKO's air operated pinch
durch seinen einfachen Aufbau eine besonders valve represents a particularly low cost/economic
kostengünstige/wirtschaftliche Absperrarmaturen- shut-off valve solution, because a separate drive is
lösung dar, da kein gesonderter Antrieb für die not required for actuating them.
Betätigung benötigt wird.
Lediglich ein 3/2-Wege Magnetventil oder Pilotventil In fact, only a 3/2-way solenoid valve or pilot valve is
wird benötigt, um es anzusteuern. needed to control them.
Quetschventile nach DGRL 97/23/EG Pinch Valves comply with PED (97/23/EC)
Werkstoffe / Materialien: Materials:

Gehäuse: Aluminium Body: Aluminum
Flansch: Aluminium Flange: Aluminum
Ventiloberfläche: Valve finish:

Pulverbeschichtet 60-80µm Weiß RAL9010 Powder coated 60-80µm white RAL9010
Pneumatische Quetschventile - Flanschanschluss
Air operated Pinch Valves - Flange Connection
D
1 2 3 4
GT
H G E Flanschausführungen / Flange variations:

ød
1 Aluminiumflansch
øT
K aluminum flange
2 Aluminiumflansch mit Stahl-/Edelstahlbuchse
aluminum flange with steel/ stainless steel bushing
øDA
øDF
øDI
DN
3 Aluminiumflansch mit Innengewinde

aluminum flange with internal thread
4 Aluminiumflansch mit Flanschmanschette**
aluminum flange with flange sleeve**
nB
Gewicht (kg) Volumen (l)* PS Innengewin- GT

DN ØDI ØDA ØDF Ød ØTK L G H E
nB*** Weight (kg) Volume (l)* max. de/Internal Tiefe/depth
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (inch) (mm) (mm) Alu-Flansche/flanges (ca. / approx) (bar) threat (mm)
40 40 150 88 4 18 110 155 G 1/4" 56 28 2,9 0,20 6 G 1½" 19

50 50 165 102 4 18 125 183 G 1/4" 65 30 3,7 0,30 6 G 2" 24
65 65 185 122 4 18 145 183 G 1/4" 81 28 4,3 0,45 6 G 2½" 22
80 80 200 138 8 18 160 228 G 1/4" 95 31 5,6 0,95 6 G 3" 22
100 100 220 158 8 18 180 280 G 1/4" 112 35 8,4 1,70 6 G 4" 20
125 118 250 184 8 18 210 348 G 1/4" 136 40 12,0 3,50 6 - -
150 145 285 212 8 22 240 418 G 1/4" 160 43 17,0 7,00 6 - -
200 190 340 268 8 22 295 558 G 3/8" 206 60 35,0 15,50 4 - -
250 250 395 320 12 22 350 680 G 1/2" 266 67 56,0 30,00 3 - -
300 300 445 370 12 22 400 820 G 1/2" 306 70 86,0 49,00 3 - -
* Volumen = Steuermediumsvolumen bei geschlossener Manschette / Volume = Control volume with closed sleeve
Flanschanschluss konform DIN PN 10. ANSI auf Anfrage / Flange connection pursuant to DIN PN 10. ANSI on request.
** Flanschmanschettendichtung vergrößert das Maß L (DN 40 - 100) / Flange sleeve sealing increases the Dimension L (DN 40 - 100)
*** Anzahl Bohrungen / Number of holes
Manschetten: Sleeves:
Naturgummi (NR) abriebfest, NR Lebensmittel, NR natural rubber (NR) anti-abrasive, NR food
hochtemp., EPDM, EPDM Lebensmittel schwarz, quality, NR high temp., EPDM, EPDM food black,
EPDM Lebensmittel hell, NBR, NBR Lebensmittel EPDM food pale, NBR, NBR food black, NBR food
schwarz, NBR Lebensmittel hell, FPM/FKM, Silikon, pale, FPM/FKM, silicone, CR, CSM, IIR
CR, CSM, IIR.
DB_pV_VF_DE+EN_2016-01-20
Quetschventilzubehör finden Sie in unserem Datenblatt Pinch Valve Accessories to be found on our data sheet
"Zubehör für Armaturen". "Pinch Valve Accessories".
Datenblatt / data sheet
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten. Technical details subject to change without notice.
AKO Armaturen & Separationstechnik GmbH

D-65468 Trebur-Astheim ▪ Adam-Opel-Str. 5 ▪ Telefon/Phone: +49 (0) 61 47-9159-0 ▪ Fax: +49 (0) 61 47-9159-59
E-Mail: ako@ako-armaturen.de ▪ Internet: www.ako-armaturen.de / www.pinch-valve.com 2
Operating instructions for AKO pinch valves
Type V, VF, VM, VMF and VMP
Important Information: Please ensure you read these operating instructions before each installation.
Faulty installation or incorrect commissioning can lead to damage in the plant or equipment and to personal injuries.
The firm AKO does not give any guarantee for damage resulting from improper handling or due to the use of third
party parts. Our V/VF/VM/VMF/VMP series valves are designed as defined by the Pressure Devices Directive
(EC Directive RL97/23/EC) for Group II fluids. Valves for use with Group I fluids can be produced on request. AKO does
not accept any responsibility for the resistance of the valve materials. If a pinch valve is intended for use in potentially
explosive Ex Zones 1 or 2, an AKO pinch valve must be used with an ATEX conformity (configuration upon request)
also observing the addition to the BAV002 operating instructions.
The functional principle of a pinch valve: A flexible elastomer hose (sleeve) is closed by applying pressure to the
valve housing with filtered and oil-free compressed air or water. A lip-shaped closing image results. Due to the
rebound elasticity of the sleeve and the pressure of the medium (above atmospheric pressure), a free cross-section is
guaranteed after opening. The sleeve movement during the closing process reduces the deposit of medium
sediments on the sleeve wall. Solids (up to a certain size) in the medium are locked in when the sleeve closes, thus
assuring that the valve remains sealed. However, if the solids are primarily coarse the sleeve no longer closes gas tight.
Thanks to its innovative technology, the AKO pinch valve is extremely low-maintenance and thus an inexpensive
valve.
Technical operating data: The maximum operating pressure (pressure of the medium) is between 2,5 and 6 bar. This
pressure depends on the diameter and the valve type (see datasheet).
The control pressure (closing pressure) of the valve must be 2 bar above the operating pressure. Attention: this
recommendation refers to natural rubber sleeves. A use of other sleeve materials will slightly cause some differences.
A higher control pressure reduces the lifetime of the sleeve (Attention max. control pressure). We therefore
recommend that you install a pressure/filter controller between the air supply and the valve's control air connection.
Selection of the materials for the individual valve parts: Selection of the correct materials is dependent on several
factors, such as for example: medium properties (pressure, temperature, etc.), ambient criteria (temperature, the
effects of weather, etc.) and customer/ application specifications. Our Sleeve Qualities overview and the competent
advice provided by AKO will help you to select the correct sleeve. Please ensure adequate UV protection when storing
sleeves. UV radiation leads to premature aging of the sleeve and all types of plastic parts.
Controlling: The pinch valve should be controlled via a pilot valve (e.g. 3/2 way magnetic valve). The path between
the pilot valve and pinch valve should be kept as short as possible. Direct assembly is recommended. To achieve rapid
valve closing times and opening times we recommend that the following minimum air passage be provided:
- DN10 to DN25 = NW 4 mm - DN200 = NW 9 mm
- DN32 to DN150 = NW 6 mm - DN250 = NW 13mm
To ensure a rapid opening time, we recommend the installation of a quick exhaust valve direct at the housing's air
connection. When planning the plant or equipment a pressure switch should be provided between the pinch valve
and pilot valve which enables to verify the opening and closing pressure of the sleeve. This pressure switch may
enables a defect of the sleeve (tear, hole) to be identified, and the sleeve can be replaced more specifically.
If the valve is used in a vacuum process (>100mbar underpressure), pressure equalization should be provided with
the product flow on the control air side. This can be achieved by connecting the ventilation opening of the pilot valve
with the vacuum pump or the product flow. Please see our controlling recommendations on the attached Controls
sheet.
Maintenance/Replacing the Sleeve: AKO pinch valves do not require any special maintenance. Only the wear parts
(f.e. sleeve, flange, collar and socket end cover) need to be change. This parts can be easily and quickly replaced on
site. Please see our Changing the Sleeves assembly instructions for the moves and equipment required. The plant or
equipment must be switched off during the whole time taken for the sleeve change. An adequate shut off for the
product flow must be provided. On request, the sleeve can also be changed in our works.
Installation in the plant or equipment:
A functional test must always be carried out before installing the pinch valve. The AKO pinch valve can be supplied
with two standard adaptations:
- With internal thread connection G3/8 to G4
- With flange connection DN40 DN250 (to DIN PN 10/ 16 or ANSI 150lbs)
- Special connections (triclamp, connection as per DIN11851, etc.) as requested
The threaded connection seal must be achieved with a suitable sealant. This should be based on standard
engineering practice. To prevent twisting of the sleeves if a socket valve is used, secure the thread taper with a
suitable open-ended spanner during the installation. The installation of the VMP valves happens by using hand
strengths. In addition we recommend to use a belt spanner. To seal the flange connections we recommend suitable,
standard flange seals. Valves with a flange collar do not require an additional flange seal. Ensure that the flange
surfaces are clean and undamaged. Use screw diameters in accordance with our Flange Dimensions table. The
screws must be tightened uniformly (first 50% then 100%) and in a diagonally opposite sequence. During the
installation it may be necessary to retighten the flange screws several times to secure the sealing effect. Avoid
stresses when installing the valve in the pipe. Also, large vibrations in the plant can destroy the valve or the
connections. At least twice the length of a pinch valve (of the respective nominal size) must lie between a pipe bend
and the pinch valve should be provided as a pipe or cable path as a shorter path can lead to premature wear of the
sleeve and flange due to the resulting turbulences.
Safety Instructions:
- Before each sleeve replacement, cleaning of the valve or operator intervention in the pinch valve, it is imperative that
the air supply is switched off and disconnected at the control air connection.
- When controlling the pinch valve it is imperative that you ensure that no bodies or tools or other parts can get into
the pinch valve.
-The respective safety data sheets must be observed before each contact with the media /products
-The pinch valve must not be touched while media with high temperatures are being transported. (risk of burns!!!)
-The pinch valve may only ever be dismantled if the plant has been switched off and depressurised.
- Suitable pressure limiters and/or safety valves must be installed to prevent the max. permissible operating /control
pressure (PS) from being exceeded.
-Unstable gases may not be used as an operating medium.
-Please note that, depending on the medium used and in which environments the valve is installed, static charges can
result.
-When designing the valve materials with respect to resistance against the operating media, the control components
(control air pipe, magnetic valve, etc.) must also be taken into consideration, as the operating medium can get into
the control pipe if the sleeve is defective.
If handled and used properly, and AKO original parts are used, we give the actual valid guarantee regulated by law for
all valves. Parts subject to wear are not covered by the guarantee.
BAV001e - 03/2006
Technical changes kept in reserve.
AKO Armaturen & Separations GmbH

D-65468 Trebur-Astheim Adam-Opel-Str.5 Telefon: +49(0)6147-9159-0 Telefax: +49(0)6147-9159-59
e-Mail: ako@ako-armaturen.de Internet: www.ako-armaturen.de
Appendix 06 – Information pressure transmitter
Page 27 of 31
BA01271P/00/EN/03.16 Products Solutions Services
71336273
Operating Instructions
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
Process pressure measurement
Pressure transducer for safe measurement and
monitoring of absolute and gauge pressure
Order code: XXXXX-XXXXXX
1. Ser. no.: XXXXXXXXXXXX
Ext. ord. cd.: XXX.XXXX.XX
Serial number
2. www.endress.com/deviceviewer Endress+Hauser
Operations App
3.
A0023555
• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available when
working on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific to
working procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser distributor will supply you with current information and updates to
these Instructions.
2 Endress+Hauser
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Document information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 10 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 10.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2 Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 10.2 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 11 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5 Turn down calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
11.1 Weld-in adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
11.2 Process adapter M24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2 Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 11.3 Plug-on display PHX20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.1 Requirements concerning the staff . . . . . . . . . . 9 11.4 M12 plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 12 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.4 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 12.1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
12.2 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
12.3 Performance characteristics of metallic
3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 process isolating diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.1 Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12.4 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.2 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12.5 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4 Incoming acceptance and product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.1 Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.2 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.3 Influence of the installation position . . . . . . . . 15
5.4 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.5 Mounting the profiled seal for the universal
process adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.6 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.1 Connecting the measuring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.2 Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.3 Connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.4 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7.1 Plug-on display PHX20 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . 21
8 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . . 24

8.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8.2 Response of output to errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8.3 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Endress+Hauser 3
Document information Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
1 Document information
1.1 Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phases
of the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and
storage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through to
troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.
1.2 Symbols used
1.2.1 Safety symbols
Symbol Meaning
DANGER!
DANGER This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result in
serious or fatal injury.
WARNING!
WARNING This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
CAUTION!
CAUTION This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
minor or medium injury.
NOTE!
NOTICE This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result in
personal injury.
1.2.2 Electrical symbols
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Protective ground connection Ground connection

A terminal which must be connected A grounded terminal which, as far as
to ground prior to establishing any the operator is concerned, is
other connections. grounded via a grounding system.
1.2.3 Tool symbols
Symbol Meaning
Open-ended wrench
A0011222
1.2.4 Symbols for certain types of information
Symbol Meaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
4 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Document information
Symbol Meaning
Reference to documentation
A Reference to page
Reference to graphic
1. , 2. , 3. … Series of steps
Result of a step
Visual inspection
1.2.5 Symbols in graphics
Symbol Meaning
1, 2, 3 ... Item numbers
A, B, C, ... Views
1.3 Documentation
The document types listed are available:
In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser Internet site: www.endress.com →
Download
1.3.1 Technical Information (TI): planning aid for your device

PMP11: TI01133P
PMP21: TI01133P
PMP23: TI01203P
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides an overview of
the accessories and other products that can be ordered for the device.
1.3.2 Brief Operating Instructions (KA): getting the 1st measured

value quickly
KA01164P:
The Brief Operating Instructions contain all the essential information from incoming
acceptance to initial commissioning.
1.3.3 Safety Instructions (XA)

Safety Instructions (XA) are supplied with the device depending on the approval. These
instructions are an integral part of the Operating Instructions.
Device Directive Documentation Option 1)
PMP21 ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb XA01271P BA

PMP23
PMP21 ATEX II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc XA01533P BC
PMP21 FM IS Cl. I, Div.1 Gr. A-D T4 XA01321P FA

PMP23
Endress+Hauser 5
PMP21 CSA C/US IS Cl. I Div. 1 Gr. A-D XA01322P CB

PMP23
PMP21 EAC Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb XA01540P GA

PMP23
PMP21 IEC Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb XA01271P IA

PMP23
PMP21 NEPSI Ex ia IIC T4 XA01363P NA

PMP23
PMP21 TIIS Ex ia IIC T4 In preparation TA

PMP23
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Approval"
The nameplate provides information on the Safety Instructions (XA) that are relevant
for the device.
6 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Document information
1.4 Terms and abbreviations
p
0
LRL LRV URV URL MWP OPL
A0029505
Item Term/ Explanation

abbreviation
1 OPL The OPL (over pressure limit = sensor overload limit) for the measuring device
depends on the lowest-rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected
components, i.e. the process connection has to be taken into consideration in
addition to the measuring cell. Also observe pressure-temperature dependency. For
the relevant standards and additional notes, see the "Pressure specifications" section
→  37 .
The OPL may only be applied for a limited period of time.
2 MWP The MWP (maximum working pressure) for the sensors depends on the lowest-
rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected components, i.e. the process
connection has to be taken into consideration in addition to the measuring cell.
Also observe pressure-temperature dependency. For the relevant standards and
additional notes, see the "Pressure specifications" section →  37 .
The MWP may be applied at the device for an unlimited period.
The MWP can also be found on the nameplate.
3 Maximum sensor Span between LRL and URL

measuring range This sensor measuring range is equivalent to the maximum calibratable/adjustable
span.
4 Calibrated/ Span between LRV and URV

adjusted span Factory setting: 0 to URL
Other calibrated spans can be ordered as customized spans.
p - Pressure
- LRL Lower range limit
- URL Upper range limit
- LRV Lower range value
- URV Upper range value
- TD (turn down) Turn down

The turn down is preset at the factory and cannot be changed.
Example - see the following section.
Endress+Hauser 7
1.5 Turn down calculation
1=2 3
LRL LRV URV URL
A0029545
1 Calibrated/adjusted span
2 Zero point-based span
3 URL sensor
Example
• Sensor:10 bar (150 psi) • Calibrated/adjusted span: 0 to 5 bar (0 to 75 psi)

• Upper range value (URL) = 10 bar (150 psi) • Lower range value (LRV) = 0 bar (0 psi)
• Upper range value (URV) = 5 bar (75 psi)
Turn down (TD):
URL
TD =
|URV - LRV|
10 bar (150 psi)

TD = = 2
|5 bar (75 psi) - 0 bar (0 psi)|
In this example, the TD is 2:1.

This span is based on the zero point.
8 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Basic safety instructions
2 Basic safety instructions
2.1 Requirements concerning the staff

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:
‣ Trained, qualified specialists: must have a relevant qualification for this specific
function and task
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations
‣ Before beginning work, the specialist staff must have read and understood the
instructions in the Operating Instructions and supplementary documentation as well as
in the certificates (depending on the application)
‣ Following instructions and basic conditions
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:
‣ Being instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the
facility's owner-operator
‣ Following the instructions in these Operating Instructions
2.2 Designated use
2.2.1 Application and media

The Cerabar is used to measure absolute and gauge pressure in gases, vapors and liquids.
The process-wetted materials of the measuring device must have an adequate level of
resistance to the media.
The measuring device may be used for the following measurements (process variables)
• in compliance with the limit values specified under "Technical data"
• in compliance with the conditions that are listed in additional documentation such as the
XA and this manual.
Measured process variable

• PMP11: gauge pressure
• PMP21: gauge pressure or absolute pressure
Calculated process variable

Pressure
2.2.2 Incorrect use

The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-designated use.
Verification for borderline cases:
‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistance
in verifying the corrosion resistance of process-wetted materials, but does not accept
any warranty or liability.
2.2.3 Residual risks

When in operation, the housing may reach a temperature close to the process
temperature.
Danger of burns from contact with surfaces!
‣ For elevated process temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.
Endress+Hauser 9
Basic safety instructions Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
2.3 Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:
‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.
‣ Switch off the supply voltage before connecting the device.
2.4 Operational safety

Risk of injury!
‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
Hazardous area
To eliminate the risk of danger to persons or the facility when the device is used in the
approval-related area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure equipment safety):
‣ Check the nameplate to verify if the device ordered can be put to its intended use in the
approval-related area.
‣ Observe the specifications in the separate supplementary documentation, such as the
XA or SD, which is an integral part of these Instructions.
2.5 Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet
state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in
which it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.
10 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Product description
3 Product description
3.1 Product design

Overview Item Description
A B C-1 C-2 A Valve plug
B Cable
C- 1 M12 plug
Housing cap made of plastic
C- 2 M12 plug
A0027231 A0027232 A0021987 A0027289 For Ex eC and IP69: metal housing cap
Metal housing cap can also be ordered as an option.
D D Housing
E Process connection (sample illustration)
A0027215
A0027227
3.2 Function
3.2.1 Calculating the pressure
Devices with metallic process isolating diaphragm

The process pressure deflects the metal process isolating diaphragm of the sensor and a fill
fluid transfers the pressure to a Wheatstone bridge (semiconductor technology). The
pressure-dependent change in the bridge output voltage is measured and evaluated.
Endress+Hauser 11
Incoming acceptance and product identification Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
4 Incoming acceptance and product

identification
4.1 Incoming acceptance
DELIVERY NOTE
A0028673
1=2
A0016870
Is the order code on the delivery note (1) identical to the order code on
the product sticker (2)?
A0022100
A0028673
A0022103
Are the goods undamaged?
A0028673
DELIVERY NOTE
A0022105
Do the data on the nameplate correspond to the order specifications and

the delivery note?
12 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Incoming acceptance and product identification
A0028673
A0022106
Is the documentation available?

If required (see nameplate): Are the safety instructions (XA) present?
If one of these conditions does not apply, please contact your

Endress+Hauser sales office.
4.2 Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the measuring device:
• Nameplate specifications
• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in W@M Device Viewer
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the measuring device is
displayed.
For an overview of the technical documentation provided, enter the serial number from
the nameplates in the W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer)
4.2.1 Nameplate
1
2 Cerabar
Made in Germany,
D-79689 Maulburg
3 Ord. cd.:
4 Ser. no.:
5 Ext. ord. cd.:
Date:
TAG:
A0024456
1 Manufacturer's address
2 Device name
3 Order number
4 Serial number
5 Extended order number
4.3 Storage and transport
4.3.1 Storage conditions

Use original packaging.
Store the measuring device in clean and dry conditions and protect from damage caused by
shocks (EN 837-2).
Storage temperature range

–40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)
Endress+Hauser 13
Incoming acceptance and product identification Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
4.3.2 Transporting the product to the measuring point

LWARNING
Incorrect transport!
Housing and diaphragm may become damaged, and there is a risk of injury!
‣ Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in its original packaging or by
the process connection.
14 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Installation
5 Installation
5.1 Mounting dimensions

For dimensions, see the "Mechanical construction" section in the Technical Information.
5.2 Installation conditions

• No moisture may enter the housing when installing or operating the device, or when
establishing the electrical connection.
• For metal M12 plugs: Do not remove the protection cap (only for IP69 and Ex ec version)
of the M12 plug terminal until shortly before the electrical connection.
• Do not clean or touch process isolating diaphragms with hard and/or pointed objects.
• Do not remove the protector on the process isolating diaphragm until just before
installation.
• Always firmly tighten the cable entry.
• Point the cable and connector downwards where possible to prevent moisture from
entering (e.g. rain or condensation water).
• Protect the housing from impact
• The following instruction applies for devices with a gauge pressure sensor and M12 plug
or valve plug:
NOTICE
If a heated device is cooled during the cleaning process (e.g. by cold water), a vacuum
develops for a short time, whereby moisture can penetrate the sensor through the
pressure compensation element (1).
Device could be destroyed!
‣ In this case, mount the device with the pressure compensation element (1) pointing
diagonally downwards where possible or to the side.
1 1 1
A0022252
5.3 Influence of the installation position

Any orientation is possible. However, the orientation may cause a zero point shift i.e. the
measured value does not show zero when the vessel is empty or partially full.
A B C
A0024708
Process isolating diaphragm axis Process isolating diaphragm Process isolating diaphragm
is horizontal (A) pointing upwards (B) pointing downwards (C)
Calibration position, no effect Up to +4 mbar (+0.058 psi) Up to –4 mbar (–0.058 psi)
Endress+Hauser 15
Installation Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
5.4 Mounting location
5.4.1 Pressure measurement

The pressure measurement specifications only apply for PMP11 and PMP21 devices.
Pressure measurement in gases

Mount the device with shutoff device above the tapping point so that any condensate can
flow into the process.
A0021904
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
Pressure measurement in vapors

For pressure measurement in vapors, use a siphon. The siphon reduces the temperature to
almost ambient temperature. Mount the device with a shutoff device at the same height as
the tapping point.
Advantage:
only minor/negligible heat effects on the device.
Note the max. permitted ambient temperature of the transmitter!
3
A0024395
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
3 Siphon
Pressure measurement in liquids

Mount the device with a shutoff device at the same height as the tapping point.
16 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Installation
2 1
A0024399
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
5.4.2 Level measurement

• Always install the device below the lowest measuring point.
• Do not install the device at the following positions:
– In the filling curtain
– In the tank outlet
– In the suction area of a pump
– Or at a point in the tank which could be affected by pressure pulses from the agitator.
A0024405
5.5 Mounting the profiled seal for the universal process

adapter
For details on mounting, see KA00096F/00/A3.
5.6 Post-installation check

 Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?
Does the device conform to the measuring point specifications?

For example:
 • Process temperature
• Process pressure
• Ambient temperature range
• Measuring range
 Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?
 Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?
 Are the securing screws tightened securely?
 Does the pressure compensation element point downwards at an angle or to the side?
 To prevent the penetration of moisture: are the connecting cables/plugs pointing downwards?
Endress+Hauser 17
Electrical connection Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
6 Electrical connection
6.1 Connecting the measuring unit
6.1.1 Terminal assignment

LWARNING
Risk of injury from the uncontrolled activation of processes!
‣ Make sure that downstream processes are not started unintentionally.
LWARNING
Supply voltage might be connected!
Risk of explosion!
‣ Make sure that no supply voltage is applied when connecting.
LWARNING
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ In accordance with IEC/EN61010 a separate circuit breaker must be provided for the
device .
‣ The device must be operated with a 500 mA fine-wire fuse (slow-blow).
‣ When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with
the corresponding national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or
Installation or Control Drawings.
‣ All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available
upon request. The Ex documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved
for use in explosion hazardous areas.
‣ Protective circuits against reverse polarity are integrated.
Connect the device in the following order:
1. Check whether the supply voltage matches the supply voltage indicated on the
nameplate.
2. Connect device in accordance with the following diagram.
Switch on supply voltage.
For devices with a cable connection: do not close reference air hose (see (a) in the
following drawings)! Protect reference air hose against penetration by water/condensate.
4 to 20 mA output
Device M12 plug Valve plug Cable
PMP11 0.5A 0.5A 1 0.5A

PMP21 L+ 1 L+ L+
PMP23 2 1
3 2
3 4 L–
L– 3
2
A0023487 L– (a)
A0022823 A0023783
1 brown = L+
2 blue = L-
3 green/yellow = ground connection
(a) reference air hose
18 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Electrical connection
0 to 10 V output
PMP11 0.5A 1 -
L+ 3
2 1
4
3
2 L–
L–
A0017576
L+
0.5A
A0022822
6.1.2 Supply voltage

LWARNING
Supply voltage might be connected!
Risk of explosion!
‣ When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with
the corresponding national standards and regulations as well as the Safety Instructions.
‣ All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available
upon request. The Ex documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved
for use in explosion hazardous areas.
Electronic version Device Supply voltage
4 to 20 mA output PMP11 10 to 30 V DC
PMP21
PMP23
0 to 10 V output PMP11 12 to 30 V DC
6.1.3 Current consumption and alarm signal
Number of wires Device Normal operation Alarm signal 1)
2 PMP11 ≤ 26 mA > 21 mA
PMP21
PMP23
3 PMP11 < 12 mA 11 V
1) For MAX alarm (factory setting)
6.2 Connection conditions
6.2.1 Cable specification

For valve plug: < 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) and Ø3.5 to 6.5 mm (0.14 to 0.26 in)
6.3 Connection data
6.3.1 Load (for 4 to 20 mA devices )

In order to guarantee sufficient terminal voltage in two-wire devices, a maximum load
resistance RL (including line resistance) must not be exceeded, depending on the supply
voltage UB of the supply unit.
Endress+Hauser 19
Electrical connection Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
R L max
[W ]
1068
614 2 R L max £ U B - 6.5V

22mA
10 20 30 UB
[V]
1
A0029452
1 Power supply 10 to 30 V DC
2 RLmax maximum load resistance
UB Supply voltage
6.3.2 Load resistance (for 0 to 10 V devices)

The load resistance must be ≥ 5 [kΩ].
6.4 Post-connection check

 Is the device or cable undamaged (visual check)?
 Do the cables comply with the requirements ?
 Do the cables have adequate strain relief?
 Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight?
 Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?
 Is the terminal assignment correct ?
 If required: Has protective ground connection been established ?
20 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Operation options
7 Operation options
7.1 Plug-on display PHX20 (optional)

No display or other operation facility is required to operate the device. However, devices
with a valve plug can be fitted with the optional local display PHX20.
A 1-line liquid crystal display (LCD) is used. The local display shows measured values, fault
messages and information messages. The device display can be turned in 90° steps.
Depending on the orientation of the device, it is therefore easy to read the measured
values.
7.1.1 Storage conditions

• Use original packaging.
• Storage temperature range: –30 to +80 °C (–22 to +176 °F)
7.1.2 Installation
1 2 3 4
A0022208
1. Place seals between the sensor/plug-on display and the plug-on display/connector.
2. Fit the plug-on display (2) between the connector (3) and connector socket (1) of the
sensor.
3. Replace the securing screw (4) with the longer screw included in the delivery.
4. An adhesive label (included in the delivery) with information on the technical unit
can be fixed beneath the LED display.
Mounting dimensions
42 (1.65)
42 (1.65) 48 (1.89)
A0022210
7.1.3 Technical data
Display: 4-digit, red LED display
Digit height: 7.62 mm; programmable decimal point setting
Display range: -1999 to 9999
Accuracy: 0.2% of the span ±1 digit
Endress+Hauser 21
Operation options Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
Electrical connection: To transmitter with 4 to 20 mA output and elbow plug DIN 43 650,
reverse polarity protection
Display power supply: Not required, powered automatically from the power loop
Voltage drop: ≤ 5 V (corresponds to load: max. 250 Ω)
Rate of conversion: 3 measurements per second
Damping: 0.3 to 20 s (configurable)
Data backup: Non-volatile EEPROM
Error message: • HI: overrange

• LO: below range
Programming: Via 2 keys, menu-guided, display range scaling, decimal point, damping,
error message
Degree of protection: IP 65
Influence of temperature on the 0.1% / 10 K

display:
Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission as per EN 50081, interference immunity as per EN

(EMC): 50082
Permitted current load: Max. 60 mA
Ambient temperature: 0 to +60 °C (+32 to +140 °F)
Housing material: Pa6 GF30 plastic, blue

Front screen made from red PMMA
Order number: 52022914
7.1.4 Electrical connection
Pin assignment
LWARNING
Is the supply voltage switched off?
Risk of electric shock!
• PIN 1: L+ (supply voltage UB)
• PIN 2: L- (0 V)
• PIN 3: Not assigned
Supply voltage
The supply voltage (mostly 24 V DC) must be greater than the sum of the voltage drop Us
at the sensor, the voltage drop of 5 V at the display and other voltage loss Ua (such as
additional evaluation and power loss).
The following therefore applies: Ub = Us + 5 V + Ua
Post-connection check
 Is the device or cable undamaged (visual check)?
 Are all cable glands installed, securely tightened and leak-tight?
 If supply voltage is present, is the device ready for operation and do values appear on the display module?
22 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Operation options
7.1.5 Commissioning
NOTICE
Risk of injury from the uncontrolled activation of processes!
‣ Ensure that no uncontrolled processes are activated in the system.
Configuring the menu items

To configure the menu items, loosen the 4 Phillips screws (1) on the display and remove
the cover.
1 1
A B
1 1
A0022209
A Move down and select the items

B Move up and select the items
A+B Select the item to configure or acknowledge the setting
Setting the decimal point
Press the B key until "dP" is displayed. d P
Press A+B to set the decimal point: - - -. -
Press B or A for up or down: - -. - -
Press A+B to quit the setting function and to go to the "dP" menu item. d P
Out of range setting

Message if signal is below 4 mA or above 20 mA:
• "HI" message = over range
• "LO" message = below range
Press the B key until "HILO" is displayed. H I L O
Press A+B for the setting function (message inactive): o F F
Press B or A for up or down (message active): o n
Press A+B to quit the setting function and to go to the "HILO" menu item. H I L O
Please note: If the "HILO" message is not active, the error "Er06" is displayed if the display
range (-1999 to +9999) is exceeded.
Changing to the measuring mode

Depending on the menu item selected, press key A or B between 1 and 8 times.
Endress+Hauser 23
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
8 Diagnostics and troubleshooting
8.1 Troubleshooting
If an illegal configuration exists in the device, the device switches to error mode.
General errors
Error Possible cause Solution
Device is not responding. Supply voltage does not match that specified on Apply correct voltage.
the nameplate.
Supply voltage has incorrect polarity. Reverse polarity of supply voltage.
Connecting cables are not in contact with the Check the contacting of the cables
terminals. and correct if necessary.
Output current Signal line is not wired correctly. Check wiring.

≤ 3.6 mA
8.2 Response of output to errors

The response of the output to error is regulated in accordance with NAMUR NE43.
Factory setting MAX alarm: >21 mA
8.2.1 alarm current
Device Description Option
PMP21 Adjusted min. alarm current IA 1)

PMP23
1) Product Configurator order code for "Service"
8.3 Disposal
When disposing, separate and recycle the device components based on the materials.
9 Maintenance
No special maintenance work is required.
Keep the pressure compensation element (1) free from contamination.
A0022141
24 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Maintenance
9.1 Exterior cleaning

Please note the following points when cleaning the device:
• The cleaning agents used should not corrode the surface and the seals.
• Mechanical damage to the process isolating diaphragm, e.g. due to sharp objects, must
be avoided.
• Observe the degree of protection of the device. See the nameplate if necessary →  13.
Endress+Hauser 25
Repair Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
10 Repair
10.1 General notes
10.1.1 Repair concept

Repairs are not possible.
10.2 Return
The measuring device must be returned if the wrong device has been ordered or delivered.
As an ISO-certified company and also due to legal regulations, Endress+Hauser is obliged
to follow certain procedures when handling any returned products that have been in
contact with medium. To ensure swift, safe and professional device returns, please read
the return procedures and conditions on the Endress+Hauser website at
www.services.endress.com/return-material
26 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Accessories
11 Accessories
11.1 Weld-in adapter

Various weld-in adapters are available for installation in vessels or pipes.
Device Description Option 1) Order number
PMP23 Weld-in adapter M24, d=65, 316L PM 71041381
PMP23 Weld-in adapter M24, d=65, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 PN 71041383

material, inspection certificate
PMP21 Weld-in adapter G½, 316L QA 52002643
PMP21 Weld-in adapter G½, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 material, QB 52010172

inspection certificate
PMP21 Weld-in tool adapter G½, brass QC 52005082
PMP23 Weld-in adapter G1, 316L, conical metal joint QE 52005087
PMP23 Weld-in adapter G1, 316L, 3.1, conical metal joint, QF 52010171
EN10204-3.1 material, inspection certificate
PMP23 Weld-in tool adapter G1, brass QG 52005272
PMP23 Weld-in adapter G1, 316L, silicone O-ring seal QJ 52001051
PMP23 Weld-in adapter G1, 316L, 3.1, silicone O-ring seal, QK 52011896
EN10204-3.1 material, inspection certificate
PMP23 Weld-in adapter Uni D65, 316L QL 214880-0002
PMP23 Weld-in adapter Uni D65, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 QM 52010174

PMP23 Weld-in tool adapter Uni D65/D85, brass QN 71114210
PMP23 Weld-in adapter Uni D85, 316L QP 52006262
PMP23 Weld-in adapter Uni D85, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 QR 52010173

1) Product Configurator, order code for "Enclosed accessories"
If installed horizontally and weld-in adapters with a leakage hole are used, ensure that the
leakage hole is pointing down. This allows leaks to be detected as quickly as possible.
11.2 Process adapter M24

The following process adapters can be ordered for the process connections with order
option X2J and X3J:
Device Description Order number Order number with inspection certificate 3.1 EN10204
PMP23 Varivent F DN32 PN40 52023996 52024003
PMP23 Varivent N DN50 PN40 52023997 52024004
PMP23 DIN11851 DN40 52023999 52024006
PMP23 DIN11851 DN50 52023998 52024005
PMP23 SMS 1½" 52026997 52026999
PMP23 Clamp 1½" 52023994 52024001
PMP23 Clamp 2" 52023995 52024002
Endress+Hauser 27
Accessories Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
11.3 Plug-on display PHX20

→  21
11.4 M12 plug connectors

Connector Degree of protection Material Option 1) Order
number
M12 IP67 • Union nut: Cu Sn/Ni R1 52006263

(self-terminated connection • Body: PBT
at M12 plug) • Seal: NBR
(0.8)
ø20
53 (2.09)
A0024475
M12 90 degrees IP67 • Union nut: GD Zn/Ni RZ 52010285

with 5m (16 ft) cable • Body: PUR
• Cable: PVC
(1.1)
28
³40 (1.57)
A0024476
M12 90 degrees IP67 • Union nut: GD Zn/Ni RM 71114212

28
(1.1)
(1.38)
35
20 (0.79)
A0024478
M12 90 degrees IP69 2) • Union nut: 316L RW 52024216

with 5m (16 ft) cable (1.4435)
(terminated at one end) • Body and cable:
PVC and PUR
(1.1)
28
³40 (1.57)
A0024477

2) Designation of the IP protection class according to DIN EN 60529. Previous designation "IP69K" according
to DIN 40050 Part 9 is no longer valid (standard withdrawn on November 1, 2012). The tests required by
both standards are identical.
28 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Technical data
12 Technical data
12.1 Input
12.1.1 Measured variable
Measured process variable


Pressure
12.1.2 Measuring range
Metal process isolating diaphragm
Sensor Device Maximum Lowest MWP OPL Factory settings 2) Option 3)

Sensor measuring range calibratable
span 1)
lower (LRL) upper (URL)
[bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)]
Devices for gauge pressure measurement

4)
400 mbar (6 psi) PMP11 –0.4 (–6) +0.4 (+6) 0.4 (0.6) 1 (15) 1.6 (24) 0 to 400 mbar (0 to 6 psi) 1F
PMP21
PMP23
1 bar (15 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +1 (+15) 1 (15) 2.7 (40.5) 4 (60) 0 to 1 bar (0 to 15 psi) 1H
PMP21
PMP23
2 bar (30 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +2 (+30) 0.4 (0.6) 6.7 (100.5) 10 (150) 0 to 2 bar (0 to 30 psi) 1K
PMP21
PMP23
4 bar (60 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +4 (+60) 0.8 (1.2) 10.7 (160.5) 16 (240) 0 to 4 bar (0 to 60 psi) 1M
PMP21
PMP23
6 bar (90 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +6 (+90) 2 (30) 16 (240) 24 (360) 0 to 6 bar (0 to 90 psi) 1N
PMP21
PMP23
10 bar (150 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +10 (+150) 2 (30) 25 (375) 40 (600) 0 to 10 bar (0 to 150 psi) 1P
PMP21
PMP23
16 bar (240 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +16 (+240) 5 (75) 25 (375) 64 (960) 0 to 16 bar (0 to 240 psi) 1Q
PMP21
PMP23
25 bar (375 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +25 (+375) 5 (75) 25 (375) 100 (1500) 0 to 25 bar (0 to 375 psi) 1R
PMP21
PMP23
40 bar (600 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +40 (+600) 8 (120) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 40 bar (0 to 600 psi) 1S
PMP21
PMP23
100 bar (1 500 psi) 4) PMP21 –1 (–15) +100 (+1500) 20 (300) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 100 bar (0 to 1 500 psi) 1U
400 bar (6 000 psi) 4) PMP21 –1 (–15) +400 (+6000) 80 (1200) 400 (6000) 600 (9000) 0 to 400 bar (0 to 6 000 psi) 1W
Endress+Hauser 29
Technical data Cerabar PMP11, PMP21, PMP23

span 1)
Devices for absolute pressure measurement
400 mbar (6 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 0.4 (+6) 0.4 (0.6) 1 (15) 1.6 (24) 0 to 400 mbar (0 to 6 psi) 2F
PMP23
1 bar (15 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 1 (+15) 1 (15) 2.7 (40.5) 4 (60) 0 to 1 bar (0 to 15 psi) 2H
PMP23
2 bar (30 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 2 (+30) 0.4 (0.6) 6.7 (100.5) 10 (150) 0 to 2 bar (0 to 30 psi) 2K
PMP23
4 bar (60 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 4 (+60) 0.8 (1.2) 10.7 (160.5) 16 (240) 0 to 4 bar (0 to 60 psi) 2M
PMP23
10 bar (150 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 10 (+150) 2 (30) 25 (375) 40 (600) 0 to 10 bar (0 to 150 psi) 2P
PMP23
40 bar (600 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) +40 (+600) 8 (120) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 40 bar (0 to 600 psi) 2S
PMP23
100 bar (1 500 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) +100 (+1500) 20 (300) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 100 bar (0 to 1 500 psi) 2U
4)
400 bar (6 000 psi) PMP21 0 (0) +400 (+6000) 80 (1200) 400 (6000) 600 (9000) 0 to 400 bar (0 to 6 000 psi) 2W
1) Highest turn down that can be set at the factory: 5:1. The turn down is preset and cannot be changed.
2) Other measuring ranges (e.g. –1 to +5 bar (–15 to 75 psi)) can be ordered with customer-specific settings (see the Product Configurator, order
code for "Calibration; Unit" option "J"). It is possible to invert the output signal (LRV = 20 mA; URV = 4 mA). Prerequisite: URV < LRV
3) Product Configurator, order code for "Sensor range"
4) Vacuum resistance: 0.01 bar (0.145 psi)
Maximum turn down which can be ordered for absolute pressure and gauge pressure
sensors
Device Range 400 mbar (6 psi) 1 bar (15 psi) 2 bar (30 psi)
6 bar (90 psi) 4 bar (60 psi)
16 bar (240 psi) 10 bar (150 psi)
25 to 400 bar (375 to 6 000 psi)
PMP11 0.5% TD 1:1 TD 1:1 to TD 2.5:1 TD 1:1 to TD 5:1
30 Endress+Hauser
12.2 Output
12.2.1 Output signal
Description Option 1)
4 to 20 mA (2-wire) 1
PMP11: 0 to 10 V output (3-wire) 2
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Output"
12.2.2 Signal range 4 to 20 mA

3.8 mA to 20.5 mA
12.2.3 Load (for 4 to 20 mA devices )

In order to guarantee sufficient terminal voltage in two-wire devices, a maximum load
resistance RL (including line resistance) must not be exceeded, depending on the supply
voltage UB of the supply unit.
R L max
[W ]
1068
614 2 R L max £ U B - 6.5V

22mA
10 20 30 UB
[V]
1
A0029452
UB Supply voltage
12.2.4 Load resistance (for 0 to 10 V devices)

The load resistance must be ≥ 5 [kΩ].
12.2.5 Signal on alarm 4 to 20 mA

The response of the output to error is regulated in accordance with NAMUR NE43.
alarm current

PMP23
12.2.6 Dead time, time constant

Presentation of the dead time and the time constant:
Endress+Hauser 31
I
100 %
90 %
63 %
t1 t2 t
t3
A0019786
12.2.7 Dynamic behavior
Analog electronics
Dead time (t1) [ms] Time constant (T63), t2 [ms] Time constant (T90), t3 [ms]
6 ms 10 ms 15 ms
32 Endress+Hauser
12.3 Performance characteristics of metallic process

isolating diaphragm
12.3.1 Reference operating conditions

• As per IEC 60770
• Ambient temperature TA = constant, in the range of:+21 to +33 °C (+70 to +91 °F)
• Humidity φ = constant, in the range of 5 to 80 % rH
• Ambient pressure pA = constant, in the range of:860 to 1 060 mbar (12.47 to 15.37 psi)
• Position of measuring cell = constant, in range: horizontal ±1° (see also "Influence of the
installation position" section →  15)
• Zero based span
• Process isolating diaphragm material: AISI 316L (1.4435)
• Filling oil: NSF-H1 synthetic oil in accordance with FDA 21 CFR 178.3570
• Supply voltage: 24 V DC ±3 V DC
• Load: 320 Ω
12.3.2 Measuring uncertainty for small absolute pressure measuring

ranges
The smallest extended uncertainty of measurement that can delivered by our
standards is:
• in range 1 to 30 mbar (0.0145 to 0.435 psi): 0.4 % of reading
• in range < 1 mbar (0.0145 psi): 1 % of reading.
12.3.3 Influence of the installation position

→  15
12.3.4 Resolution
Current output: min. 1.6 μA
12.3.5 Reference accuracy

The reference accuracy contains the non-linearity [DIN EN 61298-2 3.11] including the
pressure hysteresis [DIN EN 61298-23.13] and non-repeatability [DIN EN 61298-2 3.11]
in accordance with the limit point method as per [DIN EN 60770].
1)
Device TD % of calibrated span % of typical non-linearity % of typical non-repeatability
PMP11 TD 1:1 to TD 5:1 ±0.5 ±0.1 ±0.1
PMP21 TD 1:1 to TD 5:1 ±0.3 ±0.1 ±0.1
PMP23 TD 1:1 to TD 5:1 ±0.3 ±0.1 ±0.1
1) Overview of the turn down ranges →  30
12.3.6 Thermal change of the zero output and the output span
PMP11, PMP21
Measuring cell –20 to +85 °C (–4 to +185 °F) –20 to –40 °C (–4 to –40 °F)
+85 to +100 °C (+185 to +212 °F)
% of the calibrated span for TD 1:1
<1 bar (15 psi) <1 <1.2
≥ 1 bar (15 psi) <0.8 <1
Endress+Hauser 33
PMP23
Measuring cell –10 to +85 °C (+14 to +185 °F) +85 to +100 °C (+185 to +212 °F)
<1 bar (15 psi) <1 <1.2
≥ 1 bar (15 psi) <0.8 <1
12.3.7 Long-term stability
Measuring ranges 1 year 5 years 10 year
% of URL
400 mbar (6 psi)to ±0.2 ±0.4 In preparation

400 bar (6 000 psi)
12.3.8 Switch-on time

≤2 s

34 Endress+Hauser
12.4 Environment
12.4.1 Ambient temperature range
Device Ambient temperature range 1)
PMP11 –40 to +70 °C (–40 to +158 °F)
PMP21 –40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)

PMP23
PMP21 Devices for hazardous areas: –40 to +70 °C (–40 to +158 °F)
PMP23
1) Exception: the following cable is designed for an operating temperature range of

–25 to +70 °C (–13 to +158 °F): Product Configurator order code for "Accessory enclosed", option "RZ".
12.4.2 Storage temperature range

–40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)
12.4.3 Climate class
Device Climate class Note
PMP23 Class 4K4H Air temperature: –20 to +55 °C (–4 to +131 °F),
relative humidity: 4 to 100 %
satisfied according to DIN EN 60721-3-4 (condensation is possible)
PMP11 Class 3K5 Air temperature: –5 to +45 °C (+23 to +113 °F),

PMP21 relative humidity: 4 to 95 %
satisfied according to IEC 721-3-3 (condensation not possible)
12.4.4 Degree of protection
Device Connection Climate class Option 1)
PMP21 Cable 5 m (16 ft) IP66/68 2) NEMA Type 4X/6P Enclosure A

PMP23
PMP21 Cable 10 m (33 ft) IP66/68 2) NEMA Type 4X/6P Enclosure B

PMP23
PMP21 Cable 25 m (82 ft) IP66/68 2) NEMA Type 4X/6P Enclosure C

PMP23
PMP11 M12 plug made of plastic IP65 NEMA type 4X enclosure L
PMP21 M12 plug made of plastic IP65/67 NEMA type 4X enclosure M

PMP23
PMP23 M12 plug made of metal IP66/69 3) NEMA type 4X enclosure N
PMP11 Valve plug ISO4400 M16 IP65 NEMA type 4X enclosure U

PMP21
PMP23
PMP11 Valve plug ISO4400 NPT ½ IP65 NEMA type 4X enclosure V

PMP21
PMP23
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Electrical connection"

2) IP 68 (1.83 mH2O for 24 h)
3) Designation of the IP protection class according to DIN EN 60529. Previous designation "IP69K" according
to DIN 40050 Part 9 is no longer valid (standard withdrawn on November 1, 2012). The tests required by
both standards are identical.
Endress+Hauser 35
12.4.5 Vibration resistance
Test standard Vibration resistance
IEC 60068-2-64:2008 Guaranteed for 5 to 2000Hz: 0.05g2/Hz
12.4.6 Electromagnetic compatibility

• Interference emission as per EN 61326-1 equipment B
• Interference immunity as per EN 61326-1 (industrial sector)
• NAMUR recommendation EMC (NE21)
• Maximum deviation: 1.5% for TD 1:1
For further details refer to the Declaration of Conformity.
36 Endress+Hauser
12.5 Process
12.5.1 Process temperature range for devices with metallic process

isolating diaphragm
Device Process temperature range
PMP11 –25 to +85 °C (–13 to +185 °F)
PMP21 –40 to +100 °C (–40 to +212 °F)
PMP23 –10 to +100 °C (+14 to +212 °F)
PMP23 At +135°C (+275 °F) for a maximum of one hour (device in operation but not within
Sterilization in place (SIP) measuring specification)
Applications with changes in temperature

Frequent extreme changes in temperatures can temporarily cause measuring errors.
Internal temperature compensation is faster the smaller the change in temperature and
the longer the time interval.
For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
12.5.2 Pressure specifications

LWARNING
The maximum pressure for the measuring device depends on the lowest-rated
element with regard to pressure.
‣ For pressure specifications, see the "Measuring range" section and "Mechanical
construction" section in the Technical Information.
‣ The Pressure Equipment Directive (2014/68/EU) uses the abbreviation "PS". The
abbreviation "PS" corresponds to the MWP (maximum working pressure) of the
measuring device.
‣ MWP (maximum working pressure): The MWP (maximum working pressure) is
specified on the nameplate. This value is based on a reference temperature of
+20 °C (+68 °F) and may be applied to the device for an unlimited period of time.
Observe the temperature dependency of the MWP.
‣ OPL (over pressure limit): The test pressure corresponds to the over pressure limit of
the sensor and may only be applied temporarily to ensure that the measurement is
within the specifications and no permanent damage develops. In the case of sensor
range and process connections where the over pressure limit (OPL) of the process
connection is smaller than the nominal value of the sensor, the device is set at the
factory, at the very maximum, to the OPL value of the process connection. If you want
to use the entire sensor range, select a process connection with a higher OPL value.
Endress+Hauser 37
Index
Index
A
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
C
CE mark (declaration of conformity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
D
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
E
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
F
Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
N
Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
O
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
P
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
R
Repair concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
S
Safety instructions
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety Instructions (XA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Staff
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
T
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
U
Use of the measuring device
see Designated use
Use of the measuring devices
Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
W
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
38 Endress+Hauser
*71336273*
71336273
www.addresses.endress.com
TI01133P/00/EN/03.16 Products Solutions Services
71336269
Technical Information
Cerabar PMP11, PMP21
Process pressure measurement
Pressure transducer with metal sensors
Application
The Cerabar is a pressure transducer for the measurement of absolute and gauge
pressure in gases, vapors, liquids and dust. The Cerabar can be used internationally
thanks to a wide range of approvals and process connections.
Your benefits
• High reproducibility and long-term stability
• Reference accuracy: up to 0.3%
• Customized measuring ranges
– Turn down up to 5:1
– Sensor for measuring ranges up to 400 bar (6 000 psi)
• Housing and process isolating diaphragm made of 316L
Table of contents
Document information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Turn down calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Measuring principle - process pressure measurement . . . . . 8 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Process temperature range for devices with metallic
Device features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 process isolating diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Pressure specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Design, dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Process connections with internal, metal process isolating
diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Signal range 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Load (for 4 to 20 mA devices ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Load resistance (for 0 to 10 V devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Process connections with flush-mounted, metal process
Signal on alarm 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
isolating diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Dead time, time constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Process connections with flush-mounted, metal process
Dynamic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
isolating diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Materials in contact with process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Materials not in contact with process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Current consumption and alarm signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Operability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power supply fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Plug-on display PHX20 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Residual ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Influence of power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Overvoltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 RCM-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
EAC conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Performance characteristics of metallic process
isolating diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Marine approval (pending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU (PED) . . . . . . . 31
Measuring uncertainty for small absolute pressure
Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
measuring ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CRN approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Influence of the installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Calibration unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reference accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Inspection certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Thermal change of the zero output and the output span . . . 17
Long-term stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Influence of the installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Weld-in adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Plug-on display PHX20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
M12 plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2 Endress+Hauser
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Field of Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Brief Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Endress+Hauser 3
Document information
Document function The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides an overview of the
accessories and other products that can be ordered for the device.
Symbols used Safety symbols
Symbol Meaning
DANGER!
DANGER This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result in
WARNING!
WARNING This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
CAUTION!
CAUTION This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
minor or medium injury.
NOTE!
NOTICE This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result in
personal injury.
Electrical symbols
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Protective ground connection Ground connection

A terminal which must be connected A grounded terminal which, as far as
to ground prior to establishing any the operator is concerned, is
other connections. grounded via a grounding system.
Symbols for certain types of information
Symbol Meaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation
A Reference to page
Reference to graphic
Visual inspection
Symbols in graphics
Symbol Meaning
1, 2, 3 ... Item numbers
A, B, C, ... Views
4 Endress+Hauser
Documentation The document types listed are available:

In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser Internet site: www.endress.com → Download
Brief Operating Instructions (KA): getting the 1st measured value quickly
The Brief Operating Instructions contain all the essential information from incoming acceptance to
initial commissioning.
Operating Instructions (BA): your comprehensive reference

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phases of the life
cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and storage, to mounting,
connection, operation and commissioning through to troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.
Safety Instructions (XA)

Safety Instructions (XA) are supplied with the device depending on the approval. These instructions
are an integral part of the Operating Instructions.
The nameplate provides information on the Safety Instructions (XA) that are relevant for the
device.
Endress+Hauser 5
Terms and abbreviations
p
0
LRL LRV URV URL MWP OPL
A0029505
Item Term/ Explanation

abbreviation
1 OPL The OPL (over pressure limit = sensor overload limit) for the measuring device
depends on the lowest-rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected
components, i.e. the process connection has to be taken into consideration in
addition to the measuring cell. Also observe pressure-temperature dependency. For
the relevant standards and additional notes, see the "Pressure specifications" section
→  21 .
The OPL may only be applied for a limited period of time.
2 MWP The MWP (maximum working pressure) for the sensors depends on the lowest-
rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected components, i.e. the process
connection has to be taken into consideration in addition to the measuring cell.
Also observe pressure-temperature dependency. For the relevant standards and
additional notes, see the "Pressure specifications" section →  21 .
The MWP may be applied at the device for an unlimited period.
The MWP can also be found on the nameplate.
3 Maximum sensor Span between LRL and URL

measuring range This sensor measuring range is equivalent to the maximum calibratable/adjustable
span.
4 Calibrated/ Span between LRV and URV

adjusted span Factory setting: 0 to URL
Other calibrated spans can be ordered as customized spans.
p - Pressure
- LRL Lower range limit
- URL Upper range limit
- LRV Lower range value
- URV Upper range value
- TD (turn down) Turn down

The turn down is preset at the factory and cannot be changed.
Example - see the following section.
6 Endress+Hauser
Turn down calculation

1=2 3
LRL LRV URV URL
A0029545
1 Calibrated/adjusted span
2 Zero point-based span
3 URL sensor
Example
• Sensor:10 bar (150 psi) • Calibrated/adjusted span: 0 to 5 bar (0 to 75 psi)

• Upper range value (URL) = 10 bar (150 psi) • Lower range value (LRV) = 0 bar (0 psi)
• Upper range value (URV) = 5 bar (75 psi)
Turn down (TD):
URL
TD =
|URV - LRV|
10 bar (150 psi)

TD = = 2
|5 bar (75 psi) - 0 bar (0 psi)|
In this example, the TD is 2:1.

This span is based on the zero point.
Endress+Hauser 7
Function and system design

Measuring principle - Devices with metallic process isolating diaphragm
process pressure
The process pressure deflects the metal process isolating diaphragm of the sensor and a fill fluid
measurement
transfers the pressure to a Wheatstone bridge (semiconductor technology). The pressure-dependent
change in the bridge output voltage is measured and evaluated.
Advantages:
• Can be used for high process pressures
• Fully welded sensor
• Slim, flush-mounted process connections available
1
2
3
4
p
A0016448
1 Silicon measuring element, substrate

2 Wheatstone bridge
3 Channel with fill fluid
4 Metal process isolating diaphragm
Measuring system A complete measuring system comprises, for example:
1 2 3
A0021926
1 PLC (programmable logic control)

2 RN221N / RMA42
3 Pressure transducer
8 Endress+Hauser
Device features
PMP11
Field of application Gauge pressure
Process connections • Thread ISO 228, also flush-mount

• Thread ASME
• DIN 13
Measuring ranges From –400 to +400 mbar (–6 to +6 psi) to –1 to +40 bar (–15 to +600 psi).
OPL (depends on the measuring range) Max. 0 to +160 bar (0 to +2 400 psi)
Process temperature range –25 to +85 °C (–13 to +185 °F)
Ambient temperature range –40 to +70 °C (–40 to +158 °F)
Reference accuracy Up to 0.5 %, TD 5:1, for details see the "Reference accuracy" section.
Supply voltage • 4 to 20 mA output: 10 to 30V DC

• 0 to 10 V output: 12 to 30V DC
Output • 4 to 20 mA
• 0 to 10 V
Material • Housing made from 316L (1.4404)

• Process connections made from 316L (1.4404)
• Process isolating diaphragm made from 316L (1.4435)
Options • Final inspection report

• Cleaned from oil+grease
PMP21
Field of application Gauge pressure and absolute pressure
Process connections • Thread ISO 228, also flush-mount

• Thread DIN 13
• Thread ASME
• Thread JIS
Measuring ranges From –400 to +400 mbar (–6 to +6 psi) to –1 to +400 bar (–15 to +6 000 psi).
OPL (depends on the measuring range) Max. 0 to +600 bar (0 to +9 000 psi)
Process temperature range –40 to +100 °C (–40 to +212 °F)
Ambient temperature range –40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)
Reference accuracy Up to 0.3 %, TD 5:1, for details see the "Reference accuracy" section.
Supply voltage 10 to 30 V DC
Output 4 to 20 mA
Material • Housing made from 316L (1.4404)

• Process connections made from 316L (1.4404)
• Process isolating diaphragm made from 316L (1.4435)
Options • Ex approvals
• Marine certificate
• Min. alarm current setting
• 3.1 Material certificates
• Final inspection report
• Cleaned from oil+grease
Endress+Hauser 9
Product design
Overview Item Description
A B C-1 C-2 A Valve plug
B Cable
C- 1 M12 plug
Housing cap made of plastic
C- 2 M12 plug
A0027231 A0027232 A0021987 A0027289 For Ex eC and IP69: metal housing cap
D D Housing
E Process connection (sample illustration)
A0027215
System integration The device can be given a tag name (max. 8 alphanumeric characters).
1)
Description Option
Measuring point (TAG), see additional specifications Z1
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Identification"
10 Endress+Hauser
Input
Measured variable Measured process variable

Pressure
Measuring range Metal process isolating diaphragm

span 1)
Devices for gauge pressure measurement

4)
400 mbar (6 psi) PMP11 –0.4 (–6) +0.4 (+6) 0.4 (0.6) 1 (15) 1.6 (24) 0 to 400 mbar (0 to 6 psi) 1F
PMP21
1 bar (15 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +1 (+15) 1 (15) 2.7 (40.5) 4 (60) 0 to 1 bar (0 to 15 psi) 1H
PMP21
2 bar (30 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +2 (+30) 0.4 (0.6) 6.7 (100.5) 10 (150) 0 to 2 bar (0 to 30 psi) 1K
PMP21
4 bar (60 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +4 (+60) 0.8 (1.2) 10.7 (160.5) 16 (240) 0 to 4 bar (0 to 60 psi) 1M
PMP21
6 bar (90 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +6 (+90) 2 (30) 16 (240) 24 (360) 0 to 6 bar (0 to 90 psi) 1N
PMP21
10 bar (150 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +10 (+150) 2 (30) 25 (375) 40 (600) 0 to 10 bar (0 to 150 psi) 1P
PMP21
16 bar (240 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +16 (+240) 5 (75) 25 (375) 64 (960) 0 to 16 bar (0 to 240 psi) 1Q
PMP21
25 bar (375 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +25 (+375) 5 (75) 25 (375) 100 (1500) 0 to 25 bar (0 to 375 psi) 1R
PMP21
40 bar (600 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +40 (+600) 8 (120) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 40 bar (0 to 600 psi) 1S
PMP21
100 bar (1 500 psi) 4) PMP21 –1 (–15) +100 (+1500) 20 (300) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 100 bar (0 to 1 500 psi) 1U
4)
400 bar (6 000 psi) PMP21 –1 (–15) +400 (+6000) 80 (1200) 400 (6000) 600 (9000) 0 to 400 bar (0 to 6 000 psi) 1W
Devices for absolute pressure measurement
400 mbar (6 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 0.4 (+6) 0.4 (0.6) 1 (15) 1.6 (24) 0 to 400 mbar (0 to 6 psi) 2F
4)
1 bar (15 psi) PMP21 0 (0) 1 (+15) 1 (15) 2.7 (40.5) 4 (60) 0 to 1 bar (0 to 15 psi) 2H
4)
2 bar (30 psi) PMP21 0 (0) 2 (+30) 0.4 (0.6) 6.7 (100.5) 10 (150) 0 to 2 bar (0 to 30 psi) 2K
4)
4 bar (60 psi) PMP21 0 (0) 4 (+60) 0.8 (1.2) 10.7 (160.5) 16 (240) 0 to 4 bar (0 to 60 psi) 2M
4)
10 bar (150 psi) PMP21 0 (0) 10 (+150) 2 (30) 25 (375) 40 (600) 0 to 10 bar (0 to 150 psi) 2P
4)
40 bar (600 psi) PMP21 0 (0) +40 (+600) 8 (120) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 40 bar (0 to 600 psi) 2S
4)
100 bar (1 500 psi) PMP21 0 (0) +100 (+1500) 20 (300) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 100 bar (0 to 1 500 psi) 2U
4)
400 bar (6 000 psi) PMP21 0 (0) +400 (+6000) 80 (1200) 400 (6000) 600 (9000) 0 to 400 bar (0 to 6 000 psi) 2W
1) Highest turn down that can be set at the factory: 5:1. The turn down is preset and cannot be changed.
2) Other measuring ranges (e.g. –1 to +5 bar (–15 to 75 psi)) can be ordered with customer-specific settings (see the Product Configurator, order
code for "Calibration; Unit" option "J"). It is possible to invert the output signal (LRV = 20 mA; URV = 4 mA). Prerequisite: URV < LRV
3) Product Configurator, order code for "Sensor range"
4) Vacuum resistance: 0.01 bar (0.145 psi)
Endress+Hauser 11
Maximum turn down which can be ordered for absolute pressure and gauge pressure sensors
Device Range 400 mbar (6 psi) 1 bar (15 psi) 2 bar (30 psi)
6 bar (90 psi) 4 bar (60 psi)
16 bar (240 psi) 10 bar (150 psi)
25 to 400 bar (375 to 6 000 psi)
12 Endress+Hauser
Output
Output signal Description Option 1)
4 to 20 mA (2-wire) 1
PMP11: 0 to 10 V output (3-wire) 2
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Output"
Signal range 4 to 20 mA 3.8 mA to 20.5 mA
Load (for 4 to 20 mA In order to guarantee sufficient terminal voltage in two-wire devices, a maximum load resistance RL
devices ) (including line resistance) must not be exceeded, depending on the supply voltage UB of the supply
unit.
R L max
[W ]
1068
614 2 R L max £ U B - 6.5V

22mA
10 20 30 UB
[V]
1
A0029452
UB Supply voltage
Load resistance (for 0 to 10 V The load resistance must be ≥ 5 [kΩ].

devices)
Signal on alarm 4 to 20 mA The response of the output to error is regulated in accordance with NAMUR NE43.
alarm current
Dead time, time constant Presentation of the dead time and the time constant:
I
100 %
90 %
63 %
t1 t2 t
t3
A0019786
Endress+Hauser 13
Dynamic behavior Analog electronics
Dead time (t1) [ms] Time constant (T63), t2 [ms] Time constant (T90), t3 [ms]
6 ms 10 ms 15 ms
14 Endress+Hauser
Power supply
LWARNING
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ In accordance with IEC/EN61010 a separate circuit breaker must be provided for the device .
‣ When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with the
corresponding national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or Installation or
Control Drawings.
‣ All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available upon
request. The Ex documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved for use in
explosion hazardous areas.
‣ Protective circuits against reverse polarity, HF influences and overvoltage peaks are integrated.
‣ The device must be operated with a 500 mA fine-wire fuse (slow-blow).
Terminal assignment 4 to 20 mA output

PMP11 0.5A 0.5A 1 0.5A

PMP21 L+ 1 L+ L+
2 1
3 2
3 4 L–
L– 3
2
A0023487 L– (a)
A0022823 A0023783
1 brown = L+
2 blue = L-
3 green/yellow = ground connection
(a) reference air hose
0 to 10 V output
PMP11 0.5A 1 -
L+ 3
2 1
4
3
2 L–
L–
A0017576
L+
0.5A
A0022822
Supply voltage Electronic version Device Supply voltage
4 to 20 mA output PMP11 10 to 30 V DC
PMP21
0 to 10 V output PMP11 12 to 30 V DC
Current consumption and Number of wires Device Normal operation Alarm signal 1)
alarm signal
2 PMP11 ≤ 26 mA > 21 mA
PMP21
3 PMP11 < 12 mA 11 V
1) For MAX alarm (factory setting)
Power supply fault • Behavior in the event of overvoltage (>30 V):

The device works continuously up to 34 V DC without damage. If the supply voltage is exceeded,
the specified characteristics are no longer guaranteed.
• Behavior in the event of undervoltage:
If the supply voltage falls below the minimum value, the device switches off in a defined manner
(status same as for no power supply).
Endress+Hauser 15
Electrical connection Degree of protection
Device Connection Climate class Option 1)

2)
PMP21 Cable 10 m (33 ft) IP66/68 NEMA Type 4X/6P Enclosure B
2)
PMP21 Cable 25 m (82 ft) IP66/68 NEMA Type 4X/6P Enclosure C

PMP21

PMP21

2) IP 68 (1.83 mH2O for 24 h)
Cable specification For valve plug: < 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) and Ø3.5 to 6.5 mm (0.14 to 0.26 in)
Residual ripple The device operates within the reference accuracy up to ±5 % of the residual ripple of the supply
voltage, within the permitted voltage range.
Influence of power supply ≤0.005 % of the URL/1 V
Overvoltage protection The device does not contain any special elements to protect against overvoltage ("wire to ground").
Nevertheless the requirements of the applicable EMC standard EN 61000-4-5 (testing voltage 1kV
EMC wire/ground) are met.
16 Endress+Hauser
Performance characteristics of metallic process isolating

diaphragm
Reference operating • As per IEC 60770
conditions • Ambient temperature TA = constant, in the range of:+21 to +33 °C (+70 to +91 °F)
• Humidity φ = constant, in the range of 5 to 80 % rH
• Ambient pressure pA = constant, in the range of:860 to 1 060 mbar (12.47 to 15.37 psi)
• Position of measuring cell = constant, in range: horizontal ±1° (see also "Influence of the
installation position" section →  18)
• Zero based span
• Process isolating diaphragm material: AISI 316L (1.4435)
• Filling oil: NSF-H1 synthetic oil in accordance with FDA 21 CFR 178.3570
• Supply voltage: 24 V DC ±3 V DC
• Load: 320 Ω
Measuring uncertainty for The smallest extended uncertainty of measurement that can delivered by our standards is:
small absolute pressure • in range 1 to 30 mbar (0.0145 to 0.435 psi): 0.4 % of reading
measuring ranges • in range < 1 mbar (0.0145 psi): 1 % of reading.
Influence of the installation →  18

position
Resolution Current output: min. 1.6 μA
Reference accuracy The reference accuracy contains the non-linearity [DIN EN 61298-2 3.11] including the pressure
hysteresis [DIN EN 61298-23.13] and non-repeatability [DIN EN 61298-2 3.11] in accordance with
the limit point method as per [DIN EN 60770].
1)
Device TD % of calibrated span % of typical non-linearity % of typical non-repeatability
PMP11 TD 1:1 to TD 5:1 ±0.5 ±0.1 ±0.1
PMP21 TD 1:1 to TD 5:1 ±0.3 ±0.1 ±0.1
1) Overview of the turn down ranges →  12
Thermal change of the zero Measuring cell –20 to +85 °C (–4 to +185 °F) –20 to –40 °C (–4 to –40 °F)
output and the output span +85 to +100 °C (+185 to +212 °F)
<1 bar (15 psi) <1 <1.2
≥ 1 bar (15 psi) <0.8 <1
Long-term stability Measuring ranges 1 year 5 years 10 year
% of URL
400 mbar (6 psi)to ±0.2 ±0.4 In preparation

400 bar (6 000 psi)
Switch-on time ≤2 s

Endress+Hauser 17
Installation
Installation conditions • No moisture may enter the housing when installing or operating the device, or when establishing
the electrical connection.
• Point the cable and connector downwards where possible to prevent moisture from entering (e.g.
rain or condensation water).
Influence of the installation Any orientation is possible. However, the orientation may cause a zero point shift i.e. the measured
position value does not show zero when the vessel is empty or partially full.
A B C
A0024708
Process isolating diaphragm axis Process isolating diaphragm Process isolating diaphragm
is horizontal (A) pointing upwards (B) pointing downwards (C)
Calibration position, no effect Up to +4 mbar (+0.058 psi) Up to –4 mbar (–0.058 psi)
Mounting location Pressure measurement
Pressure measurement in gases

Mount the device with shutoff device above the tapping point so that any condensate can flow into
the process.
A0021904
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
Pressure measurement in vapors

For pressure measurement in vapors, use a siphon. The siphon reduces the temperature to almost
ambient temperature. Mount the device with a shutoff device at the same height as the tapping
point.
Advantage:
only minor/negligible heat effects on the device.
Note the max. permitted ambient temperature of the transmitter!
18 Endress+Hauser
3
A0024395
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
3 Siphon
Pressure measurement in liquids

Mount the device with a shutoff device at the same height as the tapping point.
2 1
A0024399
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
Level measurement
• Always install the device below the lowest measuring point.

• Do not install the device at the following positions:
– In the filling curtain
– In the tank outlet
– In the suction area of a pump
– Or at a point in the tank which could be affected by pressure pulses from the agitator.
A0024405
Endress+Hauser 19
Environment
Ambient temperature range Device Ambient temperature range 1)
PMP11 –40 to +70 °C (–40 to +158 °F)
PMP21 –40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)
PMP21 Devices for hazardous areas: –40 to +70 °C (–40 to +158 °F)
1) Exception: the following cable is designed for an operating temperature range of

–25 to +70 °C (–13 to +158 °F): Product Configurator order code for "Accessory enclosed", option "RZ".
Storage temperature range –40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)
Climate class Device Climate class Note
PMP11 Class 3K5 Air temperature: –5 to +45 °C (+23 to +113 °F),

PMP21 relative humidity: 4 to 95 %
satisfied according to IEC 721-3-3 (condensation not possible)
Degree of protection Device Connection Climate class Option 1)
PMP21 Cable 10 m (33 ft) IP66/68 2) NEMA Type 4X/6P Enclosure B

2)
PMP21 Cable 25 m (82 ft) IP66/68 NEMA Type 4X/6P Enclosure C

PMP21

PMP21

2) IP 68 (1.83 mH2O for 24 h)
Vibration resistance Test standard Vibration resistance
IEC 60068-2-64:2008 Guaranteed for 5 to 2000Hz: 0.05g2/Hz
Electromagnetic • Interference emission as per EN 61326-1 equipment B

compatibility • Interference immunity as per EN 61326-1 (industrial sector)
• NAMUR recommendation EMC (NE21)
• Maximum deviation: 1.5% for TD 1:1
For further details refer to the Declaration of Conformity.
20 Endress+Hauser
Process
Process temperature range Device Process temperature range
for devices with metallic
process isolating diaphragm PMP11 –25 to +85 °C (–13 to +185 °F)
PMP21 –40 to +100 °C (–40 to +212 °F)
Applications with changes in temperature

Frequent extreme changes in temperatures can temporarily cause measuring errors. Internal
temperature compensation is faster the smaller the change in temperature and the longer the time
interval.
For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
Pressure specifications LWARNING

The maximum pressure for the measuring device depends on the lowest-rated element with
regard to pressure.
‣ For pressure specifications, see the "Measuring range" section and the "Mechanical construction"
section.
‣ The Pressure Equipment Directive (2014/68/EU) uses the abbreviation "PS". The abbreviation "PS"
corresponds to the MWP (maximum working pressure) of the measuring device.
‣ MWP (maximum working pressure): The MWP (maximum working pressure) is specified on the
nameplate. This value is based on a reference temperature of +20 °C (+68 °F) and may be applied
to the device for an unlimited period of time. Observe the temperature dependency of the MWP.
‣ OPL (over pressure limit): The test pressure corresponds to the over pressure limit of the sensor
and may only be applied temporarily to ensure that the measurement is within the specifications
and no permanent damage develops. In the case of sensor range and process connections where
the over pressure limit (OPL) of the process connection is smaller than the nominal value of the
sensor, the device is set at the factory, at the very maximum, to the OPL value of the process
connection. If you want to use the entire sensor range, select a process connection with a higher
OPL value.
Endress+Hauser 21
Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions Device height
The device height is calculated from
• the height of the electrical connection
• the height of the housing and
• the height of the individual process connection.
The individual heights of the components are listed in the following sections. To calculate the device
height simply add up the individual heights of the components. Where applicable also take into
consideration the installation distance (space that is used to install the device). You can use the
following table for this purpose:
Section Page Height Example
Electrical connection →  22 (A)

D
Housing height →  23 (B)
Process connection height →  24 (C) A

Installation distance - (D)
A0022829
A B C D
25 (1.0)
25 (1.0)
35 (1.38)
28 (1.1)
45 (1.77)
M12x1 M12x1
r ³ 102 (4.02)
52 (2.05)
A0024426 A0024427
A0024428
A0024429
Engineering unit mm (in)
1)
Item Description Material Weight kg (lbs) Device Option
A M12 plug IP65 Housing cap made of plastic 0.012 (0.03) PMP11 L
(Additional dimensions →  34)
A M12 plug IP65/67 Housing cap made of plastic 0.012 (0.03) PMP21 M
(Additional dimensions →  34) Plug connector with cable
can be ordered as an accessory →  34
B M12 plug IP66/67 Housing cap made of metal 0.030 (0.07) PMP21 In the case of Ex eC type of protection,
the housing cap is made of metal.
C M16 valve plug Plastic PPSU 0.060 (0.14) PMP11 U

PMP21
C NPT ½ valve plug Plastic PPSU 0.060 (0.14) PMP11 V

PMP21
D Cable5 m (16 ft) PUR (UL94V0) 0.280 (0.62) PMP21 A
22 Endress+Hauser
1)
Item Description Material Weight kg (lbs) Device Option
D Cable10 m (33 ft) PUR (UL94V0) 0.570 (1.26) PMP21 B
D Cable25 m (82 ft) PUR (UL94V0) 1.400 (3.09) PMP21 C
Housing B
34 (1.34)
A0027288
Item Device Material Weight kg (lbs)
B PMP11 Stainless steel 316L 0.090 (0.20)

PMP21
Endress+Hauser 23
Process connections with Thread ISO 228 G

internal, metal process
isolating diaphragm A B
32
13 (0.51)
32
37 (1.46)
37 (1.46)
2 (0.08)
15.5 (0.61)
13 (0.51)
ø3 (0.12) G ¼"
2 (0.08)
ø5 (0.2) ø23 (0.91)
ø9.5 (0.37)
G ¼" A A0021960
A0021959
C D
20 (0.79)
32 20 (0.79) 32
42 (1.65)
45 (1.77)
ø18 (0.71)
ø11.4 (0.45)
3 (0.12)
3 (0.12)
3 (0.12)
ø3 (0.12)
ø17.5 (0.69)
ø6 (0.24)
G ½" A
ø17.5 (0.69)
A0021963
G ½" A
A0021962
Item Device Description Material Weight kg (lbs) Option 1)
Nominal value Nominal value

to 100 bar (1 500 psi) 400 bar (6 000 psi)
A PMP11 Thread ISO 228 G ¼" A, EN 837 316L 0.200 (0.44) 0.240 (0.53) WTJ
PMP21
B PMP11 Thread ISO 228 G ¼" (female) 316L 0.220 (0.49) 0.260 (0.57) WAJ
PMP21
C PMP11 Thread ISO 228 G ½" A, EN 837 316L 0.220 (0.49) 0.270 (0.60) WBJ
PMP21
D PMP11 Thread ISO 228 G ½" A, bore11.4 mm (0.45 in) 316L 0.220 (0.49) 0.260 (0.57) WWJ
PMP21
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Process connection"
24 Endress+Hauser
Process connections with Thread ASME

isolating diaphragm A B
32 32
35 (1.38)
47 (1.85)
ø21.4 (0.84)
25 (0.98)
13 (0.51)
12 (0.47)
ø3 (0.12)
NPT ¼"
15.5 (0.61)
ø13.7 (0.54) NPT ¼"-14
A0021965
ø17.3 (0.68)
NPT ½"-18
A0021964
32
47 (1.85)
ø21.4 (0.84) 25 (0.98)
19.5 (0.77)
ø11.4 (0.45)
ø17.3 (0.68)
NPT ½"-14
A0021966
Item Device Description Material Weight kg (lbs) Approval Option 1)

to 100 bar (1 500 psi) 400 bar (6 000 psi)
A PMP11 ASME ¼" MNPT, bore3 mm (0.12 in) 316L 0.200 (0.44) 0.240 (0.53) CRN VUJ
PMP21
B PMP11 ASME ½" MNPT, ¼" FNPT (female) 316L 0.230 (0.51) 0.260 (0.57) CRN VXJ
PMP21
C PMP11 ASME ½" MNPT, bore11.4 mm (0.45 in) 316L 0.230 (0.51) 0.270 (0.60) CRN VWJ
PMP21
Endress+Hauser 25
Process connections with Thread DIN13

isolating diaphragm
20 (0.79)
32
45 (1.77)
3 (0.12)
3 (0.12)
ø3 (0.12)
ø6 (0.24)
ø17.5 (0.69)
M20x1.5
A0021968
Description Device Material Weight kg (lbs) Option 1)

to 100 bar (1 500 psi) 400 bar (6 000 psi)
DIN 13 M20 x 1.5, EN 837, bore PMP11 316L 0.220 (0.49) 0.260 (0.57) X4J
3 mm (0.12 in) PMP21
26 Endress+Hauser
Process connections with Thread JIS B0203

flush-mounted, metal
process isolating diaphragm
32
45 (1.77)
ø21.4 (0.84)
23 (0.91)
16.5 (0.65)
ø11.4 (0.45)
ø17.3 (0.68)
R ½"
A0021970
Engineering unit mm (in). Diameter of process isolating diaphragm: 17.2 mm (0.68 in)
Description Device Material Weight kg (lbs) Option 1)

to 100 bar (1 500 psi) 400 bar (6 000 psi)
JIS B0203 R ½" (male) PMP21 316L 0.230 (0.51) 0.260 (0.57) ZJJ
Process connections with

flush-mounted, metal Thread ISO 228 G
process isolating diaphragm
A B
3.5 (0.14)
7 (0.28)
7 (0.28)
32 32
41 (1.61)
48 (1.89)
1 1
ø18 (0.71)
14 (0.55)
2 (0.08)
G ½" A 2 ø18 (0.71)

21 (0.83)
ø31.7 (1.25) G ½" A

A0021971 ø31.5 (1.24)
A0022802
Engineering unit mm (in). Diameter of process isolating diaphragm: 17.2 mm (0.68 in)
Item Device Description Seal Material Weight Option 1)
Item kg (lbs)
A PMP11 Thread ISO 228 G ½" A 1 1 FKM form seal, pre-mounted 316L 0.140 (0.31) WJJ
PMP21 DIN3852
B 2) PMP11 Thread ISO 228 G ½" A 1 FKM form seal, pre-mounted 316L 0.150 (0.33) WUJ
PMP21 O-ring seal, flush-mounted
2 FKM O-ring, pre-mounted

2) Suitable for weld-in adapter 52002643 and 52010172
Endress+Hauser 27
Materials in contact with NOTICE

process ‣ Device components in contact with the process are listed in the "Mechanical construction" and
"Ordering information" sections.
TSE Certificate of Suitability

The following applies to all device components in contact with the process:
• They do not contain any materials derived from animals.
• No additives or operating materials derived from animals are used in production or processing.
Process connections
Endress+Hauser supplies a threaded connection made of stainless steel in accordance with AISI 316L
(DIN/ EN material number 1.4404 or 1.4435). With regard to their stability-temperature property,
the materials 1.4404 and 1.4435 are grouped together under 13E0 in EN 1092-1: 2001 Tab. 18.
The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical.
Process isolating diaphragm
Description Material
Metal process isolating diaphragm AISI 316L (DIN/EN material number 1.4435)
Seals
See the specific process connection.
28 Endress+Hauser
Materials not in contact with Housing

process

1 2
3
3 6
5
A0027299
4
A0025117
7 8 9
A0027300
Item number Component part Material
1 Valve plug • Seal: NBR

• Plug: PA
• Screw: V2A
2 Cable • Pressure screw: PVDF

• Seal: TPE-V
• Cable: PUR (UL 94 V0)
3 Design element PBT/PC
4 Connection PPSU
5 M12 plug Plastic: PPSU
6 M12 plug Metal 316L (1.4404)

For Ex eC: metal housing cap
7 Pressure compensation PMP11: PBT/PC

element PMP21 standard: PBT/PC
PMP21 with Ex ec approval: 1.4404
8 Housing 316L (1.4404)
9 Nameplates Plastic foil (attached to housing) or directly lasered onto the

housing
Filling oil
Device Filling oil
PMP11 NSF-H1 synthetic oil in accordance with FDA 21 CFR 178.3570

PMP21
Cleaning Device Description Option 1)
PMP11 Cleaned from oil+grease HA

PMP21
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Service"
Endress+Hauser 29
Operability
Plug-on display PHX20 No display or other operation facility is required to operate the device. However, devices with a valve
(optional) plug can be fitted with the optional local display PHX20.
Description Option 1)
Plug-on display PHX20, IP65 RU
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Accessories"
A 1-line liquid crystal display (LCD) is used. The local display shows measured values, fault messages
and information messages. The device display can be turned in 90° steps. Depending on the
orientation of the device, it is therefore easy to read the measured values.
Technical data
Display: 4-digit, red LED display
Digit height: 7.62 mm; programmable decimal point setting
Display range: -1999 to 9999
Accuracy: 0.2% of the span ±1 digit
Electrical connection: To transmitter with 4 to 20 mA output and elbow plug DIN 43 650,
reverse polarity protection
Display power supply: Not required, powered automatically from the power loop
Voltage drop: ≤ 5 V (corresponds to load: max. 250 Ω)
Rate of conversion: 3 measurements per second
Damping: 0.3 to 20 s (configurable)
Data backup: Non-volatile EEPROM
Error message: • HI: overrange

• LO: below range
Programming: Via 2 keys, menu-guided, display range scaling, decimal point, damping,
error message
Degree of protection: IP 65
Influence of temperature on the 0.1% / 10 K

display:
Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission as per EN 50081, interference immunity as per EN

(EMC): 50082
Permitted current load: Max. 60 mA
Ambient temperature: 0 to +60 °C (+32 to +140 °F)
Housing material: Pa6 GF30 plastic, blue

Front screen made from red PMMA
Order number: 52022914
30 Endress+Hauser
Certificates and approvals

CE mark The device meets the legal requirements of the relevant EC directives. Endress+Hauser confirms that
the device has been successfully tested by applying the CE mark.
RCM-Tick marking The supplied product or measuring system meets the ACMA (Australian Communications and Media
Authority) requirements for network integrity, interoperability, performance characteristics as well
as health and safety regulations. Here, especially the regulatory arrangements for electromagnetic
compatibility are met. The products are labelled with the RCM- Tick marking on the name plate.
A0029561
EAC conformity The PMP21 and PMP23 devices meet the legal requirements of the applicable EAC directives. These
are listed in the corresponding EAC Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the EAC mark.
Approval CSA C/US General Purpose
Safety Instructions (XA) Safety Instructions (XA) are supplied with the device depending on the approval. These instructions
device.
Marine approval (pending) Device Description Option 1)
PMP21 DNV GL LE
PMP21 ABS LF
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Additional approval"
Pressure Equipment Pressure equipment with allowable pressure ≤ 200 bar (2 900 psi)
Directive 2014/68/EU (PED)
Pressure equipment (having a maximum allowable pressure PS ≤ 200 bar (2 900 psi)) can be
classified as pressurized equipment in accordance with Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU. If
the maximum allowable pressure is ≤ 200 bar (2 900 psi) and the pressurized volume of the pressure
equipment is ≤ 0.1 l, the pressure equipment is subject to the Pressure Equipment Directive (cf.
Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU, Article 4, point 3). The Pressure Equipment Directive
only requires that the pressure equipment shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with
the "sound engineering practice of a Member State".
Endress+Hauser 31
Reasons:
• Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 2014/68/EU Article 4, point 3
• Pressure equipment directive 2014/68/EU, Commission's Working Group "Pressure", Guideline
A-05 + A-06
Note:
A partial examination shall be performed for pressure instruments that are part of safety equipment
for the protection of a pipe or vessel from exceeding allowable limits (equipment with safety
function in accordance with Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU, Article 2, point 4).
Pressure equipment with allowable pressure > 200 bar (2 900 psi)
Pressure equipment designated for application in every process fluid having a pressurized volume of
<0.1 l and a max. allowable pressure PS > 200 bar (2 900 psi) shall satisfy the essential safety
requirements set out in Annex I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU. According to
Article 13 pressure equipment shall be classified by category in accordance with Annex II. The
conformity assessment of the pressure equipment shall be determined by the category I under
consideration of the above-mentioned low pressurized volume. These devices shall be provided with
CE marking.
Reasons:
• Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU, Article 13, Annex II
• Pressure equipment directive 2014/68/EU, Commission's Working Group "Pressure", Guideline
A-05
Note:
A partial examination shall be performed for pressure instruments that are part of safety equipment
for the protection of a pipe or vessel from exceeding allowable limits (equipment with safety
function in accordance with Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU, Article 2, point 4).
The following also applies:

PMP21 with threaded connection and internal process isolating diaphragm PN > 200 :
Suitable for stable gases in group 1, category I, module A
Other standards and The applicable European guidelines and standards can be found in the relevant EU Declarations of
guidelines Conformity. The following were also applied:
DIN EN 60770 (IEC 60770):

Transmitters for use in industrial process control systems Part 1: Methods for performance
evaluation
Methods for evaluating the performance of transmitters for control and regulation in industrial
process control systems.
DIN 16086:
Electrical pressure measuring instruments, pressure sensors, pressure transmitters, pressure
measuring instruments, concepts, specifications on data sheets
Procedure for writing specifications in data sheets for electrical pressure measuring instruments,
pressure sensors and pressure transmitters.
EN 61326-X:
EMC product family standard for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use.
EN 60529:
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
NAMUR - User association of automation technology in process industries.

NE21 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) of Industrial Process and Laboratory Control
Equipment.
NE43 - Standardization of the Signal Level for the Failure Information of Digital Transmitters.
32 Endress+Hauser
NE44 - Standardization of Status Indicators on PCT Instruments with the Help of Light Emitting
Diodes
NE53 - Software of Field Devices and Signal-processing Devices with Digital Electronics
CRN approval A CRN approval is available for some device versions. A CRN-approved process connection with a
CSA approval must be ordered for a CRN-approved device. The CRN-approved devices are assigned
the registration number 0F18141.5C.
Ordering information: Product Configurator, order code for "Process connection" (the CRN process
connections are indicated appropriately in the "Mechanical construction" section.)
Calibration unit Description Option 1)
Sensor range; % A
Sensor range; mbar/bar B
Sensor range; kPa/MPa C
Sensor range; psi F
Customer-specific; see additional spec. J
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Calibration; unit"
Calibration Description Option 1)
3-point certificate of calibration F3
1) Product Configurator order code for "Calibration"
Inspection certificates Device Description Option 1)
PMP21 3.1 Material documentation, wetted metal parts, EN10204-3.1 inspection certificate JA
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Test, Certificate"
Ordering information
Detailed ordering information is available from the following sources:
• In the Product Configurator on the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com -> Click "Corporate"
-> Select your country -> Click "Products" -> Select the product using the filters and search field ->
Open product page -> The "Configure" button to the right of the product image opens the Product
Configurator.
• From your Endress+Hauser Sales Center: www.addresses.endress.com
Product Configurator - the tool for individual product configuration
• Up-to-the-minute configuration data
• Depending on the device: Direct input of measuring point-specific information such as
measuring range or operating language
• Automatic verification of exclusion criteria
• Automatic creation of the order code and its breakdown in PDF or Excel output format
• Ability to order directly in the Endress+Hauser Online Shop
Scope of delivery • Measuring device

• Optional accessories
• Brief Operating Instructions
• Certificates
Endress+Hauser 33
Accessories
Weld-in adapter Various weld-in adapters are available for installation in vessels or pipes.
Device Description Option 1) Order number
PMP21 Weld-in adapter G½, 316L QA 52002643
PMP21 Weld-in adapter G½, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 material, QB 52010172

inspection certificate
PMP21 Weld-in tool adapter G½, brass QC 52005082
If installed horizontally and weld-in adapters with a leakage hole are used, ensure that the leakage
hole is pointing down. This allows leaks to be detected as quickly as possible.
Plug-on display PHX20 →  30
M12 plug connectors Connector Degree of protection Material Option 1) Order number
M12 IP67 • Union nut: Cu Sn/Ni R1 52006263

(0.8)
ø20
53 (2.09)
A0024475
M12 90 degrees IP67 • Union nut: GD Zn/Ni RZ 52010285

with 5m (16 ft) cable • Body: PUR
• Cable: PVC
(1.1)
28
³40 (1.57)
A0024476
M12 90 degrees IP67 • Union nut: GD Zn/Ni RM 71114212

28
(1.1)
(1.38)
35
20 (0.79)
A0024478
34 Endress+Hauser
Documentation
Field of Activities Pressure measurement, powerful instruments for process pressure, differential pressure, level and
flow:
FA00004P/00/EN
Technical Information • TI00241F/00/DE: EMV test procedures

• TI00426F/00/DE: Weld-in adapters, process adapters and flanges (overview)
Operating Instructions BA01271P/00/EN
Brief Operating Instructions KA01164P/00/EN
Safety Instructions (XA) Safety Instructions (XA) are supplied with the device depending on the approval. These instructions
device.
Endress+Hauser 35
*71336269*
71336269
www.addresses.endress.com
Appendix 07 – Information level switch
Page 28 of 31
Soliphant T FTM21
R 1½, 1½ - 11½ NPT
de - Schiebemuffe, druckbeaufschlagt
en - Sliding Sleeve, pressurised
fr - Manchon coulissant, pressurisé
es - Manguito deslizante, presurizado
it - Manicotto scorrevole, per impieghi in pressione
nl - Schuifmof, drukbestendig
KA237F/00/a6/09.04
52025640
de - Inhalt en - Contents fr - Sommaire
Geräte-Identifikation 3 Device identification 3 Dénomination et structure 3
Technische Daten 4 Technical data 4 Caractéristiques techniques 4
Montieren 5 Mount 5 Montage 5
Schaltpunkt verstellen 11 Reset switch point 11 Réglage point de commutation 11
es - Indice it - Indice nl - Inhoud

Identificación del equipo 3 Identificazione dello strumento 3 Instrument-identificatie 3
Datos técnicos 4 Dati tecnici 4 Technische gegevens 4
Montaje 5 Installazione 5 Montage 5
Cambio del punto de conmutación 11 Impostare il punto di intervento 11 Schakelhoogte verstellen 11
grau = zu bewegendes Teil

grey = part which should be moved
gris = partie à bouger
gris = parte que debería ser cambiada
grigio = parte che dovrebbe essere mossa
grijs = te bewegen onderdeel
2 Endress+Hauser
de - Geräte-Identifikation
en - Device Identification
AISI 316L
fr - Dénomination
es - Identificación del equipo
it - Identificazione
dello strumento
nl - Instrument-identificatie
52023312: R 1½,
AISI 316L
52025090: 1½ - 11½ NPT,

AISI 316L
de - Erforderliches Werkzeug
Gabelschlüssel SW 60
en - Tools required
Innensechskantschlüssel SW 5 fr - Outils requis
Spanner 60 AF es - Herramientas necesarias
Allen key 5 AF
Clé à fourche de 60 it - Utensili richiesti
Clé Allen de 5 nl - Benodigd gereedschap
Llave para tuercas 60 AF
Llave Allen 5 AF
5 mm
Chiave 60 AF ~ 3/16 in
Brugola 5 AF 60
Sleutelwijdte 60 ~ 2 3mm
/8 in
Inbussleutel 5
Endress+Hauser 3
de - Technische Daten
ø70 M 6x25 / SW 5
Abmessungen in mm 5 AF
en - Technical Data
Dimensions in mm
fr - Caractéristiques techniques
Dimensions en mm
~70
es - Datos técnicos
Dimensiones en mm SW 60
60 AF
it - Dati tecnici
Dimensioni in mm
nl - Technische gegevens
25
22
Afmetingen in mm
R 1½ 1½ - 11½ NPT
48x55
DIN 7603-A
Elastomer-Faser
Elastomer fibre
Fibre élastomère
Fibra de elastómero Graphit
Elastomero Graphite
Elastomeer-fiber Graphite
Grafito
Grafite
Grafiet
100 mm = 3.94 in
4 Endress+Hauser
de - Montieren
1. Einschrauben
en - Mount
Screw tight
fr - Monter
Visser
es - Montaje
Roscar firmemente
P TF
E
it - Montaggio
Te R
flon Avvitare
nl - Montage
R 1½,
1½ - 11½ NPT
Inschroeven
2.
R 1½
52023313
1½ - 11½ NPT
52025090
Endress+Hauser 5
de - Oberteil abnehmen
en - Remove top
1. 2. 3.
fr - Enlever la partie supérieure drehen kräftig ziehen
turn pull away
es - Retirar la parte superior tourner tirer fortement
it - Rimuovere la parte superiore girar tirar
girare togliere
nl - Bovendeel afnemen draaien flink trekken
= Bohrung
= Bore
= Perçage
= Orificio ~30 °
= Forare
= Boring
= Gewinde
= Thread
= Filetage
= Paso de tornillo
= Filettare
= Draad
6 Endress+Hauser
de - Einstellhöhe h inklusive
x (aktivem Schaltbereich) und y
markieren
en - Mark height h including
x (active switch range) and y
fr - Marquer la hauteur de réglage h
y compris x (plage de commutation
Markierung active) et y
Mark
Marquage
es - Marcar la altura h, incluyendo
~75 mm
(~3 in)
Marca x (el punto de conmutación) y y
Segnare it - Marcare altezza h includendo
Markering
x (la zona attiva di commutazione)
ey
y nl - Instelhoogte h inclusief
x (actief schakelbereik) en y
Hinweis! markeren
Note!
Remarque!
h
h
Nota! Schaltpunkt (schüttgutabhängig)
Nota!
Attentie! Switchpoint (depends on product)
= 60 mm
(2.4 in)
Point de commutation
h ≥ 280 mm (en fonction du produit)
Punto de conmutación
(dependiendo de los sólidos)
x
Punto di commutazione
(dipendente dai solidi)
Schakelpunt (stortgoederen)
Endress+Hauser 7
de - Oberteil aufsetzen,
Soliphant einschieben
en - Position top,
push in Soliphant * Markierung oder Anschlag, z.B. Schlauchschelle
Mark or stop, e.g. hose clip
fr - Mettre en place la partie Marquage ou butée, par ex. collier
supérieure, Marca o stop, ej. abrazadera del tubo
insérer le Soliphant Segnare o fermare, p. e. con una fascetta
Markering of stop, b. v. slangenklem
es - Insertar de nuevo la parte superior,
introducir el Soliphant
it - Riassemblare,
inserire il Soliphant
nl - Bovendeel plaatsen,
Soliphant inschuiven
3.
1.
2.
8 Endress+Hauser
de - Oberteil einrasten
1. 2. 3. en - Snap top in place
fr - Encliqueter la partie supérieure
es - Colocar de nuevo la parte superior
it - Inserire la parte superiore
nl - Bovendeel positioneren
~30 °
~30 °
Endress+Hauser 9
de - Oberteil festschrauben
en - Screw top tight
1. 2. 3.
fr - Visser la partie supérieure Schrauben festziehen warten Schrauben nachziehen
tighten screws wait tighten again
es - Roscar los tornillos firmemente serrer les vis attendre resserrer les vis
it - Avvitare la parte superiore apretar tornillos esperar reapretar tornillos
avvitare stretto aspettare stringere ancora
nl - Bovendeel vastschroeven schroeven aandraaien wachten schroeven natrekken
9…10 Nm 9…10 Nm
(6.7…7.5 ft lbs) (6.7…7.5 ft lbs)
1…2 h
10 Endress+Hauser
de - Schaltpunkt verstellen
Behälter drucklos!!!
pe = 0 bar / psi pe = 0 bar / psi
en - Reset switch point
Tank not under pressure!!!
fr - Réglage du point
de commutation
Réservoir sans pression!!!
es - Cambio del punto
de conmutación
El tanque no debe estar
bajo presión!!!
it - Impostare il punto
di intervento
Serbatoio non in pressione!!!
1. nl - Schakelpunt verstellen
Tank drukloos maken!!!
2.
Endress+Hauser 11
de - Oberteil lösen
en - Remove top
1. 2. 3.
fr - Enlever la partie supérieure
es - Retirar la parte superior
it - Togliere la parte superiore
nl - Bovendeel demonteren
= Bohrung
= Bore
= Perçage
= Orificio ~30 °
= Forare
= Boring
= Gewinde
= Thread
= Filetage
= Paso de tornillo
= Filettare
= Draad
12 Endress+Hauser
de - Soliphant herausziehen
1. 2. Neue Schaltpunkt- en - Pull out Soliphant
einstellung
siehe Seiten 6 bis 9 fr - Retirer le Soliphant
Reset switch point es - Extraer el Soliphant
see pages 6 to 9 it - Togliere il Soliphant
Nouveau réglage nl - Soliphant uitnemen
point de commutation
voir pages 6 à 9
Cambio del punto
de conmutación
ver pág. 6 a 9
Impostare il punto
di intervento
vds. da pag. 6 a 9
Nieuw schakelpunt
instellen
zie pagina 6 tot 9
Endress+Hauser 13
T = –40 °C…+150 °C (–60 °F…+300 °F)
pe = –1 bar…+25 bar (–14.5 psi…+360 psi)
M = 1.79 kg (3.94 lbs)
14 Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser 15
www.endress.com/worldwide
KA237F/00/a6/09.04, 52025640, CCS/FM6 52025640

Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21

de - Füllstandgrenzschalter
en - Level Limit Switch
fr - Détecteur de niveau
es - Detector de nivel
it - Interruttore di livello
nl - Niveauschakelaar
KA227F/00/a6/09.04
52022842
de - Inhalt en - Contents fr - Sommaire
Sicherheitshinweise 4 Notes on Safety 4 Conseils de sécurité 4
Behandlung 6 Handling 6 Manipulation 6
Geräte-Identifikation 8 Device Identification 8 Dénomination 8
Verwendung 12 Application 12 Utilisation 12
Messeinrichtung 13 Measuring system 13 Ensemble de détection
Einbau 14 Installation 14 de niveau 13
Einstellungen 18 Setting- up 18 Montage 14
Lichtsignale 20 Light signals 20 Réglage 18
Anschluss 21 Connections 21 Signaux lumineux 20
Wartung 26 Maintenance 26 Raccordement 21
Technische Daten 27 Technical Data 27 Maintenance 26
Schiebemuffen 28 Sliding sleeves 28 Caractéristiques techniques 27
Fehlersuche 30 Trouble-shooting 31 Manchons coulissants 28
Ersatzteile 36 Spare parts 36 Recherche de défauts 32
Ergänzende Dokumentation 37 Supplementary Documentation 37 Pièces de rechange 36
Documentation
complémentaire 37
" Achtung!
= verboten;
führt zu fehlerhaftem Betrieb
" Caution!
= forbidden;
leads to incorrect
" Attention!
= interdit; peut provoquer
des dysfonctionnements
oder Zerstörung. operation or destruction. ou la destruction.
2 Endress+Hauser
es - Indice it - Indice nl - Inhoud
Notas sobre seguridad 5 Note sulla sicurezza 5 Veiligheidsinstructies 5
Modo de empleo 6 Accorgimenti 6 Behandeling 6
Identificación del equipo 8 Identificazione dello strumento 8 Instrument-identificatie 8
Aplicación 12 Applicazione 12 Toepassing 12
Sistema de medida 13 Sistema di misura 13 Meetopstelling 13
Montaje 14 Montaggio 14 Inbouw 14
Ajuste 18 Messa in servizio 18 Instellingen 18
Señales luminosas 20 Segnali luminosi 20 LED signalen 20
Conexiones 21 Collegamenti elettrici 21 Aansluiting 21
Mantenimiento 26 Manutenzione 26 Onderhoud 26
Datos técnicos 27 Dati tecnici 27 Technische gegevens 27
Manguitos deslizantes 28 Manicotto scorrevole 28 Schuifmof 28
Identificación de fallos 33 Individuazione e eliminazione Fout zoeken 35
Repuestos 36 delle anomalie 34 Reserve-onderdelen 36
Documentación suplementaria 37 Ricambi 36 Aanvullende documentatie 37
Documentazione
supplementare 37
" Atención!
= Prohibido; peligro
de mal funcionamiento
" Attenzione!
= Vietato; pericolo
di malfunzionamento
" Opgelet!
= verboden;
leidt tot foutieve werking
o de destrucción. o di distruzione. of storing.
Endress+Hauser 3
de - Sicherheitshinweise en - Notes on Safety fr - Conseils de sécurité
Der Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21 The Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21 is Le Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21
ist ein Füllstandgrenzschalter für a level limit switch for fine to est un détecteur de niveau pour
fein- bis grobkörnige Schüttgüter. coarse-grained bulk solids. produits solides en vrac de faible à
Bei unsachgemäßem Einsatz If used incorrectly it is possible that grosse granulométrie.
können Gefahren von ihm application-related dangers may Il peut être source de danger en cas
ausgehen. arise. d’utilisation non conforme aux
Das Gerät darf nur von The level limit switch may be prescriptions.
qualifiziertem und installed, connected, L’appareil ne doit être installé,
autorisiertem Fachpersonal commissioned, operated and raccordé, mis en service et
unter strenger Beachtung dieser maintained by qualified and entretenu que par un personnel
Betriebsanleitung, authorised personnel only, qualifié et autorisé, qui tiendra
der einschlägigen Normen, under strict observance of these compte des indications contenues
der gesetzlichen Vorschriften operating instructions, dans la présente mise en service,
und der Zertifikate any relevant standards, des normes en vigueur et des
(je nach Anwendung) legal requirements, and, where certificats disponibles
eingebaut, angeschlossen, appropriate, the certificate. (selon l’application).
in Betrieb genommen und Install an easily accessible power Installer un commutateur réseau à
gewartet werden. switch in the proximity of the proximité immédiate de l’appareil,
In der Gebäudeinstallation ist ein device. en veillant à ce qu’il soit facilement
Netzschalter für das Gerät leicht Mark the power switch as a accessible.
erreichbar in dessen Nähe zu disconnector for the device. Marquer ce commutateur comme
installieren. prise de coupure de l’appareil.
Er ist als Trennvorrichtung für das
Gerät zu kennzeichnen.
4 Endress+Hauser
es - Notas sobre seguridad it - Note sulla sicurezza nl - Veiligheidsinstructies
El Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21 Il sensore Soliphant T FTM20, De Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21
sólo se puede usar como detector FTM21 può essere usato solamente mag alleen gebruikt worden als
de nivel límite con sólidos finos y come interruttore di livello per niveauschakelaar voor poeders tot
sólidos granulados. materiali solidi di grandezza da grofkorrelig stortgoed.
Su empleo inapropiado puede medio fine a grezza. Indien niet correct gebruikt
resultar peligroso. Un'installazione non corretta può kunnen gevaarlijke situaties
El equipo deberá ser montado, determinare pericolo. ontstaan.
conectado, instalado y mantenido Lo strumento può essere montato Het instrument alleen door
única y exclusivamente por solamente da personale gekwalificeerd en
personal cualificado y qualificato ed autorizzato. geautoriseerd personeel laten
autorizado, bajo rigurosa La messa in esercizio e la inbouwen, aansluiten,
observación de las presentes manutenzione devono rispettare le in bedrijf nemen en onderhouden.
instrucciones de servicio, indicazioni di collegamento, Neem de instructies in deze
de las normativas y le norme e i certificati di Inbedrijfstellingsvoorschriften,
legislaciones vigentes, seguito riportati. de desbetreffende normen,
así como de los certificados Installare un interruttore per de wettelijke voorschriften en
(dependiendo de la aplicación). l'alimentazione in prossimità del eventuele certificaten in acht.
Instalar un interruptor de fácil dispositivo. Installeer een makkelijk bereikbare
acceso en las proximidades del Marcare l'interuttore come voedingschakelaar in de nabijheid
equipo. disconnessione del dispositivo. van het instrument.
Identificar el interruptor como Kenmerk de voedingschakelaar
desconectador del equipo. specifiek voor het instrument.
Endress+Hauser 5
de - Behandlung
Am Gehäuse, Flansch oder
Verlängerungsrohr anfassen.
en - Handling
Hold by housing, flange or
extension tube.
fr - Manipulation
Tenir par le boîtier, la bride ou
le tube prolongateur.
es - Modo de empleo
Coger por el cabezal, brida o
tubo de extensión.
it - Accorgimenti
Afferrare la custodia, per la flangia
o per il tubo di estensione.
nl - Behandeling
Vastpakken via behuizing,
flens of verlengbuis.
6 Endress+Hauser
de - Nicht verbiegen
Nicht kürzen
Nicht verlängern
en - Do not bend
Do not shorten
Do not lengthen
fr - Ne pas déformer
Ne pas raccourcir
Ne pas rallonger
es - No torcer
No acortar
No alargar
it - Non stringere o allargare
Non accorciare o allungare
Non piegare
nl - Niet verbuigen
Niet inkorten
Niet verlengen
Endress+Hauser 7
8
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Soliphant T
strumento
Order Code
fr - Dénomination
FTM20– # # # # #
it - Identificazione dello
en - Device Identification
de - Geräte-Identifikation
nl - Instrument-identificatie
es - Identificación del equipo
A 1
C
*
CSA General Purpose, CSA C US
D CSA DIP+FM, DIP
Y 2
4
*
ATEX II 1/3 D
A DIN 2999 R1 316L

G DIN 2999 R 1½ 316L
M ANSI NPT 1¼ 316L
N ANSI NPT 1½ 316L
Y 2
*
2 FEM22; PNP, 10... 45 V DC

4 FEM24; DPDT, 19...253 V AC/55 V DC
9 2
*
22. . . . 25
Endress+Hauser
2 F16, IP66/67; M20 F16
3 F16, IP66/67; NPT ½ PBT
4 F16, IP66/67; G½
Endress+Hauser
5 F18, IP66/67; M20
6 F18, IP66/67; NPT ¾
7 F18, IP66/67; G½
2
F18
9 Alu
*
A Grundausführung / Basic version / Version de base /

Equipo estándar / Equipaggiamento basico / Basisversie
Y 2
*
1 ohne / without / sans / sin / senza / zonder

*
2 andere / others / autres / otros / altri / andere
*
9
10
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Soliphant T
Order Code
FTM21– # # # # # #
A 1
C
*
CSA General Purpose, CSA C US
D CSA DIP+FM, DIP
Y 2
4
*
ATEX II 1/3 D
A DIN 2999 R1 316L

G DIN 2999 R 1½ 316L
M ANSI NPT 1¼ 316L
N ANSI NPT 1½ 316L
Y 2
*
2 500 mm
3 1000 mm
4 1500 mm
6 20 inch
7 40 inch
8 60 inch
9 2
*
Endress+Hauser
2 FEM 22; PNP, 10... 45 V DC
4 FEM 24; DPDT, 19...253 V AC/55 V DC
9 2
Endress+Hauser
*
22. . . . 25
F16
2 F16, IP66/67; M20 PBT
3 F16, IP66/67; NPT ½
4 F16, IP66/67; G½
5 F18, IP66/67; M20
6 F18, IP66/67; NPT ¾
7 F18, IP66/67; G½ F18
9 2 Alu
*
A Grundausführung / Basic version / Version de base /

Equipo estándar / Equipaggiamento basico / Basisversie
Y 2
*
1 ohne / without / sans / sin / senza / zonder

*
2 andere / others / autres / otros / altri / andere
*
11
de - Verwendung
Grenzstanddetektion in
Schüttgütern
en - Application
Level limit detection in solids
fr - Utilisation
Détection de niveau dans les
solides
es - Aplicación
Detección de nivel en sólidos
it - Applicazione
Controllo livello nei solidi
nl - Toepassing *
Niveaudetectie in vaste stoffen
*
Schutzdach/protective roof/ **
auvent de protection/tejado protector/
tettuccio protettivo/beschermdakje
oder / or / ou / o / o / of
**
Schutzrohr/protective pipe/
tube de protection/tubo protector/
tubo protettivo/beschermbuis
12 Endress+Hauser
de - Messeinrichtung
Order code:
FTM20 - # # # # # für direkten Anschluss
FTM21 - # # # # # # en - Measuring system
for direct connection
fr - Ensemble de détection
de niveau
pour raccordement direct
Elektronikeinsätze es - Sistema de medida
Electronic inserts para conexión directa
Electronique FEM22 (2) 10... 45 V DC
Electrónica FEM24 (4) 19...253 V AC it - Sistema di misura
Inserti elettronici 19... 55 V DC per connessione diretta
Elektronica-insert
nl - Meetopstelling
voor directe aansluiting
*) *) Externe Last
External load
Charge externe
Carga externa
Carico esterno
Externe belasting
…
Endress+Hauser 13
de - Einbau
Einbauort in Abhängigkeit vom MAX
Schüttgutkegel/Medium
en - Installation
Place of installation depends on
the cone of the bulk solids and the
medium
fr - Montage
Lieu de montage en fonction de
l'angle de talutage/du produit
es - Montaje
El montaje depende del cono que
forma el sólido/producto
it - Montaggio
Montaggio in funzione della forma
del cono del materiale solido e del MIN
mezzo
nl - Inbouw
Inbouw afhankelijk van storthoek/
medium
14 Endress+Hauser
de - Ansatzbildung berücksichtigen.
en - Consider build-up.
fr - Tenir compte du colmatage.
es - Tener en cuenta las adherencias.
it - Tenere conto dei depositi.
nl - Rekening houden met aangroei.
*
*
* Abstand! / Distance! / Distance! / ¡Distancia! / Distanza! / Afstand!
Endress+Hauser 15
de - Soliphant einschrauben.
Nicht am Gehäuse drehen! NPT 1¼ - 11½ (SW 1¾"), NPT 1½ - 11½ (SW 2"),
R1 (SW 41) R 1½ (SW 50)
en - Screw Soliphant into process
connection.
Don’t use housing to turn!
fr - Visser le Soliphant.
Ne pas se servir du boîtier!
es - Roscar el Soliphant a la conexión
a proceso.
No girar el cabezal!
it - Avvitare il Soliphant all'attacco A
al processo.
Allo scopo non utilizzare la P T FE
custodia. TE FLON
nl - Schroef de Soliphant in de
procesaansluiting.
Draai hierbij niet aan de
behuizing!
16 Endress+Hauser
de - Kabeleinführung ausrichten
F16 (Polyester)
en - Cable gland orientation
fr - Orientation de l’entrée de câble
es - Ajuste del prensaestopa
it - Posizionamento del passacavo
nl - Kabelinvoer uitrichten
F18 (Aluminium)
Endress+Hauser 17
de - Einstellungen
Minimum-/Maximum-
Sicherheitsschaltung
en - Setting-up
Minimum/maximum
fail-safe mode
fr - Réglage
Sécurité minimum/maximum
es - Ajuste Max.
Conmutador de seguridad
mín./máx.
it - Messa in servizio
Max. MAX
Selezione della modalità di MIN
sicurezza min./max.
nl - Instellingen U= 0 V
Minimum/maximum
veiligheidsschakeling
Min.
MAX
MIN
Min.
18 Endress+Hauser
de - Dichte des Schüttgutes.
FEM22, FEM24
Schüttgewicht gemessen
in g/l.
en - Density of the bulk solids.
Piled weight measured in g/l.
fr - Densité du produit.
Densité mesurée en g/l.
es - Densidad del sólido.
Standard / Standard / Standard / Unidad de medida en g/l.
Estándar / Standard / Standaard
it - Densità del materiale solido.
Peso misurata in g/l.
nl - Dichtheid van het stortgoed.
>400g/ l Stortgoed gemeten in g/l.
U= 0 V
>400g/l *
*
unempfindlicher gegen Ansatz /
>200g/ l less sensitive to build-up /
moins sensible aux dépôts /
Menos sensibilidad a las adherencias /
>200g/l meno sensibile ai depositi /
ongevoelig voor aangroei
Endress+Hauser 19
de - Lichtsignale
Füllstand variieren
en - Light signals Vary level
Varier le niveau FEM
fr - Signaux lumineux
Nivel variable
es - Señales luminosas Variare livello
Niveau variëren
it - Segnali luminosi
nl - LED signalen
GN YE
Leuchtdioden / LEDs / DEL / LEDs / LED / LED’s
Betrieb / Stand-by / Fonctionnement /

Reposo / Attesa / stand-by
Schaltzustand / Switching status / Etat de commutation /

Estado conexión / Stato di commutazione / schakelstand
leuchtet / on / allumée / iluminado / on / aan
aus / off / éteinte / apagado / off / uit
Ausgangssignal / Output signal / Signal de sortie /

Señal de salida / Segnale uscita / uitgangssignaal
20 Endress+Hauser
de - Anschluss
Nationale Normen und Vorschriften beachten!
Note national regulations! en - Connections
Respecter les normes et directives nationales en vigueur! fr - Raccordement
Considere reglamentaciones nacionales es - Conexiones
Osservare le norme nazionali!
it - Collegamenti elettrici
Nationale voorschriften in acht nemen!
nl - Aansluiting
FEM…
M 20x1.5
ø5…9 mm
(ø0.2…0.35 in)
max. 2.5 mm²

(max. AWG 14)
max. 4 mm²
(max. AWG 12)
3 mm
(1/8 in)
Endress+Hauser 21
de - Anschluss FEM22
FEM22
Gleichstromanschluss (PNP)
en - Connections FEM22 auch für DI-Module
DC connection (PNP) also for DI modules
fr - Raccordement FEM22 également pour des modules DI
Courant continu (PNP) 1 2 3 también para módulos DI
(+) anche per DI modules
es - Conexiones FEM22
ook voor DI-module
Alimentación CC (PNP)
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEM22 EN 61131-2
Collegamento CC (PNP)
nl - Aansluiting FEM22
Gelijkspanningsaansluiting (PNP)
F
0.5 A R
R = externe Last
external load
charge externe
carga exterior
carico esterno
L+ L– IL externe belasting
U…
– 10 V…45 V (DC)
Imax. 350 mA
Umax. 45 V
22 Endress+Hauser
de - Funktion FEM22
FEM22
en - Function FEM22
fr - Fonction FEM22
es - Funcionamiento FEM22
12 3 it - Funzione FEM22
nl - Functie FEM22
GN YE FEM22
IL +
L+ 1 3 (L–)
Max. ∆U < 3 V R
< 100 µA
L+ 1 3 (L–)
R
IL +
L+ 1 3 (L–)
∆U < 3 V R
Min. < 100 µA

L+ 1 3 (L–)
R
1 < 100 µA
+ 1 3 –
U 0V
2 R
Endress+Hauser 23
de - Anschluss FEM24
FEM24
Allstromanschluss
Relaisausgang
en - Connections FEM24
Universal connection
Relay output 1 2 3 4 56 7 8
fr - Raccordement FEM24
Tous courants
Sortie relais
es - Conexiones FEM24
Conexión universal F
Salida por relé 0.5 A
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEM24

Collegamento corrente universale
Uscita relè
nl - Aansluiting FEM24
Universele spanningsaansluiting NO C NC NO C NC
Relaisuitgang a u r a u r
L1 N PE
(Ground)
* *
U~ 19…253 V (AC) U~ max. 253 V, I~ max. 6 A

P~ max. 1500 VA, cos ϕ = 1
L+ L–
U–
… 19… 55 V (DC)
* P~ max. 750 VA, cos ϕ > 0.7
I–
… max. 6 A, U–
… < 30 V
I–
… max. 0.2 A, U–
… < 125 V
24 Endress+Hauser
de - Funktion FEM24
FEM24
en - Function FEM24
fr - Fonction FEM24
es - Funcionamiento FEM24
12 345678 it - Funzione FEM24
nl - Functie FEM24
GN YE FEM24
Max.
3 4 5 6 7 8
3 4 5 6 7 8
3 4 5 6 7 8
Min.
3 4 5 6 7 8
1
U 0V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Endress+Hauser 25
de - Wartung
Dicke Krusten entfernen
en - Maintenance
Removal of thick encrustation
fr - Maintenance
Enlever les dépôts et incrustations
es - Mantenimiento
Eliminación de adherencias
it - Manutenzione
Rimozione di depositi consistenti
nl - Onderhoud
Aangroei verwijderen
Nicht besteigen!
Don’t use as a step!
Ne pas marcher
sur les lames vibrantes!
No usar como peldaño!
Non usare come scalino!
Niet op staan!
26 Endress+Hauser
T1
de - Technische Daten
°C
Umgebungstemperatur T1
T1
70 Betriebstemperatur T2
50
en - Technical Data
Ambient temperature T1
Process temperature T2
T2*
fr - Caractéristiques
0
–40 0 90 150 T2* techniques
°C Température ambiante T1
x °C = (1.8 x + 32) °F Température de process T2
–40
es - Datos técnicos
Betriebsdruck * pe Prozessanschluss / Zubehör
Temperatura ambiente T1
Process pressure * T2 Process connection / accessories Temperatura de proceso T2
Pression de process Raccord process / accessoires
Presión de proceso Conexión a proceso / accesorios it - Dati tecnici
Pressione di servizio Connessione al processo / accessori Temperatura ambiente T1
Procesdruk Procesaansluiting / accessoires
Temperatura di servizio T2
pe = max. 25 bar (363 psi) *
nl - Technische gegevens
Schüttgewicht Korngröße Omgevingstemperatuur T1
Solids density Grain size Procestemperatuur T2
Densité apparente Granulométrie
Densidad de las mercancías Tamaño del grano
Densità dei solidi Granulometria grossa
Stortgewicht Korrelgrootte
5l 1.0
kg ø max. 25 mm
min. 200 g/l (max. 1.0 in)
Endress+Hauser 27
de - Schiebemuffe
für drucklosen Betrieb, IP65
en - Sliding sleeve R 1½ NPT 1½ - 11½
AISI 316L AISI 316L
for unpressurised operation, IP65 52023313 52024578
fr - Manchon coulissant
pour applications sans pression,
IP65
10
es - Manguito deslizante
para operación sin presión, IP65
21.5
57.5
it - Manicotto scorrevole
per impieghi privi di pressione,
24.5
21
IP65 M6 (3x)
nl - Schuifmof G 1¼ R 1½
voor drukloze toepassing, IP65 NPT 1½ - 11½
SW 50
SW 50
50 AF
50 AF
ø29.4 ø29.4
pe = 0 bar
(pe = 0 psi)
max. 150 °C
(max. 300 °F)
28 Endress+Hauser
de - Schiebemuffe,
druckbeaufschlagt
R 1½ NPT 1½ - 11½ en - Sliding sleeve,
AISI 316L AISI 316L
52023312 52025090 pressurised
fr - Manchon coulissant,
pressurisé
es - Manguito deslizante,
presurizado
M 6x25 / SW 5
ø70 5 AF it - Manicotto scorrevole,
per impieghi in pressione
nl - Schuifmof,
drukbestendig
~70 SW 60
60 AF
25
22
pe = 25 bar
(pe = 360 psi) R 1½ NPT 1½ - 11½
max. 150 °C
(max. 300 °F)
Endress+Hauser 29
de - Fehlersuche Fehlfunktion Ursache Maßnahme
Schaltet nicht Versorgungsspannung fehlt Versorgung prüfen
Signalleitung defekt Signalleitung prüfen
Elektronikeinsatz defekt Austauschen
Dichte des Schüttgutes zu gering Am Elektronikeinsatz Dichte auf
>200 g/l einstellen; siehe Seite 19
Stab verkrustet Stab säubern
FEM24: FEM24 austauschen;
Kontakte verschweißt Sicherung in den Kontaktstromkreis
(nach einem Kurzschluss)
Schaltet falsch Minimum-/Maximum- Am Elektronikeinsatz
Sicherheitsschaltung vertauscht Sicherheitsschaltung richtig einstellen
Fehlschaltung, Extreme Funkstörung Verbindungskabel abschirmen
sporadisch Extreme Vibrationen Sensor mechanisch entkoppeln,
Schwingstab um 90° drehen
Wasser im Gehäuse Entleeren;
Deckel und Kabeldurchführungen fest
zuschrauben
FEM22: Last, (Leitungs-) Kapazität verringern
Ausgang überlastet
30 Endress+Hauser
Fault Reason Remedy en - Trouble-shooting
Does not switch No power Check power
Faulty signal line Check signal line
Faulty electronic insert Exchange
Density of bulk solids too low Set density to >200 g/l at
electronic insert; see page 19
Rod encrusted Clean rod
FEM24: Exchange FEM24;
Contacts welded together put fuse in contact circuit
(after short-circuit)
Switches incorrectly Min-/Max-fail-safe mode set wrongly Set correct mode at electronic insert
Sporadic Extreme RFI Use screened cable
faulty switching Extreme vibration Decouple sensor mechanically,
turn oscillating rod 90°
Water in housing Drain;
Screw cover and cable bushings tight
FEM22: Reduce load, (cable) capacitance
Output overloaded
Endress+Hauser 31
fr - Recherche de défauts Défaut Cause Mesure
Ne commute pas Tension d’alimentation manquante Vérifier la tension d’alimentation
Câble de signal défectueux Vérifier le câble de signal
Electronique défectueuse Remplacer
Densité du produit trop faible Régler la densité sur >200 g/l sur
l’électronique; voir page 19
Lames vibrantes encrassées Nettoyer les lames vibrantes
FEM24: Remplacer FEM24;
contacts soudés (après un court-circuit) fusible dans le circuit courant
Mauvaise Sécurité min/max inversée Régler correctement le circuit de sécurité
commutation sur l’électronique
Mauvaise Parasites puissants Blinder le câble de liaison
commutation, Vibrations importantes Découpler le capteur mécaniquement,
sporadique tourner la fourche de 90°
Eau dans le boîtier Vidanger;
Visser fermement le couvercle et les
entrées de câble
FEM22: Réduire la charge et la capacité(de ligne)
surcharge de la sortie
32 Endress+Hauser
Fallo Causa Solución es - Identificación de fallos
No conmuta No hay alimentación Comprobar alimentación
Señal defectuosa Comprobar cable de señal
Electrónica defectuosa Cambio
Densidad del producto demasiado baja Fijar densidad a >200 g/l en la
electrónica; ver pág. 19
Sonda con adherencias Limpiar la varilla
FEM24: Cambiar FEM24;
Contactos soldados juntos poner fusible en el circuito de contacto
(después del corto circuito)
Conmuta El modo de fallo mín. / máx. está mal Ajustar el modo correcto en la electrónica
incorrectamente ajustado
Fallos de conmutación RFI extremo Utilizar cable apantallado
esporádicos Vibraciones extremas Desacoplar el instrumento
mecánicamente,
girar las horquillas 90°
Agua en el cabezal Drenaje;
Roscar la cubierta y el prensaestopas
firmemente
FEM22: Reducir carga, capacidad (cable)
Salida con sobretensión
Endress+Hauser 33
it - Individuazione e Guasto Motivo Rimedio
eliminazione delle Non commuta Mancanza alimentazione Controllare l’alimentazione
anomalie Linea segnale guasta Controllare segnale linea
Inserto elettronico guasto Sostituire
Densità del materiale solido troppo bassa Impostare la densità a >200 g/l
sull’inserto elettronico; vds. pag. 19
Asta incrostata Pulire l’asta
FEM24: Sostituire FEM24;
contatti saldati insieme mettere il fusibile nel circuito di contatto
(dopo il corto circuito)
Commuta non Modalità di sicurezza Impostare la modalità corretta
correttamente min-/max-impostata in modo errato nell’inserto elettronico
Commutazione RFI forte Usare cavo schermato
sporadicamente Forte vibrazione Il sensore meccanicamente disaccoppiare,
difettosa ruotare l’asta di 90°
Acqua nella custodia Vuotare;
Avvitare correttamente il coperchioe il
passacavi
FEM22: Ridurre il carico, capacità (cavo)
Uscita sovraccaricata
34 Endress+Hauser
Fout Oorzaak Maatregel nl - Fout zoeken
Schakelt niet Voeding ontbreekt Voeding kontroleren
Signaalleiding defect Signaalleiding kontroleren
Insert defect Vervangen
Dichtheid van het stortgoed te gering Op elektronica-insert dichtheid op
>200 g/l instellen; zie pag 19
Trilstaaf te veel vervuild Trilstaaf reinigen
FEM24: FEM24 vervangen;
Contacten verkleeft (na een kortsluiting) zekering in circuit aanbrengen
Schakelt foutief Minimum-/Maximum-fail-safe FEM fail-safe keuze correct instellen
instelling verwisseld
Sporadische Extreme RFI invloed Verbindingskabel afschermen
foutschakeling Extreme vibraties Sensor mechanisch ontkoppelen,
trilstaaf 90° draaien
Water in de behuizing Drogen;
Deksel en wartels vast aandraaien
FEM22: Schakelbelasting verminderen
uitgang overbelast
Endress+Hauser 35
de - Ersatzteile
Elektronikeinsätze,
Gehäusedeckel und Dichtungen 52025688 (FEM22)
52025691 (FEM24)
en - Spare Parts
Electronic inserts,
housing covers and seals
fr - Pièces de rechange
Electroniques,
couvercles de boîtier et joints
es - Repuestos Alu (F18) 52005910
Electrónicas,
cubiertas del cabezal y juntas EPDM
it - Ricambi *
Inserti elettronici,
coperture custodia y guarnizioni
nl - Reserve-onderdelen PA (F16) 52025790
Elektronica-unit,
behuizing deksels en dichtingen EPDM
*
* Mit Silikonfett oder Graphit schmieren
Lubricate with silicone grease or graphite
Lubrifier avec de la graisse silicone ou du graphite
Lubricar con grasa de silicona o grafito
Lubrificare con olio di silicone o grafite
Met siliconenvet of grafietvet insmeren
36 Endress+Hauser
Technische Information/Technical Information/Information technique/ de - Ergänzende
Información técnica/Informazioni tecniche/Technische Informatie Dokumentation
TI389F Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21 en - Supplementary
Documentation
fr - Documentation
Sicherheitshinweise/Notes on Safety/Conseils de sécurité/ complémentaire
Notas sobre seguridad/Note sulla sicurezza/Veiligheidsinstructies es - Documentación
XA300F 40 II 1/3 D, EEx ia IIC/IIB suplementaria
it - Documentazione
supplementare
nl - Aanvullende
documentatie
Endress+Hauser 37
38 Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser 39
www.endress.com/worldwide
KA227F/00/a6/09.04, 52022842, CCS/FM6 52022842

Technical Information

Level limit switch
Robust vibration limit switch for bulk solids,
also for dust incendive hazard areas
Application
Soliphant T is a robust level limit switch for silos with
fine-grained or coarse-grained, non-fluidised bulk solids.
The various designs means the device has a wide range
of applications. Certificates are also available for use in
dust incendive hazard areas.
FTM20 compact design (250 mm) as vibrating rod
for installation in any direction
FTM21 vibrating rod with extension pipe
(500 mm/1000 mm/1500 mm/20 in/40 in/60 in)
for installation in any direction
Typical applications: cereals, coffee beans, sugar,
animal feed, rice, detergents, dye powder, chalk,
gypsum, cement, sand, plastic granules
Your benefits
• No calibration: easy commissioning (plug and play)
• Insensitive to build-up: maintenance-free operation
• No mechanically moving parts: no wear, long
operating life
• Sensor material 316L: hardly any abrasion even with
building materials
• F16 plastic housing with cover with sight glass: switch
status visible from outside
• F18 aluminium housing also available
• Insensitive to external vibration and flow noises
• Also available with explosion protection
ATEX II 1/3 D, FM or CSA approval
TI389F/00/en
Table of contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Design, dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operating elements of electronic inserts FEM22 and FEM24 . . . 11
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sediment detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Measuring range (application) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Measuring frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CE mark, declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Type of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Switch behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Power-on behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Fail-safe mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Soliphant T FTM20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Switching delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Soliphant T FTM21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Ex specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FEM22 electronic insert (DC PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Sliding sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Operating Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
FEM24 electronic insert (AC/DC with relay output). . 6

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Thermal shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Limiting medium pressure range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
State of aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Grain size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Bulk density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Lateral load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 Endress+Hauser
Function and system design

Measuring principle A piezoelectric drive excites the vibrating rod of Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21 to its resonance frequency.
If medium covers the vibrating rod, the rod's vibrating amplitude changes (the vibration is damped).
Soliphant's electronics compare the actual amplitude with a target value and indicates whether the vibrating
rod is vibrating freely or whether it is covered by medium.
A A
t t
L00-FTM2xxxx-15-06-xx-xx-001
A = amplitude
Measuring system Soliphant T is a compact electronic switch.

Thus, the entire measuring system only consists of:
• Soliphant T FTM20 or FTM21 with FEM22 or FEM24 electronic insert
• a supply point and
• the connected control systems, switching units, signalling systems (e.g. lamps, horns, PCS, PLC, etc.)
EX EX
U–
…
+ –
U–
~
Endress+Hauser 3
Cable specifications
Use a shielded cable in the event of strong electromagnetic radiation.
Immunity to temperature change of connecting cable

The connecting cables must withstand the ambient temperature +15 K.
Cable entries M20x1.5 (cable gland); NPT ½; G ½
Input
Measured variable Level (according to the mounting location and the overall length)
Measuring range The measuring range depends on the mounting location of Soliphant T and the length of the pipe extension
(application) selected. The pipe extension is available in the following lengths: 500 mm, 1000 mm, 1500 mm, 20 in, 40 in,
60 in.
Input signal Probes covered => small amplitude

Probe not covered => large amplitude
Measuring frequency 700...800 Hz
Output
Galvanic isolation FEM22:
Between sensor and power supply
FEM24:
Between sensor, power supply and load
Switch behaviour Binary
Power-on behaviour When switching on the power supply the output is set to "signal on alarm".
After a maximum of 3 s it switches to the correct output signal.
Fail-safe mode Minimum/maximum quiescent current safety can be switched at electronic insert
Max. = maximum safety:
When the vibrating rod is covered, the output switches in the direction of the signal on alarm
Used for overfill protection for example
Min. = minimum safety:
When the vibrating rod becomes exposed, the output switches in the direction of the signal on alarm
Used for empty running protection for example
Switching delay 0.5 s when the sensor is covered

1 s when the sensor is exposed
Ex specifications FEM22, FEM24:

– Explosion protection for explosive dust-air mixtures:
Dust-Ex, DIP
4 Endress+Hauser
FEM22 electronic insert (DC PNP)

Power supply DC voltage 10 V…45 V
Ripple max. 5 V, 0…400 Hz
Current consumption max. 15 mA
Power consumption max. 0.68 W
Reverse polarity protection
Separation voltage: 2.2 kV
FEM22 overvoltage protection: overvoltage category III
Electrical connection Three-wire direct current connection

Preferred in conjunction with programmable
logic controllers (PLC), FEM22
DI modules as per EN 61131-2.
Positive signal at electronics switch output (PNP);
Output blocked at level limit.
1 2 3
(+)
F
0.5 A R e.g.
Relay
PLC
–
L+ L–
U…
– 10 V…45 V (DC)
L00-FTM2xxxx-04-05-xx-en-002
Output signal Fail-safe Level Output signal LEDs

mode green yellow
L+ IL +
1 3
IL = Load current Max.
(switched through)
< 100 µA
1 3
< 100 µA = Residual current
(blocked)
L+ IL +
1 3
= Lit
Min.
= Not lit < 100 µA

L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
1 3
xx-xx-000
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of device failure: < 100 µA
Connectable load • Load switched via transistor and separate PNP connection
• Load current: max. 45 V (cyclical overload and short-circuit protection),
continuous max. 350 mA
• Residual current: < 100 µA (for blocked transistor)
• Capacitive load: max. 0.5 µF for 45 V, max. 1.0 µF for 24 V
• Residual voltage: < 3 V (for transistor switched through)
Endress+Hauser 5
FEM24 electronic insert (AC/DC with relay output)

Power supply Alternating voltage 19 V…253 V, 50/60 Hz or DC voltage 19 V…55 V
Power consumption max. 1.3 W
Reverse polarity protection
Separation voltage: 2.2 kV
FEM24 overvoltage protection: overvoltage category III
Electrical connection Universal current connection with relay output

Power supply:
FEM24
Please note the different voltage ranges
for AC and DC.
Output:
When connecting a device with 1 2 3 4 56 7 8
high inductance, provide a spark arrester
to protect the relay contact.
A fine-wire fuse (depending on the
load connected) protects the relay
contact in the event of a short-circuit.
Both relay contacts switch simultaneously. F
DPDT (double pole double throw) 0.5 A
*
* When jumpered, the
relay output works with NPN logic.
** See below "Connectable load" NO C NC NO C NC

a u r a u r
L1 N PE ** **
! Note! L+ L– (Ground)
Please note the different voltage ranges
for direct and alternating current. U~
… 19…253 V (AC) U–
… 19… 55 V (DC)
Output signal Fail-safe Level Output signal LEDs

mode green yellow
3 4 5 6 7 8
Max.
= Relay energised 3 4 5 6 7 8
= Relay de-energised
= Lit 3 4 5 6 7 8
Min.
= Not lit
3 4 5 6 7 8
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-001 L00-FTM2xxxx-04-05-xx-xx-005
Signal on alarm Output signal in event of power failure: relay de-energised
Connectable load • Loads switched via 2 floating change-over contacts.

• I~ max. 6 A, U~ max. 253 V; P~ max. 1500 VA, cos ϕ = 1, P~ max. 750 VA, cos ϕ > 0.7;
• I- max. 6 A to 30 V, I- max. 0.2 A to 125 V.
• The following applies when connecting a functional extra-low voltage circuit with double insulation as per
IEC 1010: Sum of voltages of relay output and power supply max. 300 V
6 Endress+Hauser
Operating conditions
Installation instructions Mounting location
e.g. storage or buffer container
Orientation
**
L00-FTM20xxx-11-05-xx-xx-000
Horizontal installation/vertical installation

* With protective cover (to be provided by customer)
** With protecting tube (to be provided by customer)
Environment
Ambient temperature range –40...70 °C
Storage temperature –40...85 °C
Climate class Climatic protection as per DIN IEC 68 Part 2-38, Fig. 2a
Degree of protection IP66/IP67, NEMA4X
Vibration resistance DIN 60068-2-27 / IEC 68-2-27: shock 30 g; vibration 0.01 g2/Hz
Electrical safety IEC 61010, CSA 1010.1-92, FM3600
Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission to EN 61326, Electrical Equipment Class B

Interference immunity to EN 61326, Annex A (Industrial)
Endress+Hauser 7
Process
Environment Permitted ambient temperature Ta at housing depending on the medium temperature Tp in the container:
Ta
°C
Ta
70
50
Tp 0
–40 0 90 150 Tp
°C
–40
L00-FTM20xxx-05-06-xx-xx-001
x °C = (1.8 x + 32) °F
Thermal shock resistance Maximum 120 K
Limiting medium pressure –1...25 bar

range
Maximum Working Pressure (MWP)
25 bar
Burst pressure
100 bar
State of aggregation Solids
Grain size ≤ 25 mm
Bulk density ≥ 200 g/l, not fluidised
Lateral load
F
L
500
Maximum admissible lateral load F in N
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
Overall length L in mm
100 mm = 3.94 in
8 Endress+Hauser
Mechanical construction
! Note!
All dimensions in mm! (100 mm = 3.94 in)
Design, dimensions Compact version
ø85 max. 76
100
21.5
41 AF / 1¾" AF 50 AF
R 1 / NPT 1¼ R 1½ / NPT 1½
372
ø29
225
ø16
151
L00-FTM20xxx-06-05-xx-en-001
Pipe extension
max. 65
max. 60 ø 80
105
21.5
41 AF / 1¾" AF 50 AF
R 1 / NPT 1¼ R 1½ / NPT 1½
159.5 + L
ø29
L=x
ø16
151
L00-FTM20xxx-06-05-xx-en-000
x = 500 mm; 1000 mm; 1500 mm; 20 in; 40 in; 60 in
Endress+Hauser 9
Weight FTM20/FTM21 with F16 housing, FEM24 and R 1 thread:

Compact = approx. 1.0 kg
500 mm = approx. 1.3 kg
Material F16 housing:

PTB-FR, cover with sight glass made of PA12, EPDM cover seal
F18 housing:
Aluminium EN-AC-AlSi10Mg, plastic-coated
EPDM cover seal
Process connections:
• R1; R1½ (316L, DIN 2999)
• NPT 1¼ - 11½; NPT 1½ - 11½ (316L, ANSI B 1.20.1)
Sensor:
316L
Human interface
Display elements
! Note!
The switch settings in the following graphics are in the as-delivered state.
FEM22
One green LED: operation
One yellow LED: electronic switch closed FEM22

DC PNP
U 10...45V DC
I max : 350mA MAX
MIN
L + L- 1
1 2 3
L00-FEM22xxx-07-05-xx-xx-001
FEM24
One green LED: operation
One yellow LED: contact closed

(relay energised or fed with current) U~ –
MAX
MIN
35
19... 55V DC 3 5 68
19... 253V AC
4 FEM24
L1 N 4 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L00-FEM24xxx-07-05-xx-xx-002
10 Endress+Hauser
Operating elements of
electronic inserts
FEM22 and FEM24 MAX
MIN
(factory setting)
One switch for safety mode
MAX Overfill protection

MIN Dry running protection
One switch for bulk density/density setting
400 g/l (high bulk density)

200 g/l (low bulk density)
Sediment detection Detection of solids under water

The system does not detect coverage by liquids
similar to water.
H 2O
Endress+Hauser 11
Certificates and approvals

CE mark, The instrument is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested and left the factory
declaration of conformity in a condition in which it is safe to operate.
The instrument complies with the applicable standards and regulations as listed in the EC declaration of
conformity and thus complies with the statutory requirements of the EG directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms the successful testing of the instrument by affixing to it the CE mark.
Ex approval Your Endress+Hauser sales centre can provide you with information on the Ex versions which can currently
be delivered.
All explosion protection data are given in a separate documentation (see "Supplementary Documentation")
which is available upon request.
Copies of certificates available upon request.
Type of protection See "Ordering information" as of Page 13 and "Supplementary documentation" on Page 16.
Other standards and Other standards and guidelines that were taken into consideration in designing and developing Soliphant T
guidelines FTM20, FTM21:
• Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)
• DIN EN 61010 Part 1, 2001
Protection Measures for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, Regulation and Laboratory
Procedures
Part 1: General requirements
• EN 61326
Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control and Laboratory Use
EMC requirements
12 Endress+Hauser
Ordering information
Soliphant T FTM20 10 Approval
A Non-hazardous area
C CSA General Purpose, CSA C US
D CSA DIP+FM DIP
Y Special version
4 ATEX II 1/3 D
20 Process connection
A Thread, DIN2999 R1, 316L
G Thread, DIN2999 R1½, 316L
M Thread, ANSI NPT1¼, 316L
N Thread, ANSI NPT1½, 316L
Y Special version
30 Electronics; output
2 FEM22: 3-wire PNP, 10... 45 V DC
4 FEM24: Relay DPDT, 19...253 V AC / 55 V DC
8 FEM20B ASI Bus
9 Special version
40 Housing; cable entry

2 F16 Polyester IP66/IP67, NEMA4X M20 gland
3 F16 Polyester IP66/IP67, NEMA4X Thread, NPT½
4 F16 Polyester IP66/IP67, NEMA4X Thread, G½
5 F18 Aluminium IP66/IP67, NEMA4X M20 gland
6 F18 Aluminium IP66/IP67, NEMA4X Thread, NPT¾
7 F18 Aluminium IP66/IP67, NEMA4X Thread, G½
9 Special version
50 Additional fittings
A Basic version
Y Special version
FTM20 Complete product designation
Endress+Hauser 13
Soliphant T FTM21 10 Approval

A Non-hazardous area
C CSA General Purpose, CSA C US
D CSA DIP+FM DIP
Y Special version
4 ATEX II 1/3 D
20 Process connection
A Thread, DIN2999 R1, 316L
G Thread, DIN2999 R1½, 316L
M Thread, ANSI NPT1¼, 316L
N Thread, ANSI NPT1½, 316L
Y Special version
25 Sensor length
2 500 mm
3 1000 mm
4 1500 mm
6 20 inch
7 40 inch
8 60 inch
9 Special version
30 Electronics; output
2 FEM22: 3-wire PNP, 10...45 V DC
4 FEM24: Relay DPDT, 19...253 V AC / 55 V DC
8 FEM20B ASI Bus
9 Special version
40 Housing; cable entry

2 F16 Polyester IP66/IP67, NEMA4X M20 gland
3 F16 Polyester IP66/IP67, NEMA4X Thread, NPT½
4 F16 Polyester IP66/IP67, NEMA4X Thread, G½
5 F18 Aluminium IP66/IP67, NEMA4X M20 gland
6 F18 Aluminium IP66/IP67, NEMA4X Thread, NPT¾
7 F18 Aluminium IP66/IP67, NEMA4X Thread, G½
9 Special version
50 Additional fittings
A Basic version
Y Special version
FTM21 Complete product designation
14 Endress+Hauser
Accessories
Sliding sleeve For pressurised container
• R 1½
DIN 2999
52023312
ø70 M 6x25 / 5 AF
• NPT 1½ - 11½
ANSI B 1.20.1
52025090
~70
60 AF
! Note!
Suitable for multiple switch-point
25
22
configurations!
MWP = 25 bar
R 1½ (360 psi)
NPT 1½ - 11½
Ta = max. 150 °C
(max. 300 °F)
For unpressurised container, IP65

• R 1½
DIN 2999 50 AF
21 21.5
52023313
• NPT 1½ - 11½ M6 (3x)
ANSI B 1.20.1
G 1¼
52024578
10
! 50 AF
57.5
Note!
Only suitable for one-time switch-point
24.5
configuration!
MWP = 0 bar
R 1½ (0 psi)
NPT 1½ - 11½
Ta = max. 150 °C
(max. 300 °F)
Spare parts • FEM22 electronic insert

52025688
• FEM24 electronic insert
52025691
• Cover for polyester housing (F16), transparent plastic with seal
52025790
• Cover for aluminium housing (F18), aluminium with seal
52005910
• Cover for aluminium housing (F18), aluminium with glass insert and seal (not for EEx d)
52027693
Endress+Hauser 15
Supplementary documentation
Operating Instructions • Soliphant T FTM20, FTM21
KA227F/00/a6
Certificates • ATEX II 1/3 D T +12 K

XA300F/00/a3
International Head Quarter
Endress+Hauser
GmbH+Co. KG
Instruments International
Colmarer Str. 6
79576 Weil am Rhein
Deutschland
Tel. +49 76 21 9 75 02
Fax +49 76 21 9 75 34 5
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI389F/00/en/06.05
SL/FM+SGML6.0 ProMoDo
Appendix 08 – Information PLC / display
Page 29 of 31
Data sheet 6AV2124-0MC01-0AX0
SIMATIC HMI TP1200 COMFORT, COMFORT PANEL, TOUCH
OPERATION, 12" WIDESCREEN-TFT-DISPLAY, 16 MIL. COLORS,
PROFINET INTERFACE, MPI/PROFIBUS DP INTERFACE, 12 MB
USER MEMORY, WINDOWS CE 6.0, CONFIGURABLE FROM
WINCC COMFORT V11
General information
Product type designation SIMATIC HMI TP1200 Comfort
Display
Design of display TFT
Screen diagonal 12.1 in
Display width 261.1 mm
Display height 163.2 mm
Number of colors 16 777 216
Resolution (pixels)
● Horizontal image resolution 1 280 Pixel
● Vertical image resolution 800 Pixel
Backlighting
● MTBF backlighting (at 25 °C) 80 000 h
● Backlight dimmable Yes; 0-100 %
Control elements
Keyboard fonts
● Function keys
— Number of function keys 0
6AV2124-0MC01-0AX0 Subject to change without notice

Page 1/10 05/22/2017 © Copyright Siemens
● Keys with LED No
● System keys No
● Numeric/alphabetical input
— Numeric keyboard Yes; Onscreen keyboard
— alphanumeric keyboard Yes; Onscreen keyboard
Touch operation
● Design as touch screen Yes
Expansions for operator control of the process
● DP direct LEDs (LEDs as S7 output I/O)
— F1...Fx 0
● Direct keys (keys as S7 input I/O)
— F1...Fx 0
● Direct keys (touch buttons as S7 input I/O) 40
Installation type/mounting
Mounting position vertical
Mounting in portrait format possible Yes
Mounting in landscape format possible Yes
maximum permissible angle of inclination without 35°
external ventilation
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage DC
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 0.85 A
Starting current inrush I²t 0.5 A²·s
Power
Active power input, typ. 20 W
Processor
Processor type X86
Memory
Flash Yes
RAM Yes
Memory available for user data 12 Mbyte
Type of output
Info LED No
Power LED No
Error LED No
Acoustics

● Buzzer No
● Speaker Yes
Time of day
Clock
● Hardware clock (real-time) Yes
● Software clock Yes
● retentive Yes; Back-up duration typically 6 weeks
● synchronizable Yes
Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch)
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; RS 422/485 combined
Number of RS 422 interfaces 0; together with RS485
Number of RS 232 interfaces 0
Number of USB interfaces 2; USB 2.0
● USB Mini B 1; 5-pole
Number of 20 mA interfaces (TTY) 0
Number of parallel interfaces 0
Number of other interfaces 0
Number of SD card slots 2
With software interfaces No
Industrial Ethernet
● Industrial Ethernet status LED 2
● Number of ports of the integrated switch 2
Protocols
PROFINET Yes
Supports protocol for PROFINET IO Yes
IRT Yes; As of WinCC V12
MRP Yes; As of WinCC V12
PROFIBUS Yes
MPI Yes
Protocols (Ethernet)
● TCP/IP Yes
● DHCP Yes
● SNMP Yes
● DCP Yes
● LLDP Yes
WEB characteristics
● HTTP Yes
● HTTPS Yes
● HTML Yes
● XML Yes

● CSS Yes
● Active X Yes
● JavaScript Yes
● Java VM No
Further protocols
● CAN No
● EtherNet/IP Yes
● MODBUS Yes
EMC
Emission of radio interference acc. to EN 55 011
● Limit class A, for use in industrial areas Yes
● Limit class B, for use in residential areas No
Degree and class of protection

IP (at the front) IP65
Enclosure Type 4 at the front Yes
Enclosure Type 4x at the front Yes
IP (rear) IP20
Standards, approvals, certificates

CE mark Yes
cULus Yes
RCM (formerly C-TICK) Yes
KC approval Yes
Marine approval
● Germanischer Lloyd (GL) Yes; As of product version: 10
● American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Yes; As of product version: 10
● Bureau Veritas (BV) Yes; As of product version: 10
● Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Yes; As of product version: 10
● Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS) Yes; As of product version: 10
● Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (Class NK) Yes; As of product version: 10
● Polski Rejestr Statkow (PRS) No
Use in hazardous areas
● ATEX Zone 2 Yes
● ATEX Zone 22 Yes
● IECEx Zone 2 Yes
● IECEx Zone 22 Yes
● cULus Class I Zone 1 No
● cULus Class I Zone 2, Division 2 Yes
● FM Class I Division 2 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation

● Operation (vertical installation)
— For vertical installation, min. 0 °C
— For vertical installation, max. 50 °C; (55 °C, see entry ID:64847814)
● Operation (max. tilt angle)
— At maximum tilt angle, min. 0 °C
● Operation (vertical installation, portrait format)
— For vertical installation, min. 0 °C
— For vertical installation, max. 40 °C
● Operation (max. tilt angle, portrait format)
Ambient temperature during storage/transportation
● min. -20 °C
● max. 60 °C
Relative humidity
● Operation, max. 90 %; no condensation
Operating systems
proprietary No
pre-installed operating system
● Windows CE Yes
Configuration
Message indicator Yes
Alarm system (incl. buffer and acknowledgment) Yes
Process value display (output) Yes
Process value default (input) possible Yes
Recipe management Yes
Configuration software
● STEP 7 Basic (TIA Portal) No
● STEP 7 Professional (TIA Portal) No
● WinCC flexible Compact No
● WinCC flexible Standard No
● WinCC flexible Advanced No
● WinCC Basic (TIA Portal) No
● WinCC Comfort (TIA Portal) Yes; from V11
● WinCC Advanced (TIA Portal) Yes; from V11
● WinCC Professional (TIA Portal) Yes; from V11
Languages
Online languages
● Number of online/runtime languages 32
Project languages

● Languages per project 32
Functionality under WinCC (TIA Portal)

Libraries Yes
Applications/options
● Web browser Yes
● Pocket Word Yes
● Pocket Excel Yes
● PDF Viewer Yes
● Media Player Yes
● SIMATIC WinCC Sm@rtServer Yes
● SIMATIC WinCC Audit Yes
Number of Visual Basic Scripts Yes
Task planner
● time-controlled Yes
● task-controlled Yes
Help system
● Number of characters per info text 70
Message system
● Number of alarm classes 32
● Bit messages
— Number of bit messages 4 000
● Analog messages
— Number of analog messages 200
● S7 alarm number procedure Yes
● System messages HMI Yes
● System messages, other (SIMATIC S7, Yes
Sinumerik, Simotion, etc.)
● Number of characters per message 80
● Number of process values per message 8
● Acknowledgment groups Yes
● Message indicator Yes
● Message buffer
— Number of entries 1 024
— Circulating buffer Yes
— retentive Yes
— maintenance-free Yes
Recipe management
● Number of recipes 300
● Data records per recipe 500
● Entries per data record 1 000
● Size of internal recipe memory 2 Mbyte

● Recipe memory expandable Yes
Variables
● Number of variables per device 2 048
● Number of variables per screen 400
● Limit values Yes
● Multiplexing Yes
● Structures Yes
● Arrays Yes
Images
● Number of configurable images 500
● Permanent window/default Yes
● Global image Yes
● Pop-up images Yes
● Slide-in images Yes
● Image selection by PLC Yes
● Image number in the PLC Yes
Image objects
● Number of objects per image 400
● Text fields Yes
● I/O fields Yes
● Graphic I/O fields (graphics list) Yes
● Symbolic I/O fields (text list) Yes
● Date/time fields Yes
● Switches Yes
● Buttons Yes
● Graphic display Yes
● Icons Yes
● Geometric objects Yes
Complex image objects
● Number of complex objects per screen 20
● Alarm view Yes
● Trend view Yes
● User view Yes
● Status/control Yes
● Sm@rtClient view Yes
● Recipe view Yes
● f(x) trend view Yes
● System diagnostics view Yes
● Media Player Yes
● HTML browser Yes
● PDF display Yes

● IP camera display Yes
● Bar graphs Yes
● Sliders Yes
● Pointer instruments Yes
● Analog/digital clock Yes
Lists
● Number of text lists per project 500
● Number of entries per text list 500
● Number of graphics lists per project 500
● Number of entries per graphics list 500
Archiving
● Number of archives per device 50
● Number of entries per archive 20 000
● Message archive Yes
● Process value archive Yes
● Archiving methods
— Sequential archive Yes
— Short-term archive Yes
● Memory location
— Memory card Yes
— USB memory Yes
— Ethernet Yes
● Data storage format
— CSV Yes
— TXT Yes
— RDB Yes
Security
● Number of user groups 50
● Number of user rights 32
● Number of users 50
● Password export/import Yes
● SIMATIC Logon Yes
Logging through printer
● Alarms Yes
● Report (shift log) Yes
● Hardcopy Yes
● Electronic print to file Yes; pdf, html
Character sets
● Keyboard fonts
— US English Yes
Transfer (upload/download)

● MPI/PROFIBUS DP Yes
● USB Yes
● Ethernet Yes
● using external storage medium Yes
Process coupling
● S7-1200 Yes
● S7-1500 Yes
● S7-200 Yes
● S7-300/400 Yes
● LOGO! Yes
● WinAC Yes
● SINUMERIK Yes; with SINUMERIK option package
● SIMOTION Yes
● Allen Bradley (EtherNet/IP) Yes
● Allen Bradley (DF1) Yes
● Mitsubishi (MC TCP/IP) Yes
● Mitsubishi (FX) Yes
● OMRON (FINS TCP) No
● OMRON (LINK/Multilink) Yes
● Modicon (Modbus TCP/IP) Yes
● Modicon (Modbus) Yes
● OPC UA Client Yes
● OPC UA Server Yes
Service tools/configuration aids
● Backup/Restore manually Yes
● Backup/Restore automatically Yes
● Simulation Yes
● Device switchover Yes
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
● Printer Yes
● SIMATIC HMI MM memory card: Multi Media Yes; Up to 128 MB
Card
● SIMATIC HMI SD memory card: Secure Digital Yes; Up to 2 GB
memory card
● SIMATIC HMI CF memory card Compact Flash No
Card
● USB memory Yes
● SIMATIC IPC USB Flashdrive (USB stick) Yes; Up to 16 GB
● SIMATIC HMI USB stick Yes; Up to 8 GB
● Network camera Yes

Mechanics/material
Enclosure material (front)
● Plastic No
● Aluminum Yes
● Stainless steel No
Dimensions
Width of the housing front 330 mm
Height of housing front 241 mm
Mounting cutout, width 310 mm
Mounting cutout, height 221 mm
Overall depth 65 mm
Weights
Weight without packaging 2.8 kg
Weight incl. packaging 3.5 kg
last modified: 05/18/2017

Data sheet 6ES7214-1AG40-0XB0
SIMATIC S7-1200, CPU 1214C, COMPACT CPU, DC/DC/DC,
ONBOARD I/O: 14 DI 24V DC; 10 DO 24 V DC; 2 AI 0 - 10V DC,
POWER SUPPLY: DC 20.4 - 28.8 V DC, PROGRAM/DATA
MEMORY: 100 KB
General information
Product type designation CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC
Firmware version V4.2
Engineering with
● Programming package STEP 7 V14 or higher
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
● 24 V DC Yes
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 20.4 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Load voltage L+
● Rated value (DC) 24 V
● permissible range, lower limit (DC) 20.4 V
● permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 500 mA; CPU only
Current consumption, max. 1 500 mA; CPU with all expansion modules
6ES7214-1AG40-0XB0 Subject to change without notice

Inrush current, max. 12 A; at 28.8 V
I²t 0.5 A²·s
Output current
for backplane bus (5 V DC), max. 1 600 mA; Max. 5 V DC for SM and CM
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
● 24 V L+ minus 4 V DC min.
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 12 W
Memory
Work memory
● integrated 100 kbyte
● expandable No
Load memory
● integrated 4 Mbyte
● Plug-in (SIMATIC Memory Card), max. with SIMATIC memory card
Backup
● present Yes
● maintenance-free Yes
● without battery Yes
CPU processing times

for bit operations, typ. 0.085 µs; / instruction
for word operations, typ. 1.7 µs; / instruction
for floating point arithmetic, typ. 2.3 µs; / instruction
CPU-blocks
Number of blocks (total) DBs, FCs, FBs, counters and timers. The maximum number of
addressable blocks ranges from 1 to 65535. There is no
restriction, the entire working memory can be used
OB
● Number, max. Limited only by RAM for code
Data areas and their retentivity

Retentive data area (incl. timers, counters, flags), 10 kbyte
max.
Flag
● Number, max. 8 kbyte; Size of bit memory address area
Local data
● per priority class, max. 16 kbyte; Priority class 1 (program cycle): 16 KB, priority class 2
to 26: 6 KB
Address area
Process image

● Inputs, adjustable 1 kbyte
● Outputs, adjustable 1 kbyte
Hardware configuration
Number of modules per system, max. 3 comm. modules, 1 signal board, 8 signal modules
Time of day
Clock
● Hardware clock (real-time) Yes
● Backup time 480 h; Typical
● Deviation per day, max. +/- 60 s/month at 25 °C
Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 14; Integrated
● of which inputs usable for technological 6; HSC (High Speed Counting)
functions
Source/sink input Yes
Number of simultaneously controllable inputs
all mounting positions
— up to 40 °C, max. 14
Input voltage
● Rated value (DC) 24 V
● for signal "0" 5 V DC at 1 mA
● for signal "1" 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
for standard inputs
— parameterizable 0.2 ms, 0.4 ms, 0.8 ms, 1.6 ms, 3.2 ms, 6.4 ms and 12.8 ms,
selectable in groups of four
— at "0" to "1", min. 0.2 ms
— at "0" to "1", max. 12.8 ms
for interrupt inputs
— parameterizable Yes
for counter/technological functions
— parameterizable Single phase: 3 @ 100 kHz & 3 @ 30 kHz, differential: 3 @ 80
kHz & 3 @ 30 kHz
Cable length
● shielded, max. 500 m; 50 m for technological functions
● unshielded, max. 300 m; For technological functions: No
Digital outputs
Number of digital outputs 10
● of which high-speed outputs 4; 100 kHz Pulse Train Output
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to L+ (-48 V)
Switching capacity of the outputs
● with resistive load, max. 0.5 A

● on lamp load, max. 5 W
Output voltage
● for signal "0", max. 0.1 V; with 10 kOhm load
● for signal "1", min. 20 V
Output current
● for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A
● for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA
Output delay with resistive load
● "0" to "1", max. 1 µs
● "1" to "0", max. 5 µs
Switching frequency
● of the pulse outputs, with resistive load, max. 100 kHz
Cable length
● shielded, max. 500 m
● unshielded, max. 150 m
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2
Input ranges
● Voltage Yes
Input ranges (rated values), voltages
● 0 to +10 V Yes
● Input resistance (0 to 10 V) ≥100k ohms
Cable length
● shielded, max. 100 m; twisted and shielded
Analog outputs
Number of analog outputs 0
Analog value generation for the inputs

Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel
● Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 10 bit
max.
● Integration time, parameterizable Yes
● Conversion time (per channel) 625 µs
Encoder
Connectable encoders
● 2-wire sensor Yes
1. Interface
Interface type PROFINET
Physics Ethernet
Isolated Yes
automatic detection of transmission rate Yes

Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Interface types
● Number of ports 1
● integrated switch No
Functionality
● PROFINET IO Controller Yes
● PROFINET IO Device Yes
● SIMATIC communication Yes
● Open IE communication Yes
● Web server Yes
● Media redundancy No
PROFINET IO Controller
● Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s
Services
— PG/OP communication Yes
— S7 routing Yes
— Isochronous mode No
— Open IE communication Yes
— IRT No
— MRP No
— MRPD No
— PROFIenergy No
— Prioritized startup Yes
— Number of IO devices with prioritized 16
startup, max.
— Number of connectable IO Devices, max. 16
— Number of connectable IO Devices for RT, 16
max.
— of which in line, max. 16
— Activation/deactivation of IO Devices Yes
— Number of IO Devices that can be 8
simultaneously activated/deactivated, max.
— Updating time The minimum value of the update time also depends on the
communication component set for PROFINET IO, on the number
of IO devices and the quantity of configured user data.
PROFINET IO Device
Services
— PG/OP communication Yes
— S7 routing Yes
— Isochronous mode No
— Open IE communication Yes

— IRT No
— MRP No
— MRPD No
— PROFIenergy Yes
— Shared device Yes
— Number of IO Controllers with shared 2
device, max.
Protocols
Supports protocol for PROFINET IO Yes
PROFIBUS Yes; CM 1243-5 required
AS-Interface Yes; CM 1243-2 required
Protocols (Ethernet)
● TCP/IP Yes
● DHCP No
● SNMP Yes
● DCP Yes
● LLDP Yes
Further protocols
● MODBUS Yes
Communication functions
S7 communication
● supported Yes
● as server Yes
● as client Yes
● User data per job, max. See online help (S7 communication, user data size)
Open IE communication
● TCP/IP Yes
— Data length, max. 8 kbyte
● ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) Yes
— Data length, max. 8 kbyte
● UDP Yes
— Data length, max. 1 472 byte
Web server
● supported Yes
● User-defined websites Yes
Number of connections
● overall 16; dynamically
Test commissioning functions

Status/control
● Status/control variable Yes

● Variables Inputs/outputs, memory bits, DBs, distributed I/Os, timers,
counters
Forcing
● Forcing Yes
Diagnostic buffer
● present Yes
Traces
● Number of configurable Traces 2
● Memory size per trace, max. 512 kbyte
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
● RUN/STOP LED Yes
● ERROR LED Yes
● MAINT LED Yes
Integrated Functions
Number of counters 6
Counting frequency (counter) max. 100 kHz
Frequency meter Yes
controlled positioning Yes
Number of position-controlled positioning axes, max. 8
Number of positioning axes via pulse-direction 4; With integrated outputs
interface
PID controller Yes
Number of alarm inputs 4
Number of pulse outputs 4
Limit frequency (pulse) 100 kHz
Potential separation
Potential separation digital inputs
● Potential separation digital inputs No
● between the channels, in groups of 1
Potential separation digital outputs
● Potential separation digital outputs Yes
● between the channels No
● between the channels, in groups of 1
EMC
Interference immunity against discharge of static electricity
● Interference immunity against discharge of Yes
static electricity acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
— Test voltage at air discharge 8 kV
— Test voltage at contact discharge 6 kV
Interference immunity to cable-borne interference

● Interference immunity on supply lines acc. to Yes
IEC 61000-4-4
● Interference immunity on signal cables acc. to Yes
IEC 61000-4-4
Interference immunity against voltage surge
● on the supply lines acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 Yes
Interference immunity against conducted variable disturbance induced by high-frequency fields
● Interference immunity against high-frequency Yes
radiation acc. to IEC 61000-4-6
Emission of radio interference acc. to EN 55 011
● Limit class A, for use in industrial areas Yes; Group 1
● Limit class B, for use in residential areas Yes; When appropriate measures are used to ensure compliance
with the limits for Class B according to EN 55011
Degree and class of protection

Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
● IP20 Yes
Standards, approvals, certificates

CE mark Yes
UL approval Yes
cULus Yes
FM approval Yes
RCM (formerly C-TICK) Yes
KC approval Yes
Marine approval
● Marine approval Yes
Ambient conditions
Free fall
● Fall height, max. 0.3 m; five times, in product package
Ambient temperature during operation
● min. -20 °C
● max. 60 °C; Number of simultaneously activated inputs or outputs 7 or
5 (no adjacent points) at 60 °C horizontal or 50 °C vertical, 14 or
10 at 55 °C horizontal or 45 °C vertical
● horizontal installation, min. -20 °C
● horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
● vertical installation, min. -20 °C
● vertical installation, max. 50 °C
Ambient temperature during storage/transportation
● min. -40 °C
● max. 70 °C
Air pressure acc. to IEC 60068-2-13
● Operation, min. 795 hPa

● Operation, max. 1 080 hPa
● Storage/transport, min. 660 hPa
● Storage/transport, max. 1 080 hPa
● permissible operating height -1000 to 2000 m
Relative humidity
● permissible range (without condensation) at 25 95 %
°C
Vibrations
● Vibrations 2 g (m/s²) wall mounting, 1 g (m/s²) DIN rail
● Operation, tested according to IEC 60068-2-6 Yes
Shock test
● tested according to IEC 60068-2-27 Yes; IEC 68, Part 2-27 half-sine: strength of the shock 15 g (peak
value), duration 11 ms
Extended ambient conditions
Pollutant concentrations
— SO2 at RH < 60% without condensation S02: < 0.5 ppm; H2S: < 0.1 ppm; RH < 60% condensation-free
Configuration
Programming
Programming language
— LAD Yes
— FBD Yes
— SCL Yes
Know-how protection
● User program protection/password protection Yes
● Copy protection Yes
● Block protection Yes
Access protection
● Protection level: Write protection Yes
● Protection level: Read/write protection Yes
● Protection level: Complete protection Yes
Cycle time monitoring
● adjustable Yes
Dimensions
Width 110 mm
Height 100 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 415 g
last modified: 05/18/2017

Appendix 09 – Information pneumatic valves
Page 30 of 31
Data sheet: Pressure regulator LR-1/4-D-7-O-MINI – #162599
Function
Feature values
Size Mini
Series D
Actuator lock Rotary knob with lock
Assembly position Any
Design structure directly-controlled diaphragm regulator
Controller function Output pressure constant
with initial pressure compensation
with secondary exhaust
Pressure gauge G1/8" prepared
Operating pressure 1 ... 16 bar
Pressure control range 0,5 ... 7 bar
Max. pressure hysteresis 0,2 bar
Standard nominal flow rate 1.600 l/min
Operating medium Compressed air in accordance with ISO8573-1:2010 [7:4:4]
Note on operating and pilot medium Lubricated operation possible (subsequently required for further
operation)
Medium temperature -10 ... 60 °C
Ambient temperature -10 ... 60 °C
Authorisation Germanischer Lloyd
Product weight 300 g
Mounting type Front panel installation
Line installation
with accessories
Pneumatic connection, port 1 G1/4
Pneumatic connection, port 2 G1/4
Materials note Free of copper and PTFE
Materials information for sub-base Zinc die-casting
Materials information for seals NBR
Materials information, housing Zinc die-casting
30.11.2011 – Subject to change – Festo AG & Co. KG 1/1

product data sheet | Pressure-regulator | Standard series
Pressure-regulator of the Standard series

Pressure regulator G1 0,5-10 with gauge G 63.16 R
. .
. . . . . . .
type part-number series port size flow rate adjustment range P2 weight
max.
DR.35 G 9.1535.00.002.0 Standard G1 5000 l/min 10 bar 1.207 kg
. . .
flow characteristic pressure characteristic symbol
www.knocks.de | 22.03.2017
product data sheet | Pressure-regulator | Standard series
. .
technical data accessories
● description: air line regulator with diaphragm and relieving feature

● medium: compressed air, neutral gases
● supply pressure P1 max.: 25 bar
● temperature range: 0 - 60°C
● control panel mounting: nut
● mounting bracket: BW.30
DR.11-7
www.knocks.de | 22.03.2017
Regulator G 1 1/2, G2
type
item
DRP.87 DRP.88
port size G 1 1/2 G2
description air line regulator with diaphragm and relieving feature,
pilot controlled
mounting arbitrary
supply pressure Pe max. 25 bar
reduced pressure Pa 0,5-10 bar standard, 0,1-3 bar, 0,5-6 bar, 0,5-16 bar
media and ambient
temperature max. 60°C (other temperature ranges available upon request)
fixing install in pipe line
weight 4,970 kg
technical modifications keep in reserve!
series 8
ordering information
DRP. ✱✱ ✱ ✱
type reduced pressure
1 port size 2 option

replacement parts ☞ ( repair kit: ESA-DRP.88 )
no description material order-no
ordering example: DRP.88 G 0,1-3
1 body Al ---
page: DRP.88 (02/04)
2 diaphragm complete NBR-Ms-St galv. ☞

port size
3 valve cone NBR - Ms ☞
87 G 1 1/2
4 spring DR.88-6 stainless steel 5.1588.06.000
5 spring cage C.00-72 POM - Ms 8.2100.72.000
1 88 G 2
6 diaphragm NBR - Ms ☞
7 valve cone NBR - Ms ☞
options
8 regulat. spring C.11-83 st - galvanized 5.2111.83.000
G gauge ø50
K keylock
application information
– adjusting knob can be locked by depressing
dimensions (mm)
technical modifications keep in reserve!

flow characteristics pressure characteristics accessories
gauge spring
reduced pressure P2 [bar]
set point
type: type:
G 50. 3/ 6 R 0,1- 3: C.11-81
G 50. 6/10 R 0,5- 6: C.11-82
G 50.10/16 R 0,5-16: C.11-66 page: DRP.88 (02/04)
supply pressure P1 [bar]

Solenoid valve 2/2 way N.C. 21H11K0V120
÷
Combined operation 21H14K0V250-S
PRESENTA
PRESENTATION:
Combined operation S.V. for interception of fluids compatible
with the construction materials.
Minimum operational pressure is not required.
The materials used and the tests undertaken ensure maximum
reliability and duration.
USE: Automation
Heating
PIPES: G 3/8 - G 1
COILS: 8W - Ø 13
BDA -BDS - BSA 155°C (class F)
BDP 160°C (high temperature)
BDF 180°C (class H)
SDH 155°C (class F)
12W -Ø 13
UDA 155°C (class F)
14W -Ø 13
GDH 180°C (class H)
MOULDING AND BOBBIN ARE MADE BY 100% VIRGIN
MATERIAL.
Max. allowable pressure (PS)
G 3/8 - G 1/2 20 bar
G 3/4 - G 1 16 bar
Environment temperature:
with class F or high temperature coils - 10°C + 60°C
with class H coil - 10°C + 80°C
Gaskets Temperature Medium
Mineral oils (2°E),gasoline
V=FKM (fluoroelastomer) - 10°C +140°C
gas oil
B=NBR (nitrile rubber) - 10°C + 90°C Air, inert gas, water
E=EPDM
- 10°C +140°C Water, low pressure steam
(ethylene-propylene)
For seals other than FKM replace the letter “V” with the ones
corresponding to the other seals. E.I. 21H11K0B120.
Pressure
Pipe Max viscosity Ø Kv Power
Code min M.O.P.D.
ISO 228/1
cSt °E mm (l/mn) (watt) bar AC bar DC bar
8 16 1,5
G 3/8 21H11K0V120 28 12 6
20
14 15
12
8 16 1,5
G 1/2 21H12K0V120 32 12 6
20
14 15
8 5
21H13K0V190 70 12 12 -
12 ~2 0
G 3/4 19 14 15
12 1,5
*21H13K0V190-S 65 -
14 6
8 5
21H14K0V250 105 12 12 -
G1 25 14 15
12 1
*21H14K0V250-S 95 -
14 6
Note
* For DC only.
The “ODE ” reserves the right to carry out technical and aesthetic modifications without prior notification.
30-06-2002 ODE 21H11K0V120 ÷ 21H14K0V250-S

MATERIALS:
MATERIALS:
Body Brass - UNI EN 12165 CW617N
Welded armature tube Stainless steel AISI series 300
Fixed core Stainless steel AISI series 400
Plunger Stainless steel AISI series 400
Phase displacement ring Copper - Cu 99,9%
Spring Stainless steel AISI series 300
Seal Standard: V=FKM
On request: B=NBR E=EPDM
Orifice Brass - UNI EN 12165 CW617
On request:
Connector Pg 9 or Pg 11
Connector conformity ISO 4400
FEATURES:
FEATURES:
Electrical conformity IEC 335
Protection degree IP 65 EN 60529 (DIN 40050)
with coil fitted by connector.
SPARE
SPARE PAR
PARTS:
TS:
1. Coil: 5. Gasket O-Ring :
See coils list G 3/4-G 1 Code R990002/V
2. Complete armature tube
without gasket: MAINTENANCE KIT:
KIT:
Code R450603
G 3/8÷G 1/2
3. Gasket O-Ring :
KTGH11K0V12=4
Code R990000/V
G 3/4÷G 1
4. Complete diaphragm KTGH13K0V19=4+5
with plunger:
G 3/8 -G 1/2 Code R452127/V
G 3/4 -G 1 Code R452128/V
DIMENSIONS:
COIL POWER ABSORPTION DIMENSIONS

Pipe A B C Inrush Hold TYPE D E F
Type W
ISO 228/1 mm mm mm VA ~ VA ~ mm mm mm
21H11K0V120 G 3/8
40 100 50 B 30
21H12K0V120 G 1/2 8W 25 14,5 42 54
S 32
21H13K0V190 G 3/4 105
65 104 12 W 35 25 U 36 48 60
21H14K0V250 G1 112
14 W 43 27 G 52 55 67
21H11K0V120 ÷ 21H14K0V250-S ODE 30-06-2002

3/2-Way Solenoidvalve G-Serie
VALVE TYPE : DIRECT ACTING Type 72
Function : normaly closed, NC
Construcion : diaphragm
Pressure range : 0 - 16 bar max., see tabel
Material : brass
Seal : viton
Ambient temp. : max. +35°C
Medium temp. : -10 tot +80°C
Supply voltage : 230/50, 24/50
24/=
Other voltags on request
Enclosure : IP65 according to DIN40050
Medium : neutral, gaseous and liquid
2
Also available in Stainless Steel
Viscosity : 22 mm /sec
Connection : 1/8" upto 1/2" BSP
Installation : solenoid in upright position only
Power consumption : Solenoid.182= 6,8 Watt
.032= 11 Watt
.012= 18,5 Watt
.148= 10 Watt (II 2G EEx m IIC T4)
Conn. Orifice Flow-rate Typenumber Max. pressure in bar / solenoidsystem:

BSP in mm m³/uur .182 .032 .012 .012-NO .012-UN .147
1/4" 1,0 0,06 A7240/1002/ 0-10 0-25 0-90* 0-25 0-16 0-20
1/4" 1,5 0,09 A7241/1002/ 0-8 0-15 0-40* 0-15 0-9 0-10
1/4" 2,0 0,13 A7242/1002/ 0-6 0-11 0-22 0-11 0-7 0-8
1/4" 2,5 0,16 A7243/1002/ - 0-8 0-15 0-8 0-5 0-6
1/4" 3,0 0,20 A7244/1002/ - 0-6 0-10 0-5 0-3 0-3
1/4" 4,0 0,35 A7245/1002/ - 0-3 0-5,5 0-3 0-2 0-2
1/4" 5,0 0,50 A7246/1002/ - 0-2 0-3,5 - 0-1 0-0,8
1/4" 6,0 0,75 A7247/1002/ - 0-1 0-2,5 - - -
1/8" 1,0 - 6,0 A7230-37/1002/ technical specification as above

All technical specifications are given with best knowledge, no responsibility is accepted for the information stated ! GN02-12-037
Dimensional drawing standard type
Function :
NC - normaly closed
Connection diagramm
Geel
Geel
Blauw
All technical specifications are given with best knowledge, no responsibility is accepted for the information stated!
Rood
For alternsting and direct With rectidier , for alternating

current . (AC en DC ). current used on a direct
current coil.
Possible to turn
4x90°
Grounding or earth of thge protective circuit should be made in
accordance with regulations of the responsible electric supply
company. Fusing should be appropiately done, in according to the
powerconsumption.
Valvetype A7230-37/1002/.032 A7240-47/1002/.032 A7250-57/1002/.032 A7260-67/1002/.032
G 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2"

A 25 25 30 30
B 35 x 32 35 x 32 35 x 32 35 x 32
C 58 58 58 58
D M6 M6 M6 M6
H 80 80 85 90
K 67,5 67,5 70 70
L 40 50 50 60
M 40 40 40 40
N 10 10 10 10
T 15,5 15,5 15,5 15,5
U 15,5 15,5 15,5 15,5
Pg 11 11 11 11
Kg 0,55 0,6 0,65 0,75
Options
Normaly open Manuel override
Varying media or viscosity Degreased for oxygen
Varying pressure or temperature ranges Free of brass
Base: Stainless Steel Sealing material : EPDM, PTFE
Explosion proof
GN02-12-038
Techni Control International B.V.

Stephensonstraat 33 PO-box 24 - 7900 AA Hoogeveen Phone 0528 - 233400 Fax 0528 - 233410
Appendix 10 – Spare parts list
Page 31 of 31

Pneumatic Conveying System PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Pneumatic Conveying System PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

DOCUMENTATION AND OPERATOR MANUAL

PNEUMATIC CONVEYING SYSTEM

Date : March 2017

Document number Revision Issue date

Supplier: TBMA Europe b.v.

Post address: PO box 140

1.2 - Contact persons

Sales: Mr. C. Ryan

Mechanical: Mr. Niels Goossens

Electrical: Mr. Gerard Kamerman

1.3 – Revision overview

Document number Revision Remarks Issue date

Particle size : Powder 50,0 [µm]

Temperature : 0 / +40 [°C]

Process zone : Safe area

Conveying capacity : 10.000 [kg / h]

2.1 - Type plate

Not part of the TBMA delivery.

The transport is a dense phase pneumatic transport.

The compressed air for the transport must be between 3 – 6 Bar.

3.3 - Conveying line

The conveying line is not part of the TBMA delivery.

The following Point are important for a stable pneumatic transport:

1. Pneumatic conveying lines must be mounted horizontal or vertical.

3.5 - Sequence of operation

When the start signal is low.

In general the user should take care of:

4.1 - Safety symbols

When activated the moving parts are powerless.

4.3 - Safety guards

6.1 - Start page

6.2 - Event line

Possible events are:

6.3 - Global keys are

To go to the password page you must log on as Chef.

Press the start key to place the system to ready to use

The possible keys are:

= Go to the previous page.

The possible keys are:

= Go to the previous page.

00,0 s Vack time = Time to add product to the conveying line.

000 s Fluidisation pause time = Time between the fluidisation pulses.

The possible keys are:

= Go to the previous page.

The possible keys are:

= Go to the previous page.

The possible keys are:

= Go to the previous page.

Alarm Possible cause Possible solusion

2'' EXTERNAL THREAD

3'' EXTERNAL BSP

Operational hours (availability) h / yr 24 hours per day 7

days per week

2'' EXTERNAL BSP

Conveying gas - Compressed air

4'' EXTERNAL BSP

Number of conveying bends - 10

Pmax bar Not applicable

Member of TBMA Holding BV Projection Order Nr

Versione del: 31/04/2000

Sect.1 - Operating Principles ............................................................................... 4

"Air on" phase

"Air off" phase